Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Release 6.4
Network Management System 5 UniX
User manual
Volume 1/1
MN.00144.E 001
Contents
Contents
Section 1
General description
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
1.4
10
1.5
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
13
2.1
14
14
14
1.3
2.
WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1
Map windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1.1 Container map windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
15
17
17
19
19
20
21
22
22
23
24
24
26
26
26
26
27
28
29
29
NMS5UX USERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
3.1
34
3.2
35
3.3
36
36
36
37
37
38
39
39
39
40
40
41
41
3.4
42
42
2.1.2
2.2
3.
II
29
30
Contents
3.4.2
3.4.3
Section 2
Operative procedures
4.
5.
6.
43
43
45
47
4.1
48
4.2
49
4.3
50
53
4.4
55
57
5.1
58
58
58
58
59
5.2
60
5.3
61
72
77
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
6.1
82
62
67
III
Contents
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
7.
82
84
6.2
CONNECTION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
6.3
90
90
90
90
91
91
92
6.4
93
93
94
96
97
6.5
LOM/LCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.1
Connection types between LOM/LCT and equipment
(Monitoring, Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.2
Indication to the NMS5UX user of the LOM/LCT
presence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.3
Enabling/disabling of the LCTequipment connection
in Configuration mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
100
101
7.1
102
102
104
104
7.2
IV
ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1
Alarm acquiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2
Alarm displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2.1 Dynamic displaying of the alarms . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2.2 Displaying of the current alarms and of the alarm
history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3
Alarm correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4
Alarm saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5
Seriousness level of the alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5.1 Change of the seriousness level . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5.2 Change of the seriousness level for the User
Input Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6
Alarm enabling/disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.7
Ringing alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
98
99
105
105
106
107
107
108
109
110
111
Contents
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
Section 3
Menu and commands
8.
9.
111
112
113
114
115
119
8.1
IMPORT/EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1
To save on a file the objects of a map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2
To save on file the objects of a container . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3
To import into a map the objects memorised on a file . . .
8.1.4
To import into a container the objects memorised on a file
120
120
120
121
122
8.2
CHANGE MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
125
9.1
ADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.1
Add Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2
Add Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2.1 Add Network Element SNMP Managed . . .
9.1.2.2 Add Network Element SNMP Managed
(Virtual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2.3 Add Network Element Legacy Protocol
Managed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2.4 Add Network Element Legacy Protocol
Managed (Virtual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.3
Add Radio Link for Scoreboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.4
Add LegacyWorkstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.5
Add Communication Server Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
127
128
129
MODIFY/VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.1
Modify/View Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.2
Modify/View Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.3
Modify/View Radio Link for Scoreboards . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.4
Modify/View LegacyWorkstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.5
Modify/View Communication Server Board . . . . . . . . . .
139
139
140
141
141
141
9.2
132
133
135
136
136
138
Contents
9.3
DELETE
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
9.3.5
.................................................
Delete Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Radio Link for Scoreboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete LegacyWorkstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Communication Server Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
143
143
144
144
144
9.4
ARRANGE SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.1
Arrange Symbols Horizontal Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.2
Arrange Symbols Vertical Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
146
146
9.5
MAP REALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
9.5.1
To create, into the open map, the copy of a NE, WS or CBS
object present into another map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
9.5.2
Map Realignment Window Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
9.5.2.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
9.5.2.2 Map Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
9.5.2.3 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
9.6
150
151
152
VI
159
160
161
161
163
166
166
166
167
159
Contents
169
169
171
173
174
174
175
175
175
177
177
178
178
179
179
179
179
180
180
181
182
183
183
183
185
187
187
188
189
191
192
193
193
193
195
199
199
182
VII
Contents
12.1.4
12.1.5
201
201
201
202
202
202
203
203
205
205
206
206
206
206
207
207
207
208
209
210
212
212
212
213
213
215
219
222
VIII
200
200
204
214
224
224
225
225
227
228
Contents
12.9.2
228
228
229
229
231
231
231
234
235
238
239
241
241
241
241
242
243
244
244
244
245
246
247
12.9.3
12.9.4
247
247
248
250
251
252
253
254
254
254
254
257
258
IX
Contents
259
259
260
262
262
263
263
263
265
267
267
268
268
271
273
273
274
274
275
276
279
279
280
280
281
282
284
284
284
285
286
288
288
289
289
290
290
13.14 HW INVENTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.14.1 To display/filter the hardware inventory data of the NEs
present in the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
291
270
292
Contents
293
295
296
297
299
299
299
302
304
308
308
309
309
310
310
310
310
310
311
313
315
315
316
316
316
317
317
15.4 PM BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.4.1 Backup procedure of the PM measurements . . . . . . . . . .
318
318
15.5 PM RESTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.5.1 Restore procedure from disk of the PM measurements .
15.5.2 Restore procedure from tape of the PM measurements
320
320
321
294
XI
Contents
XII
15.6 PM DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.6.1 Deleting procedure of the backup files of the PM
measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
322
322
323
324
324
325
325
325
325
326
326
327
329
331
331
332
332
333
335
335
336
16.2 CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.2.1 Connect Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.2.2 Connect Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
337
337
338
16.3 DISCONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.3.1 Disconnect Network Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.3.2 Disconnect Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
339
339
340
341
342
342
343
344
344
345
346
346
Contents
16.7.2
347
348
350
350
350
351
352
352
353
354
354
355
357
357
358
359
360
360
361
362
363
364
17. NMS6UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
365
18. HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
367
18.1 NMS5UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
368
369
369
369
370
370
370
Section 4
Appendix
371
373
XIII
Contents
XIV
379
385
401
401
Section
General description
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM
The NMS5UX Network Management System 5 Unix (synonym of CEM Central Element
Manager) system has been developed by Siae Microelettronica and it is a supervisory system
able to control and to manage telecommunication equipment.
The user can dialogue with the supervisory system by means of a graphical interface called
NMS5UX graphical interface.
The NMS5UX system has been developed to be used with the UNIX operating system and it
uses all the functions present into such a system.
The NMS5UX graphical interface has been developed and integrated into HP OpenView
Windows Network Node Manager graphical platform (refer to paragraph 1.2.2) and it uses all
the graphical and functional characteristics present into such a platform.
1.1
RELEASE
The information present into this manual refers to the supervisory system and to the NMS5UX
graphical interface release 6.4.
The release of the currently used NMS5UX graphical interface can be checked into the opening
window of the interface itself (NMS5UX Login) or selecting the command About NMS5UX from
the Help menu, present into the map windows of the system (Siae World, etc.).
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM
1.2
1.2.1
Modular structure
The NMS5UX supervisory system is an highly versatile one because it is a system with a
modular structure.
It is composed by a group of main application programs to which, according to the Siae
equipment type to be managed, it is added an additional application program (called <equipment
type> Manager).
The group of the main application programs manages the NMS5UX graphical interface at
general level (map windows: Siae World, Container, WS, etc.) by means of such an interface,
the user can graphically display the network on the video, activate (and deactivate) the
connection with the equipment, check the functional status (current alarms and alarm history),
the results of the Performance Monitoring measurements, etc. At this level, the equipment is
considered as a whole unit.
The additional application program has the aim to provide, for the NMS5UX graphical interface,
the specific commands and functions with respect to the equipment type to be managed.
Each additional application program manages a specific equipment graphical interface
(Equipment main window refer to paragraph 2.1.2) through which the user can check the
equipment functional status and act directly on its management checking or changing the
configuration parameters and checking the quality parameters of the signal.
The NMS5UX supervisory system can be equipped with one or more Manager application
programs according to the equipment types present into its own network.
The access to the graphical interface at general level is executed with the startingup of the
NMS5UX graphical interface.
The access to the graphical interface at equipment level is executed opening the Equipment
window relevant to the equipment itself.
The access to the graphical interface at equipment level is controlled by the access to the
graphical interface at general level.
1.2.2
The NMS5UX graphical interface release 6.4 is integrated into the HP OpenView Windows
Network Node Manager graphical platform.
This means that the NMS5UX interface is not provided with its own menus, but the commands,
necessary for the management of the Siae equipment 1, have been integrated into the menus
of the HP Open View Windows NNM graphical platform.
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM
In such a way, it is possible to manage, into the same map (refer to paragraph 1.2.3), as Siae
equipment (Legacy and SNMP) as IP devices (peripheral units of other manufacturers that use
the IP/SNMP protocol).
Then, the Siae equipment managed with the SNMP protocol (refer to paragraph 1.3), are
detected by the Network Node Manager standard application programs. In fact for such
equipment, standard application programs are used valid as for the Siae equipment as for the
IP devices.
1.2.3
Maps
The NMS5UX supervisory system allows coupling a map to each single NMS5UX user. More
user can be associated to the same map.
The whole equipment network or a portion of it can correspond to a map. In this second case,
the user which the map is associated to, will receive only notifications coming from the
equipment contained in his portion of network.
To manage an equipment it is necessary to create a graphic symbol that represents it. The same
symbol can be created in more maps (creation of more copies of the symbol). In this way, the
equipment data are not duplicated in the database, but all the copies access to the same
information.
Then, it is possible to save objects of a map into a file and export/import object of a map to
another one.
1.2.4
The details of the hardware requirements (workstation/server type, etc.) and of the software
ones (version of the operating system, of the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface,
etc.) necessary for the NMS5UX supervisory system, are reported into the manual NMS5UX
Administrator Manual
1.2.5
The maximum number of equipment that can be managed at the same time by the NMS5UX
system depends on the code word requested by the user.
1.
Such commands are identified by the wording SIAE before the name of the command itself.
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM
1.2.6
The maximum number of NMS5UX users that can open the NMS5UX graphical interface (using
the same map or different ones) depends on the code word requested by the user.
1.
1.3
NMS5UX SYSTEM
The NMS5UX system release 6.4 is able to manage at the same time Siae equipment that use
as equipmentsupervisory system communication protocol the following one:
D
a proprietary protocol 2.
Into the manual, such equipment are called equipment managed by the Legacy
protocol.
1.3.1
The equipment managed with the Legacy protocol, manufactured by Siae Microelettronica, that
can be controlled by the NMS5UX system are the following ones:
D
1.3.2
The equipment managed with the SNMP protocol, manufactured by Siae Microelettronica, that
can be controlled by the NMS5UX system are the following ones:
2.
This protocol complies with the international standards concerning the object modelling (object
displaying mode), the dialogue primitives conceptually based upon the CMIP and HDLC line
protocol (High Level Data Link Control).
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM
PMP system
Point to MultiPoint
CommServerS
IPBox
1.3.3
Equipment manuals
Subject user manual has the aim to describe the use and the operations that the user can
execute with the NMS5UX graphical interface at general level (refer to paragraph 1.2.1).
The use of the NMS5UX graphical interface at equipment level (Equipment window refer to
paragraph 2.1.2) changes according to the relevant equipment type. It is described into the
relevant user manuals. With details:
D
G series Radio terminal with Legacy interface Radio Manager (G series) user manual
3.
By means of a single PMP object, one PMP sector is controlled and managed (together with the
master station, the peripheral station and the optional equipment).
4.
Support equipment for the physical connection between NMS5UX and the Siae equipment
(managed by Legacy protocol). CommServerS is equipped with serial ports (maximum 7).
5.
Support equipment for the physical connection between NMS5UX and the Siae equipment
(managed by SNMP protocol). IPBox is equipped with RS232 interface (serial), Ethernet Lan
and E1; depending on the required firmware, it can operate as IP or IPOSI router.
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM
Warning. All the functions at disposal of the system administrator (user with superuser profile)
are described into the NMS5UX Administrator Manual manual.
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM
1.4
store on disk/tape the results. Then, the data can be restored, displayed and
saved (subdivided by month) on a file.
The saving operation can be executed for a single measurements of a single
equipment or for a measurement of all the equipment of the same type present
into the map.
10
1.
NMS5UX SYSTEM
commands 6.
D
List of the application programs (browser, manager, etc. ), relevant to the NMS5UX
system, on progress at the choice of the command.
Possibility to require for or to force the closing of an aplication program on progress
(browser, manager, etc. ) of the NMS5UX system.
Access to the system with 5 different user profiles which determine the available
commands and the functions.
6.
Management of the LCT user list stored for each single equipment.
The predefined sequences of SNMP commands are provided at customers request by Siae
Microelettronica.
11
1.
1.5
NMS5UX SYSTEM
SERVICE
The service provided by Siae microelettronica will comply with the requirements specified into
the Software Maintenance Contract, if it has been defined.
To be able to use such a service, it is necessary to fill in entirely the Form for the signalling
of a SW failure (present in the last section of the subject manual) and to forward it to the
following address:
SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A.
via Michelangelo Buonarroti, 21
20093 Cologno Monzese Milano
www.siaemic.it
Fax
+ (39) 02 25391585
email siaemi@siaemic.it
12
2.
The NMS5UX graphical interface, developed by Siae microelettronica, is integrated into the HP
OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform.
Then, it respects the conventions, relevant to the positions of the menus, the style and using
modes of the windows, the use of the keyboard and of the mouse, etc. typical of the HP
OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform.
Warning. This chapter describes only the elements of the graphical interface specific of the
NMS5UX supervisory system (use of the map windows for the network displaying, type of the
objects present into the map windows, their characteristics, etc.).
For the use of the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface, refer to the relevant
documentation.
13
2.
2.1
WINDOWS
The HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface uses a window mechanism that allows
easily passing from a general view to an always more detailed one.
This characteristic is used also by the NMS5UX graphical interface that using the window
mechanism (called map windows) allows passing from a general view of the map (network or
subnetwork) to a view continuously more detailed until to reach the view of the single
equipment (refer to paragraph 2.1.1).
The windows are used also to display the data (for instance the configuration and alarm
parameters of the equipment), to ask for the information necessary to complete an operation
(dialogue windows) or to inform the user on the result of a command (system windows and
confirmation windows).
The use of such windows, into the NMS5UX graphical interface, is the same one of the HP
OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface. For their description, refer to the specific
documentation.
Then, the windows are used to access to the NMS5UX graphical interface at equipment level
(Equipment windows refer to paragraphs 2.1.2 and 1.2.1).
2.1.1
Map windows
The map windows are the most important ones because they are used to display the map (refer
to paragraph 3.3.3) and they contain the commands, grouped in menus, that allow the user
working with the NMS5UX graphical interface at general level (refer to paragraph 1.2.1).
Here below, there is the description of the map windows for the NMS5UX system.
14
2.
The network can be observed as a whole unit, as a distribution of elements into a geographic
area (for instance subnetworks) or it is possible to decide to involve a single object to display
its configuration; the user can decide which level and than with which details has to be used to
access to the network information.
The user has the maximum freedom for the creation of the number and of the type of the levels
that better comply with its own network.
Fig. 2.1 shows an example of network hierarchical structure.
Each level is coupled with one or more container windows according to the number of the
symbols present into the map with upper hierarchical level as pointed out into the figure.
7.
Also the Siae World object, by default, forwards the status information of the objects present inside
it (asterisk, flashing and colour of the icon refer to paragraph 2.2.6.7, 2.2.6.8 and 2.2.6.10).
Naturally, the status information are important only if the NMS5UX graphical interface has been
startedup.
15
2.
Container
objects
Container
objects
Clicking twice on a
Container symbol (for
instance Milano), the
system opens the map
window with lower
hierarchical level (that will be
called for instance B level).
On the video, the system
can display as many
windows with B level as are
the Container objects
present into the Nord Italia
map window
Warning. It is possible to
create all the desired levels.
Then, for each level, it is
possible to create objects that
represent the equipment (NE
objects)
Fig. 2.1
16
2.
2.1.2
Equipment window
The choice of a Network Element object allows accessing to the graphical interface at equipment
level (refer to paragraph 1.2.1), such a level is represented by the Equipment window 9.
At this level, the user can enter into the equipment to check and to change the configuration
parameters, to execute the maintenance and testing operations (refer to Fig. 2.2).
Every type of Siae equipment, that can be actually managed by the NMS5UX system, is
characterized by its own Equipment window 10.
The detailed description of each single Equipment window and of the objects inside it is reported
into the relevant equipment manual (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
The Equipment window of a specific equipment can be opened by more users at the same time.
The first user who opens the window will be able as to check the parameters as to set or to
change them (ReadWrite access). The other users will be able only to check the parameters
(Read Only access), (refer to paragraph 3.4.3).
Warning. In the equipment window with Read Only access, the alarms will not be dynamically
updated, it is necessary to require the updating selecting a proper command.
8.
The selection of a CSB object, coupled with a CommServerS equipment, opens the Equipment
window of the equipment.
9.
To open the Equipment window, quickly select twice the graphical symbol that represents the
equipment into the map window.
10.
The management of each single Equipment window is executed by a specific application program
called <equipment type> Manager. Such application programs are present into the NMS5UX
system and are provided at customers request.
17
2.
Warning. The Equipment window can be opened only if the equipment is actually connected or
if it has been connected at least one time.
These considerations can not be applied for the objects that represent virtual equipment. For
the virtual NEs, it is always possible to open the equipment window.
GENERAL level
EQUIPMENT level
Siae World
map window
Container
Network Element
WS
CSB (1)
CSB (2)
Container
map window
Equipment
window
[WS]
map window
CSB
map window
Fig. 2.2
18
2.
2.2
TITLE bar
MENU bar
PUSHBUTTON bar
Object
(Symbol)
Asterisk
Icon
Name
STATUS bar
View area
Fig. 2.3
2.2.1
Title bar
It is an horizontal bar where the system points out the name of the map window.
The system automatically assigns, to the window, the object name (Container, WS or CSB) that
opens such a window (refer to paragraph 2.2.6.6).
11.
The first time that it is opened the Siae World window of a new map, the View area is empty (if
the system has not been configured by Siae microelettronica).
In such a case, before connecting the equipment, it is necessary to display graphically the
equipment network into its own map (refer to paragraph 5.3).
19
2.
2.2.2
Pushbutton bar
The subject bar contains the pushbuttons displayed into Fig. 2.4.
(1)
(2)
(11)
(12)
(3)
(4)
(13)
(5)
(14)
(6)
(7)
(15)
(16)
(8)
(17)
(9)
(18)
(10)
(19)
Fig. 2.4
Notes of Fig. 2.4
(1) The subject pushbutton closes the activated map window.
(2) The subject pushbutton opens and brings at front the map window defined as Home. Its selection
has the same consequences of the selection of the Window Home command.
(3) The subject pushbutton opens and brings at front the Root map window. Its selection has the same
effects of the selection of the Window Root command.
(4) The subject pushbutton brings at front the father window. Its selection has the same effects of the
selection of the Window Parent command.
(5) The subject pushbutton opens the Quick Navigator window. Its selection has the same effects of the
selection of the Window Quick Navigator command.
(6) The subject pushbutton opens the Panner window. Its selection has the same effects of the selection
of the View Pan and Zoom command.
(7) This command shows/hide the names of the connections. Its selection has the same effects of the
selection of the View Show Connection Labels On For This Submap/Off For This Submap
command.
(8) The subject pushbutton opens the Add Container Symbol window. Such a window allows creating
a new container. Its selection has the same effects of the selection of the Edit SIAE Objects Add
Container command.
(9) The subject pushbutton opens the Add Equipment window. Such a window allows creating a new
equipment. Its selection has the same effects of the selection of the Edit SIAE Objects Add
Network Element SNMP Managed command.
(10) The subject pushbutton opens the Graphical Performance Monitoring window. Such a window
allows checking the results of the PM measurements relevant to the selected equipment. Its selection
has the same effects of the selection of the Performance SIAE Performance Performance
Monitoring command.
20
2.
Warning. The subject pushbutton is available only if it has been selected an equipment.
(11) The subject pushbutton opens the Alarm History Browser window. Such a window allows checking
the alarm history. Its selection has the same effects of the selection of the Fault SIAE Logs
Network Alarm History command.
(12) The subject pushbutton opens the Current Alarms Browser window. Such a window allows checking
the alarms currently activated into the equipment. Its selection has the same effects of the selection
of the Fault SIAE Logs Network Current Alarms command.
(13) The subject pushbutton opens the Software Download window. Such a window allows executing the
updating of the software/firmware relevant to the selected equipment. Its selection has the same
effects of the selection of the Options SIAE Options SNMPNE Sw/Fw Download command.
Warning. The subject pushbutton is available only if it has been selected an equipment.
(14) The subject pushbutton opens the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window. Such a window allows
checking the list of all the equipment known by the NMS5UX system. Its selection has the same
effects of the selection of the Locate SIAE Elements Equipment List/Locate command.
(15) The subject pushbutton opens the LINE TEST Command window. Such a window allows executing
the line test for the selected equipment. Its selection has the same effects of the selection of the SIAE
Commands Line Test Network Element command.
Warning. The subject pushbutton is available only if it has been selected an equipment.
(16) The subject pushbutton opens the CONNECT Command window. Such a window allows connecting
the selected equipment. Its selection has the same effects of the selection of the SIAE Commands
Connect Network Element command.
Warning. The subject pushbutton is available only if it has been selected an equipment.
(17) The subject pushbutton opens the DISCONNECT Command window. Such a window allows
disconnecting the selected equipment. Its selection has the same effects of the selection of the SIAE
Commands Disconnect Network Element command.
Warning. The subject pushbutton is available only if it has been selected an equipment.
(18) The subject pushbutton opens the ALARM REALIGNMENT Command window. Such a window
allows executing the realignment of the alarms for the selected equipment. Its selection has the same
effects of the selection of the SIAE Commands Alarm Realignment Network Element
command.
Warning. The subject pushbutton is available only if it has been selected an equipment.
(19) The subject pushbutton opens the About HP OpenView window. Its selection has the same effects
of the selection of the Help About HP OpenView command.
2.2.3
Status bar
Into this bar, the system points out the name of the actually open map and the access type to
the map itself (ReadWrite or Read Only refer to paragraph 3.4).
The other wordings that can be displayed into the status bar are typical of the HP OpenView
Windows NNM graphical interface. For their detailed description, refer to the relevant
documentation.
21
2.
2.2.4
Into this area, the system parks the new objects, after their creation, waiting for their positioning
into the View area, done by the user.
2.2.5
Menu bar
It is an horizontal bar that contains the typical menus of the HP OpenView Windows NNM
graphical platform. Into such menus, there are the commands of the NMS5UX graphical
interface (refer to paragraph 1.2.2).
Each option, if it has been selected, opens a popup menu that lists a series of commands.
Some commands immediately execute the coupled operation, some other ones open some
additional popup menus (the commands followed by the symbol ").
When the system displays a command with grey colour instead of with the white one, it means
that such a command is not available.
The deactivation of a command can depend on the access type to the map (refer to paragraph
3.4) or on its own user profile (refer to paragraph 3.3.4). It does not provide the command use
or to make the command available, it is necessary to execute before another operation as, for
instance, to select a symbol.
The command of the NMS5UX graphical interface are preceded by the prefix SIAE before the
command name itself.
Warning. These commands are present only into the Siae World map window 12 and into the
system map windows that are opened by the selection of the objects (Container, WS or CSB)
present into such a window (map windows of the NMS5UX system).
The commands specific of the NMS5UX graphical interface are present into the following
menus:
12.
22
Map SIAE Map. This menu contains the command to export/import the elements of
a map to/from another one and to save on a file all the symbols (container, NE, etc.)
present into a map and the command to change the map.
Edit SIAE Objects. This menu contains the commands necessary to create, to
delete or to change the objects of the NMS5UX system (refer to paragraph 5.1).
With the exception of the Map SIAE Map menu that is available also into the Root map.
2.
Fault SIAE Logs. This menu contains the commands necessary to display the
current alarms and the alarm history relevant to the equipment present into the map.
Then, it is present the command to display the history of the operations executed by
the NMS5UX users.
Options SIAE Options. This menu contains the commands necessary to change
the alarm seriousness (network alarms and local ones), to execute the updating of the
equipment software/firmware, to manage the NMS5UX users and the maps (creation,
deleting, change).
Locate SIAE Elements. This menu contains the commands to display the list of all
the equipment, workstation and communication servers managed by the system and
to search an equipment into the open map.
Misc SIAE Tools. This menu contains the commands to save/restore/delete, from
tape to disk, the alarm history, the results of the Performance Monitoring
measurements and the database of the supervisory system.
Siae Commands. This menu contains the commands to manage the connection
between the equipment and the supervisory system and to execute the download of
the equipment configuration (virtual or real) to another equipment (virtual or real).
Help. This menu contains the commands to open the online manuals of the
supervisory system (NMS5UX) and to check the list of the software programs that
constitute the NMS5UX software package (About NMS5UX).
Warning. The detailed description of the commands present into the above listed menus is
reported into chapter 3 of the subject manual.
For the use and the description of the menus and of the commands typical of the HP OpenView
Windows NNM graphical platform refer to the specific documentation.
The NMS6UX menu is an optional menu. It is present in the map windows (also in the Root
window), ONLY if the NMS6UX module software is installed 13.
2.2.6
ViewArea
The View area is the part of the map window where the system displays the objects created
by the user.
13.
Software module realized by Siae Microelettronica for the contemporary management of more
NMS5UX systems.
The module integrates into a NMS5UX system (NMS6UX menu) from which the other NMS5UX
systems are managed.
23
2.
2.2.6.1 Objects
An object is the representation done by the supervisory system of a network element.
Two or more objects that represent parts of the network that execute the same function either
are similar one each other or are grouped into object classes.
Each object class is characterized by an assembly of parameters (or attributes) that define the
characteristics of the objects that belong to such a class. All the objects of the same class are
defined by the same assembly of parameters, each one with its own value.
Ther NMS5UX user has to consider each part of the network as an object that belongs to an
object class. Such a class is characterized by one or more attributes and a value is assigned
to each one of such attributes.
For instance, the network as a whole is an object, the container (subnetwork, station,
substation) where there are the equipment is an object, each single equipment is an object.
An object can be:
created
deleted
modified
moved. To move an object, it is sufficient to select it and, keeping pressed the left
pushbutton of the mouse, bring it to the new position.
It is possible to put the object in a new position inside the area (container) or it is
possible to move the objects from a container to the other (to select an object and
drag it into a container).
Warning. This second operation cannot be executed if the asterisk symbol is
present next to the equipment (see paragraph 2.2.6.7).
All the created objects and the relevant values of the parameters are stored into the database
of the NMS5LX system. They will be stored until the user deletes the object.
24
2.
CONTAINER
objects
NETWORK
ELEMENT
objects
WORKSTATION
object
COMMUNICATION
SERVER BOARD
object
WS PORT and
CSB PORT
objects
Fig. 2.5
Usually, an object can be present into every map window with some exceptions.
Tab. 2.1 points out all the objects managed by the NMS5UX system. For each object, it is
pointed out the type of the map window where such an object can be inserted.
Tab. 2.1
Object
Container Siae World
Container
Network Element
Radio Link 14
Workstation
Communication Server Board
WS Port
CSB Port
14.
Warning. The command for the creation of the Radio Link object is an optional one.
25
2.
26
2.
For the Container, Network Element, Radio Link and Workstation objects, it is possible to define
the name during the creation phases of the object (for some symbols also during the change
phase).
On the contrary, for the Communication Server Board, WS Port and CSB Port objects, it is not
possible to couple a generic name, but the system displays on the video the relevant IP address
(CSB) and the port number (WS Port and CSB Port).
For the Container, WS and CSB objects (that open a map window), the name of the object will
correspond also to the title of the relevant window.
Foe instance, if the user assign to a Container symbol the name Italy, at the double selection
of such an object, the system will open the map window with the title Italy.
The icon name is displayed inside a rectangle. Usually, the colour of the text string is black on
white background.
Such colours can be reversed, that is white wording on black background; this means that the
symbol has been pointed out after the choice of the HighLight Equipment On Map command
(refer to paragraph 12.1.2.3).
To remove the pointedout status, select the Clear HighLights command (refer to paragraph
12.1.2.3).
at least one alarm (current alarm and/or into the alarm history) relevant to the
equipment has not been marked (acknowledged).
To mark an alarm, refer to the paragraphs 12.1.2.2 e 12.2.2.2.
from the last time that has been opened the Equipment window of the equipment, the
LCT program has been connected to the NE at least one time in Configuration mode.
To remove (mark) this condition, open the Equipment window for the equipment under
examination.
the last Configuration Upload operation toward the equipment under examination has
not been successfully ended.
This condition is automatically removed (marked) at the first Configuration Upload
operation correctly executed.
Warning. The asterisk on the side of the icon points out that it is present at least ONE of the
above listed conditions. It is possible to check the status of each single condition into the
27
2.
Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window (refer to paragraph 14.1.1) and into the Equipment
Info/Find:... window (refer to paragraph 11.1.1).
By default, the asterisk points out the status of the above listed conditions.
It is possible to change the list of the conditions, coupling the presence (or the absence)
of the asterisk to two or to one only of the above mentioned conditions.
The change can be executed only by the user with the superuser profile. More detailed
information are reported into the documentation NMS5UX Administrator Manual.
For the NE objects, the absence of the asterisk points out that:
D
all the alarms (active or historic ones) of the equipment have been marked.
from the last time that it has been opened the Equipment window of the equipment,
the LCT has not been connected in Configuration mode.
the last Configuration Upload operation towards the equipment has been successfully
executed.
the presence of the asterisk points out that, into the relevant map window, there is at
least a NE object (or Container) with the asterisk.
the absence of the asterisk points out that, into the relevant map window, there is not
any NE object (or Container) with the asterisk.
15.
28
2.
Behaviour
It opens the Siae World map window that represents the highest
level of the map.
Container
Network Element
Radio Link
14
Workstation
WS Port
CSB Port
16.
Into the menu heading, the system points out the name of the selected symbol.
29
2.
Info).
D SIAE NE Alarm History. It opens the Alarm History Browser window. Such a window contains
the history of the signals (alarm, event, status) relevant to the selected NE only (Fault SIAE Logs
NE Alarm History).
D SIAE NE Current Alarms. It opens the Current Alarms Browser window. Such a window contains
the signals (alarm, event, status) currently activated into the selected equipment (Fault SIAE
Logs NE Current Alarms).
17.
Between brackets, the system points out the command, present into the menus of the map
windows, that executes the same action.
30
2.
Tab. 2.3
Symbol
Container *
Network
Element **
Colour
Description
Blue
The relevant map window does not contain any Network Element
(NE), WS or CBS object in connected status
Green
Light blue
Yellow
Orange
Red
Brown
Green
Light blue
Yellow
Orange
Red
Red
with X
Pink
White
Radio Link 14
Black
the colour is a fixed one and it does not point out any status
condition.
Workstation
Brown
Green
Red
31
2.
Tab. 2.3
Symbol
Communication
Server Board
(CommServer F)
(CommServerF)
Communication
Server Board **
Colour
Description
Brown
Green
Red with X
Brown
Green
Light blue
Yellow
Orange
Red
Red with X
Pink
(CommServerS)
WS Port
CSB Port
Blue
Green
Blue
Green
By default, the colour of the icon points out always the colour of the object (present into
the icon itself) that has the most serious condition.
The status of the objects present into the icon is extended also to the Siae World object
(refer to paragraph 2.1.1.2).
**
By default, the colour of the icon points out always the colour of the most serious alarm
present into the equipment.
***
By default, the colour of the icon points out always the colour of the most serious alarm
present into the CommServerS.
32
3.
NMS5UX USERS
The NMS5UX graphical interface can be startedup at the same time on more XTerminals or
Workstations/Servers 18 connected one each other by means of an Ethernet connection 19.
In such a way, the displaying of the information relevant to the equipment network is executed
at the same time on all the terminals and the data insertion or the command forwarding executed
by an user can be done from all the terminals.
To open a copy of the NMS5UX graphical interface, it is necessary to have at disposal a
NMS5UX user.
The supervisory system is provided with a predefined NMS5UX user (refer to the following
page).
Then, it will be possible to create all the desired NMS5UX users.
18.
The word workstation/server usually identifies the machine on which it is installed the NMS5UX
system.
Warning. The execution of the application programs relevant to the NMS5UX system can be
remotized on different workstations or servers by means of a clientserver architecture.
More detailled information are reported into the Siae documentation NMS5UX Administrator
Manual.
19.
The NMS5UX system is based upon the UNIX operating system and it uses all the characteristics
provided by such an operating system. Among such characxteristics, there is the multiuser
function, that is the possibility to support the management of more users at the same time.
33
3.
3.1
NMS5UX USERS
For each NMS5UX user to be created, it is necessary to create a UNIX user, because the users
of the NMS5UX system are a subassembly of the Unix users.
Then, between these two assemblies of users there is a specific connection: it is possible to
couple a single NMS5UX user to a Unix user.
Then, before creating the NMS5UX user, it is necessary to create the relevant UNIX one 20.
Warning. It is not necessary to create a UNIX user for the user with superuser profile (predefined
user provided with the supervisory system) because during the installation phases of the
NMS5UX system, it is created a UNIX user with username and password nms5ux to which
it is coupled a NMS5UX user with username and password nms5ux (refer to paragraph 4.4).
20.
34
3.
3.2
NMS5UX USERS
During the installation of the supervisory system, it is created the NMS5UX user with the
following characteristics:
D
username nms5ux
password nms5ux
map nms5ux
profile superuser
35
3.
NMS5UX USERS
3.3
3.3.1
Username
3.3.2
Password
21.
36
Warning. The operation is available only for the superuser (refer to para. 13.4.1.2).
3.
NMS5UX USERS
Your Password is going to expire on <data>. Please change it, points out that ones
password is expiring.
This window is displayed 5 days before the expiry of the user password. It will be
displayed each time the user starts the graphic interface until the user changes the
password or this one expires.
Password expired. Please change it to login, points out that ones password is expired.
To open the NMS5UX interface, it is necessary to change the password
Warning. The activation of the periodical password change does not influence the expiry date
of the user, that can be set during the creation of a NMS5UX user.
The two functionalities are independent and can exist contemporarily.
3.3.3
Maps
37
3.
NMS5UX USERS
The users with advanced, normal and entry profile can open their own default map only (refer
to paragraph 3.3.4.3, 3.3.4.4 and 3.3.4.5).
At the installation of the supervisory system, it is created the nms5ux map (refer to paragraph
3.3.3.1). Then, it will be possible to create a new map.
To change or to delete a map, it is necessary to use the controls of the HP OpenView Windows
NNM graphical interface (by default such commands are available only for the user with
superuser profile) 22.
It is possible to couple more NMS5UX users to the same map (more users will have the same
default map), such users can open and use the map at the same time 23.
In this case, only one user will be have the Read Write access to the map, all the other users
will have the Read Only access (refer to paragraph 3.4).
Warning. What just said rules for the users with superuser, privileged or advanced profile. The
normal and entry users has always Read Only access to the map, even if they are the first to
open it.
The same NE, WS or CSB object can be created on more maps. In this case, at the creation
of the first copy of the object into a map, the system will have to set all the parameters of the
object itself.
At the creation of the successive copies, it will be sufficient to fill in the object address (IP
address, physical or logic address) and the system, at the object detection, will automatically
set the parameters and couple, to the object itself, the connection status of the twin object
already present into a map.
22.
23.
The maximum number of NMS5UX users that can access at the same time to the same map
depends on the code word requested by the customer.
24.
Warning. The name of the user with superuser profile can be always changed by the user itself.
38
3.
3.3.4
NMS5UX USERS
Profile
3.3.4.1 Superuser
The superuser can startup the NMS5UX graphical interface relevant to all the maps managed
by the supervisory system.
In each map, the superuser can access both in ReadWrite and Read Only modality and can
verify/set/modify all the parameters (the detail of the commands/operations available to the
superuser are reported in Tab. 20.1).
The detail of the operations that the superuser can execute in the equipment window is reported
in the specific equipment user manual.
The NMS5UX system manages ONLY one superuser. It is created during the installation of the
supervisory system.
Then, it will not be possible to delete the user or to change its profile, but it will possible to change
the username and the password.
3.3.4.2 Privileged
The privileged user can startup the NMS5UX graphical interface relevant to all the maps
managed by the supervisory system.
39
3.
NMS5UX USERS
In each map, the privileged user can access both in ReadWrite and Read Only modality and
can verify/set/modify all the parameters ad eccezione dei comandi di gestione degli utenti (the
detail of the commands/operations available to the privileged user are reported in Tab. 20.1).
The detail of the operations that the privileged user can execute in the equipment window is
reported in the specific equipment user manual.
At the installation of the supervisory system, it is not present any user with privileged profile.
Each NMS5UX user has to be created by the user with superuser profile.
Warning. At the creation of a NMS5UX user with privileged profile, it is possible to couple it with
an already existing map or to create a new one.
It is possible to create all the desired users with privileged profile.
3.3.4.3 Advanced
The advanced user can startup the NMS5UX graphical interface relevant relevant only to the
map coupled with the specific NMS5UX users (the NMS5UX userprofilemap coupling is
executed at the user creation).
In his own map, the advanced user can access both in ReadWrite and in Read Only modality
and can verify/set/modify all the parameters, except the commands for the users management.
The details concerning the commands and the operations available for the user with advanced
profile are reported into Tab. 20.1).
The detail of the operations that the advanced user can execute in the equipment window is
reported in the specific equipment user manual.
At the installation of the supervisory system, it is not present any user with advanced profile.
Each NMS5UX user has to be created by the user with superuser profile.
Warning. At the creation of a NMS5UX user with advanced profile, it is possible to couple it with
an already existing map or to create a new one.
It is possible to create all the desired users with advanced profile.
3.3.4.4 Normal
The normal user can startup the NMS5UX graphical interface relevant relevant only to the map
coupled with the specific NMS5UX users (the NMS5UX userprofilemap coupling is executed
at the user creation).
In his own map, the user can access only in Read Only modality and verify/modify quite all the
parameters. The details concerning the commands and the operations available for the user
with normal profile are reported into Tab. 20.1.
The detail of the operations that the normal user can execute in the equipment window is
reported in the specific equipment user manual.
40
3.
NMS5UX USERS
At the installation of the supervisory system, it is not present any user with normal profile. Each
NMS5UX user has to be created by the user with superuser profile.
It is possible to create all the desired users with normal profile.
3.3.4.5 Entry
The entry user can startup the NMS5UX graphical interface relevant relevant only to the map
coupled with the specific NMS5UX users (the NMS5UX userprofilemap coupling is executed
at the user creation).
In its own map, the entry user can access only in Read Only modality and verify all the
parameters. The details concerning the commands and the operations available for the user
with entry profile are reported into Tab. 20.1.
The detail of the operations that the entry user can execute in the equipment window is reported
in the specific equipment user manual.
At the installation of the supervisory system, it is not present any user with entry profile. Each
NMS5UX user has to be created by the user with superuser profile.
It is possible to create all the desired users with entry profile.
3.3.5
During the creation of a NMS5UX user, it is possible to assign to the relevant user (also defined
account) a validity of n days, where n can be configured (refer to paragraph 13.4.1.2).
After the end of such a time, at the starting up of the NMS5UX graphical interface, the system
displays the message Account expired.
Warning. The displaying of such a message prevents the opening of the Siae World
window.
In such a case, superuser can change the validity time of the NMS5UX user (refer to para.
13.4.1.2).
If the message is displayed when the NMS5UX graphical interface is startedup by the user with
superuser profile, it is necessary to contact Siae microelettronica (refer to paragraph 1.5).
41
3.
NMS5UX USERS
3.4
As it has been described at the beginning of the subject chapter, the NMS5UX graphical
interface relevant to the same map can be startedup on more terminals (XTerminal and
Workstation) at the same time.
To prevent conflicts between the graphical interfaces startedup on different terminals that use
the same map, it is possible to access to the supervisory system by means of two different
modes:
D
ReadWrite. The user that accesses to the map by means of this mode can add,
remove, move the symbols present into the map windows and change the
characteristics of the symbols themselves.
Read Only. The user that accesses to the map by means of this mode can check the
status of the map windows and of the symbols present into such windows but he can
not create, delete or move any symbol or execute any change on the symbols
themselves.
The access in ReadWrite mode, for each map, is assigned to a single user at a time.
Such a user corresponds to the first NMS5UX user that opens the NMS5UX graphical interface
(and then the coupled map) on one of the terminals connected to the workstation/server on
which it is installed the supervisory system.
All the users that will be connected later to the same map will have the access in Read Only
mode.
The access mode is pointed out into the lower bar of the window on the side of the open map
name (refer to paragraph 2.2.3).
Warning. The map can be opened in ReadWrite modality only by a superuser, privileged
or advanced user. A normal or entry user, even if he is the first user that access to the
map, will open the map in Read Only modality.
the availability of the menus and of the specific controls relevant to the NMS5UX system
depends on the access mode to the map.
Section 3 points out, for each described control, the map access necessary to be able to use
the control itself.
Section 4 points out the list of the Siae commandmenus and their availability according to the
access type to the map.
3.4.1
The Read Only map windows can not be directly changed by the NMS5UX system.
In fact, when the system changes the icon of a symbol or its name, or if the user, in ReadWrite
mode, adds, deletes, changes a symbol or moves it, the system does not dynamically update
the windows open on the video of the user in Read Only mode.
42
3.
NMS5UX USERS
To update the information of a map in Read Only mode, it is necessary to select the Refresh
command present into the Map menu.
For the description of the Refresh command and/or of the Map menu, refer to the
documentation of the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface.
3.4.2
If the user with ReadWrite access closes its own copy of the graphical interface, the
ReadWrite access becomes available for all the other users (Read Only) that have the
NMS5UX interface relevant to the same map activated.
The user that wants to change his mode from Read Only to ReadWrite, has to select the
Refresh command present into the Map menu.
The first user that executes the refresh of the maps changes his access mode from Read Only
to ReadWrite.
For the description of the Refresh command and/or of the Map menu, refer to the
documentation of the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface.
Warning. The availability of the ReadWrite access is not signalled to the Read Only users.
It is possible to require for (or to force 25) the disconnection of an user with ReadWrite access
(refer to paragraph 13.5). If the user approves the request, the system closes his map and the
ReadWrite access will be available.
3.4.3
The access mode obtained at the startingup of the NMS5UX interface, is valid into the
Container, Workstation, Communication Server Board map windows.
On the contrary, the ReadWrite access mode into the Equipment window (refer to
paragraph 2.1.2) is get by the first user (independently if his starting access mode has
been ReadWrite or Read Only) that takes on the equipment that is opens the Equipment
window (refer to Fig. 3.1).
The Equipment window of a specific equipment can be opened by more users at the same time.
All the users who open later the same Equipment window will have the access in Read Only
mode.
The Equipment window can be opened only if the equipment is connected or it has been
connected at least one time. This rule does not apply for the objects that represent virtual
equipment.
25.
43
3.
NMS5UX USERS
Warning. The closing of the Equipment window is not signalled on the video.
It is not possible to request or to force the closure of the equipment window in Read Write
modality, but it is possible to require or force the closure of the relevant Manager application.
EQUIPMENT level
Siae World
map window
Container
Network Element
WS
CSB (1)
CSB (2)
Container
map window
Equipment
window
[WS]
map window
CSB
map window
The FIRST superuser, privileged or advanced user who
starts the NMS5UX graphical interface at general level
gets the access in ReadWrite modality to the map
windows represented in this area.
The OTHER users will be able to access to such
windows in Read Only mode.
The normal and entry users has always access to the
map windows in Read Only modality..
Fig. 3.1
44
Section
Operative
procedures
45
46
4.
This chapter contains the startingup procedures of the NMS5UX graphical interface.
The installation and startingup procedure of the NMS5UX supervisory system is reported into
the Siae manual NMS5UX Administrator Manual.
At the first startingup of the NMS5UX graphical interface, after the system installation, it is
necessary to execute the procedure described at the paragraph 4.4.
Warning. Execute the procedure pointed out at the paragraph 4.4, also at the first startingup
of the NMS5UX graphical interface after the version updating of the supervisory system.
The next times, execute the startingup procedure described at paragraph 4.3.
47
4.
4.1
The management of the HP workstations/servers is a complex one and needs for specific
behaviours concerning the Unix operating system.
For this reason, the HP workstations are equipped with the operating system and also with a
graphical interface called HP CDE (Common Desktop Environment) that allows using, in an
extremely easy way, all the functions available for the HPUX operating system 26.
Here below, there is the description of the startingup modes and the description of some
elements of the HP CDE graphical interface necessary for the startingup of the NMS5UX
graphical interface.
For the detailed description and the use of the HP CDE graphical interface, refer to the specific
documentation.
26.
The HP CDE grasphical interface is available starting from the release 10 of the HPUNIX
operating system. If the operator has at disposal the release 9 of the HPUNIX operating system,
the graphical interface will be HP VUE (Visual Environment).
48
4.
4.2
HP
OPENVIEW
INTERFACE
WINDOWS
NNM
GRAPHICAL
The NMS5UX graphical interface release 6.4 is an integral part of the HP OpenView Windows
Network Node Manager graphical platform 27.
Then, its opening depends on the opening of the graphical platform.
here below there are only the startingup modes and the description of some elements of the
HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform necessary for the execution of the startingup
procedure of the NMS5UX graphical interface.
For the description and the use of the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform, refer
to the specific documentation.
27.
For more detailled information concerning the integration of the NMS5UX interface into the HP
OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform, refer to paragraph 1.2.2.
49
4.
4.3
STARTINGUP
INTERFACE
OF
THE
NMS5UX
GRAPHICAL
1.
2.
Type into the text box your UNIX user user name.
3.
4.
5.
Press the OK pushbutton. If the inserted data are the correct ones, the system
displays the frontal panel of the HP CDE graphical interface.
6.
7.
8.
Press Enter.
28.
For the creation of a UNIX user, refer to the documentation provided with the operating system.
29.
For the creation of a NMS5UX user, refer to the paragraph 13.4.1.2 (the operation can be executed
only by the NMS5UX user with superuser profile).
30.
The supervisory system is installed on the workstation/server, then, before opening the NMS5UX
graphical interface on an XTerminal, it is necessary to startup the terminal itself and also the
workstation/server.
31.
The coupling UNIX userNMS5UX user is defined during the creation of the NMS5UX user (refer
to paragraph 13.4.1.2).
50
4.
Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is the first user to access the map
32, this one is opened in ReadWrite modality.
Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is not the first user to access to the
map 32, this one is opened in Read Only modality.
Normal or entry, the default map relevant to ones user is opened in Read Only
modality 33.
NMS5LX Application Login R/O, to start the NMS5UX graphic interface; the
default map, relevant to ones user, is opened in Read Only modality.
superuser or privileged 34, the system displays at the common line the answer Do
you want to enter a map different from default one (y/n)? ==>. Type:
y and press enter, if the operator wants to startup the NMS5UX graphical
interface opening a different map from the default one coupled with its users.
The system displays at the common line the answer Enter map name ==>.
Type the name of the desired map and press enter.
The system startsup the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface.
The system displays on the video the Root map window (continue the
procedure from step 11.).
the operator has to press enter or type n and press enter, if he wants to
startup his own default map.
The system startsup the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical interface.
The system displays on the video the Root map window (continue the
procedure from step 11.).
11. Wait some seconds for the system to end the initializing procedure of the HP OpenView
Windows NNM graphical interface.
32.
For superuser and privileged users: any map among the available ones. In fact these users, during
the start of the graphic interface, it is possible to choose the map to open.
For advanced user: default map relevant to his user.
33.
Warning. Remember that the normal and entry users access to the relevant map always in Read
Only modality.
34.
This feature is present because only the NMS5UX users with superuser and privileged profiles
have the possibility to access to different maps. More information are reported at the para. 3.3.3.
51
4.
(1) The description and the use of these icons is reported in the NMS5UX administrator manual.
(2) The selection of the icon:
S NMS5UX Application Login, allows starting the NMS5UX graphic interface.
If the user used to start the interface has profile:
Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is the first user that access to the map 32, this
one is opened in ReadWrite modality.
Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is not the first user that access to the map 32,
this one is opened in Read Only modality..
Normal or entry, the default map relevant to ones user is opened in Read Only
modality 33.
S NMS5UX Application Login R/O, allows starting the NMS5UX graphic interface; the default
map relevant to ones user is opened in Read Only modality.
Fig. 4.1
35.
The window under examination can be closed through the File Close command. To open it
again, select the Misc SIAE Tools Map Manager Status command.
52
4.
4.3.1
Messages
Incorrect Login, points out that the typed name of the NMS5UX user is incorrect.
Wrong Password, points out that the typed password of the NMS5UX user is incorrect.
Wrong Unix User, points out that the used NMS5UX user is not compatible with the
Unix user used for the startup of the operating system.
Account expired! ..., points out that the user is expired 36. Contact the superuser user
to set a new user or modify the validity period of the current one.
Warning. If, after more attempts, the Incorrect Login, Wrong Password or Wrong Unix User
message is displayed for three times consecutively, the Login window is automatically closed.
To start the graphic interface, it is necessary to execute again the procedure of the step 9.
Your Password is going to expire on <date>. Please change it. 37, points out that ones
password is expiring 38.
To change it:
Type, in the New password box, the new password (alphanumeric string,
minimum 6 characters and maximum 21 characters).
Type again, in the Confirm New Password box, the new password.
37,
To change it:
36.
During the creation of a NMS5LX user, it is possible to define a date when the user expires.
37.
This message is displayed only if the periodical password change functionality is active. It
consists in requiring to the user to change his own password each N days (for example each 6
months).
The functionality can be activated/deactivated by the superuser user, who, if he activates the
functionality, sets the interval between a password change and the successive one.
Warning. The activation of the periodical password change does not influence the expiry date
of the user, which can be set during the creation of a NMS5UX user. The two functionalities are
independent and can coexist at the same time.
38.
This window is displayed 5 days before the expiry of the user password. It will be displayed each
time the user starts the graphic interface until the user changes the password or this one expires.
53
4.
Type, in the New password box, the new password (alphanumeric string,
minimum 6 characters and maximum 21 characters).
Type again, in the Confirm New Password box, the new password.
54
4.
4.4
To execute for the first time the startingup procedure of the NMS5UX graphical interface after
the system installation 39, it is necessary to respect the following procedure.
Warning. The operations described here below require that, on the workstation/server, it has
already been installed the NMS5UX supervisory system and that it has already been activated
the processes necessary for the startingup of the graphical interface 40.
1.
2.
3.
Press OK.
4.
5.
Press OK.
If the data have been correctly inserted, the system displays the front panel of the HP
CDE graphical interface.
6.
7.
8.
Press Enter.
The TMNMENU window, shown in Fig. 4.1 opens.
9.
39.
Warning. Execute the subject procedure also at the first startingup of the NMS5UX graphical
interface after the version updating of the supervisory system.
40.
It is not necessary to create a UNIX user for the first startingup of the graphical interface because
during the installation phases of the NMS5UX system, it is created the UNIX user and the
NMS5UX user with the user name nms5ux.
55
4.
11. Wait some seconds for the system to end the initializing procedure of the HP OpenView
Windows NNM graphical interface.
The system displays the NMS5UX Login window.
12. Into the Login text box, type the user name nms5ux.
13. Into the Password text box, type the password nms5ux.
14. Press the OK pushbutton.
If the system displays the message:
Warning. If, after more attempts, the Incorrect Login or Wrong Password message is
displayed for three times consecutively, the Login window is automatically closed. To
start the interface, it is necessary to execute again the procedure of the step 9.
15. Into the Root window, click twice on the Siae World icon.
The system displays the Siae World window of the nms5ux map, that, if the system
has not been preconfigured by Siae microelettronica, will result empty 41.
Then, the system displays the SIAE Map Manager Status window
paragraph 15.9.
35
described at
Warning. The system assigns, to the nms5ux user used to startup the NMS5UX
graphical interface, the superuser profile. It is advisable, above all and as first operation,
to change the password coupled with such a user 42.
41.
The operations to display on the video the relevant equipment network are reported at para. 5.3.
42.
56
5.
To prevent confusion and mistakes in relation to every map, one user at a time can change the
network configuration into the specific map. Such a user is the one that can access to the system
in ReadWrite mode (ReadWrite user).
Warning. All the changes executed by the ReadWrite user, are NOT dynamically displayed also
on the map windows of the users who can access to the same map in Read Only mode.
To update the information of a map in Read Only mode, it is necessary to execute a map refresh
(refer to paragraph 3.4.1).
57
5.
5.1
5.1.1
The Network Element (NE) objects need for the identification of the equipment itself.
This object class is really composed by different classes: one class for every Siae equipment
type that the NMS5UX system is able to manage.
5.1.2
Container objects
The Container objects need as containers for NEs, for other containers, for graphical symbols,
for WSs and for CSBs.
The system does not assign any particular meaning to these objects. Such ones have been
inserted to help the user during the network management and the equipment localization.
In fact, they allow having a better idea of the network because they allow grouping together the
network elements according to criteria that can be geographical or logic ones, for instance they
group equipment that all belong to the same department or are positioned into the same area.
5.1.3
The Workstation (WS), Communication Server Board (CSB), WS Port, CSB Port objects need
for defining the connection line that physically couples each single equipment, managed by
means of the Legacy protocol, to the supervisory system.
Usually, all these users has a coupled physical element.
58
5.
The Communication Server Board object represents the CommServerS equipment and the CS
Boards present into the CommServerF equipment.
The WS Port and CSB Port objects respectively represent the serial ports of the WS and the
serial ports of the CSB.
Warning. The WS, CSB, WS Port and CSB Port objects are necessary for the control of the
equipment managed with Legacy protocol (FAM, OLTME, Radio Standard and Radio G series).
5.1.4
The Radio Link objects need for representing the connections between NE objects of the same
type (for instance two SDH Radio objects and two PDH Radio ones).
Warning. The command for the creation of the Radio Link objects is an optional one.
59
5.
5.2
All the objects listed at paragraph 5.1 have to be created by the user by means of the controls
present into the SIAE Objects Add menu (refer to paragraph 9.1) 43.
It is possible to create all the network equipment into a single map or to subdivide them and
create them into different maps 44.
Then, an equipment object, created into a map, is visible and can be managed also into other
maps naturally if it has been created also into such ones. In fact, more copies of the same
equipment can exist of the relevant NE object present into different maps 45 (refer to paragraph
5.3.4).
It is possible to create new NE objects also if these last ones have not been physically installed
on the network for instance because they are foreseen for a future installation. In this case, it
will not be possible to set any communication because it does not exist a correspondence
between NE objects and physical equipment (then, it will not be possible to open the relevant
Equipment window refer to paragraph 2.1.2).
While it is possible to create virtual NE objects that is objects that have a corresponding
equipment present into the network, but for which it is possible to open the relevant Equipment
window 46 and that can be configured as a normal NE. then, such a configuration could be
transferred to every equipment (real or virtual one) that is compatible with the virtual NE (refer
to paragraph 16.8).
It is possible to save on file the objects created into a map and then, to import them into a different
map (refer to paragraph 9.1).
Warning. When it is created a NE, WS or CSB object, the system does not automatically get
the equipment coupled with such an object, but it is necessary to activate the connection
between the supervisory system and the element itself (refer to paragraph 6.1 and 6.2).
The network displaying is a dynamically one: this means that the user can add and move the
icons relevant to containers, NEs, etc. but he can also always remove them (refer to paragraph
9.3).
Then, for some objects after their creation, it is possible to change the values of the parameters
(refer to paragraph 9.2).
43.
With the exception of the WS Port and CSB Port objects that are automatically created when the
system creates the relevant WS and CSB objects (refer to paragraph 9.1).
44.
More detailled information concerning the maps are reported at the paragraph 3.4.
45.
The above said characteristic is valid also for the CSB and WS objects.
46.
To execute this operation for the real equipment, it is necessary to activate the connection between
the system and the equipment itself.
60
5.
5.3
Let us suppose to have to graphically display a certain Italia network in such a way to be able
to execute its supervisory operations by means of the NMS5UX system.
In the first example, the Italia network is composed only by equipment managed with SNMP
protocol (refer to paragraph 5.3.1).
In the second example, it is composed only by equipment managed with the Legacy protocol
(refer to paragraph 5.3.2).
While in the third example, such a network is composed by equipment managed with Legacy
protocol and equipment managed with SNMP one (refer to paragraph 5.3.3).
According to the equipment type present into his own network, the user has to refer to the
specific relevant example.
Warning. Into the example described here below, the entire equipment network will be
displayed into the same map and it is assumed that such a map has already been created
(during the creation of a NMS5UX user refer to paragraph 13.4.1.2).
It is possible to subdivide the equipment network into two or more parts and to couple to such
parts two or more maps. In this case at the opening of each map, it will be visible, and it will be
possible to manage it, only the part of the network coupled with the map under examination. An
example is pointed out at paragraph 5.3.4.
61
5.
5.3.1
The Italia network, shown into Fig. 5.1, is composed by Radio SDH type, Radio PDH type and
PMP type equipment.
The NMS5UX system is loaded on a Workstation that it is connected to the equipment by means
of an Ethernet LAN.
The system has locally assigned the specific IP address by means of LOM/LCT to each
equipment.
Workstation
Lan
Equipment
type
SDH Radio
10.10.10.20
PDH Radio
10.10.10.30
SDH Radio
10.10.10.21
PDH Radio
10.10.10.31
SDH Radio
10.10.10.22
SDH Radio
10.10.10.32
PMP
10.10.10.40
Local
IP Address
of the
equipment
Fig. 5.1
Before creating the objects that will allow the system to manage the equipment, it is necessary
to subdivide the network into containers, objects, etc.
During such an operation, it is advisable to take into account the connection mode of the
equipment one each other and their positioning on the field.
Warning. Into the subject example, it is supposed that all the network equipment have been
created into the same map. If the operator wants to subdivide the equipment into more maps,
he has to respect the indication reported at the paragraph 5.3.4.
A possible subdivision of the network is shown in Fig. 5.2.
62
5.
Nord Italia
(container)
1
Milano
(container)
Sud Italia
(container)
Workstation
Torino
(container)
4
Lan
5
8
SDH Radio
10.10.10.20
PDH Radio
10.10.10.30
PDH Radio
10.10.10.31
Logic
address
of the
NE
10
SDH Radio
10.10.10.22
PMP
10.10.10.40
9
SDH Radio
10.10.10.21
11
SDH Radio
10.10.10.32
IP Address
of the NE
Fig. 5.2
In Fig. 5.2, it has been coupled with the containers the name that identifies a geographic area
or a town.
It is possible to assign every name to the Container objects, but it is advisable to set a name
that has a geographical reference.
In such a way, it will be possible to detect the position of the equipment already by means of the
name of the container symbol.
The system has assigned, to each NE object, an IP Address and a logic address different for
each created NE object.
ONLY if the equipment are inserted into an OSI network 47, it will be necessary to set also the
GOSIP address (Government OSI Profile) of the equipment.
The IP Address and the possible GOSIP Address, have to coincide with the IP Address and the
GOSIP Address locally set (by means of the LCT program) for the relevant equipment 48.
The logic address corresponds to the equipment name that is displayed under the relevant
icon. Also in this case, as for the Container objects, it is possible to assign every value. However,
it is advisable to assign a name that makes easier the equipment detection.
47.
The OSI network is a network that uses, as communication protocol between the network
elements, also the OSI (Open System Interconnection) protocol.
48.
If the values are not the same ones, after, it will not be possible to activate the connection with the
equipment.
63
5.
At the end, it is necessary to take into account that after having created the object (Container,
NE, etc.) into a well defined map window, it is not possible to move it into another map window.
Now, it is possible to execute the creation of the objects.
Warning. During the operation, it is necessary to follow a predefined order because it is not
possible to create an object, for instance a NE, if before it has not been created the Container
object that allows opening the map window that has to contain it.
The first symbols to be created are the objects inside the Siae World map window (Container
objects: Nord Italia and Sud Italia).
Then, open, for instance, the Nord Italia map window and create the objects present into it, and
so on.
In Fig. 5.2, all the object that have to be created by the user, in such a way that each equipment
of the Italia network can be managed by the NMS5UX system, are identified by a number (1,
2, etc.) placed on the R.H. upper square.
In Tab. 5.1, for each object present in Fig. 5.2 and identified by a number, there are some
information that allow understanding how and where it is necessary to create the symbols.
With details, it is pointed out the type of the object that has to be created, which values have
to be assigned to the parameters of the object 49 and into which map window it has to be inserted
the symbols.
Then, the order used for the object listing respects a possible creation order that ensures the
creation of the Container objects before the creation of the objects that have to be contained
into the relevant map window.
Warning. In every map window, it is possible to add Radio Link objects.
49.
Warning. The system does not points out all the parameters, but only the ones that have strictly
to be set for the object creation.
64
5.
Tab. 5.1
Object
Object type
to be created
Map window
where the object
has to be created
Container
Siae World
Container
Siae World
Container
Nord Italia
Label: Milano
Container
Nord Italia
Label: Torino
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Milano
IP Address: 10.10.10.30
Logical Address: PDH 30 *
Gosip Address: **
Type: Radio pdh
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Milano
IP Address: 10.10.10.31
Logical Address: PDH 31 *
Gosip Address: **
Type: Radio pdh
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Milano
IP Address: 10.10.10.32
Logical Address: PDH 32 *
Gosip Address: **
Type: Radio pdh
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Torino
IP Address: 10.10.10.20
Logical Address: SDH 20 *
Gosip Address: **
Type: Radio sdh
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Torino
IP Address: 10.10.10.21
Logical Address: SDH 21 *
Osi Address: **
Type: Radio sdh
10
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Torino
IP Address: 10.10.10.22
Logical Address: SDH 22 *
Gosip Address: **
Type: Radio sdh
11
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Sud Italia
IP Address: 10.10.10.40
Logical Address: PMP 40 *
Type: Pmp
It is possible to set a generic value, different from the pointed out one.
** Set the GOSIP Address of the equipment only if it is inserted into a OSI network (refer to paragraph 9.1.2.1).
The creation of every object causes the displaying on the video of the symbol into the relevant
map window.
By means of the Container symbols, it is possible to display the details of the network that
contains the equipment, for instance as shown in Fig. 5.3, for the PMP 40 equipment of the Italia
network.
65
5.
Fig. 5.3
Now the NMS5UX system knows all the information that will allow it to get each single equipment
at the time of its connection.
66
5.
5.3.2
The Italia network shown in Fig. 5.4, is composed by FAM, OLTME and G series Radio type
equipment.
The NMS5UX system is loaded on a Workstation which, by means of Ethernet LAN, is
connected to a CommServerS.
The physical address has been locally assigned by means of LOM (Local Operator Manager),
to each equipment.
The relevant IP Addresses have been assigned to the Workstation and to the CommServerS
during their configuration.
IP Address
of the WS
Workstation
143.1.1.1
1
n
CommServerS
Lan
IP address
of the CS
143.1.1.2
2
8
Serial ports
Serial ports
RS232
RS232
Radio
10
RS232
Radio
11
FAM
6
Equipment
type
Oltme
21
Equipment
local address
RS485
FAM
8
RS485
FAM
7
EOC
Radio
12
Fig. 5.4
Before creating the objects that will allow to the system the equipment managing, it is necessary
to organize and to subdivide the network into containers, objects, etc.
During this operation, it is advisable to take into account the equipment connection mode and
their position on the field.
Warning. Subject example supposes that all the network equipment are created into the same
map. If the operator wants to subdivide the equipment into more maps, he has to respect the
indications pointed out at paragraph 5.3.4.
Fig. 5.5 shows a possible subdivision of the network.
67
5.
Nord Italia
(container)
1
Milano
(container)
Sud Italia
(container)
2
9
5
Workstation
1
CommServerS
143.1.1.1
n
143.1.1.2
8
Palermo
(container)
6
Radio
10
Torino
(container)
8
Radio
12
11
12
FAM
6
4
14
7
Radio
11
FAM
8
13
FAM
7
10
Oltme
21
NE logic
address
NE
physical
address
Fig. 5.5
In Fig. 5.5, the containers have been coupled with a name that identifies a geographic area or
a town.
A generic name can be assigned to the Container objects, but it is advisable to set a name that
has a geographic reference.
In such a way, it will be already possible to detect the position of the equipment by means of the
name of the container symbol.
To each NE object, the system has assigned a physical address and a logic one different for each
created NE object.
The physical address (Physical Address parameter refer to paragraph 9.1.2.3) has to be equal
to the locally set address (by means of the LOM) for the relevant equipment 50.
The logic address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the
relevant icon. Also in this case as for the Container objects, it is possible to assign every value.
However, it is advisable to assign a name that make easier the equipment detection.
To each NE object, during its creation, it is necessary to couple all the information necessary
to allow the equipment reaching. Such information are the IP Address of the CSB or of the WS
and the number of the used port.
50.
68
If the values are not the same, later, it will not be possible to activate the connection.
5.
Warning. For the equipment not directly connected to the serial port 51, it has to be set the IP
Address of the WS or of the CSB and the number of the port to which it is connected the
equipment installed upstream of the equipment chain to which belongs the equipment itself.
At the end, it is necessary to take into account that after having created the object (Container,
NE, etc.) into a specific map window, it is not possible to move it into another map window.
In Fig. 5.5, all the objects, that have to be created by the user in such a way that each equipment
if the Italia network can be managed by the NMS5UX system, are identified by a number (1, 2,
etc.) placed on the upper R.H. corner.
In Tab. 5.2, for each object present into Fig. 5.5 and identified by a number, there are some
information that allow understanding how and where it is necessary to create the symbols.
With details, it is pointed out the type of the object to be created, which values have to be
assigned to the parameters of the object 52 and in which map window it is necessary to insert
the symbols.
Then, the order used to list the objects respects a possible creation order that ensures the
creation of the Container objects before the creation of the object that have to be contained into
the relevant map window.
Warning. The WS Port and CSB Port objects are automatically created during the creation
procedure of the relevant WS and CSB objects.
Then, it is possible to add Radio Link objects into every map window.
51.
The equipment can be connected to the supervisory system, directly or undirectly by means of
EOC or other dedicated connection lines creating, in such a way, equipment chains.
52.
Warning. The system does not points out all the parameters, but only the ones that have to be set
to allow the object creation.
69
5.
Tab. 5.2
Object
Container
Siae World
Container
Siae World
Container
Nord Italia
Label: Milano
Container
Nord Italia
Label: Torino
Workstation
Milano
Network Element
Legacy Protocol Managed
Milano
Network Element
Legacy Protocol Managed
Milano
Network Element
Legacy Protocol Managed
Torino
Communication Server
Board
Network Element
Legacy Protocol Managed
Sud Italia
11
Container
Sud Italia
Name: WS *
IP Address: 143.1.1.1
Physical Address: 10
Logical Address: Radio 10 *
CS/WS Ip Address: 143.1.1.1
CS/WS Port: 1
Type: Radio G
Physical Address: 11
Logical Address: Radio 11 *
CS/WS Ip Address: 143.1.1.1
CS/WS Port: 1
Type: Radio G
Physical Address: 12
Logical Address:Radio 12 *
CS/WS Ip Address: 143.1.1.1
CS/WS Port: 1
Type: Radio G
IP Address: 143.1.1.2
Gosip Address: **
Physical Address: 21
Logical Address: Oltme 21 *
CS/WS Ip Address: 143.1.1.2
CS/WS Port: 8
Type: Oltme
Label: Palermo
12
Network Element
Legacy Protocol Managed
Palermo
13
Network Element
Legacy Protocol Managed
Palermo
14
Network Element
Legacy Protocol Managed
Palermo
10
Sud Italia
Physical Address: 6
Logical Address: Fam 6 *
CS/WS Ip Address: 143.1.1.2
CS/WS Port: 2
Type: Fam
Physical Address: 7
Logical Address: Fam 7 *
CS/WS Ip Address: 143.1.1.2
CS/WS Port: 2
Type: Fam
Physical Address: 8
Logical Address: Fam 8 *
CS/WS Ip Address: 143.1.1.2
CS/WS Port: 2
Type: Fam
* It is possible to set a generic value, different from the pointed out one.
** Set the GOSIP Address of the CommServerS only if it is inserted into a OSI network (refer to paragraph 9.1.5).
The creation of every object causes the displaying on the video of the symbol into the relevant
map window.
70
5.
By means of the Container symbols, it is possible to display the details of the network that
contains the equipment, for instance as shown by Fig. 5.6, for the Oltme 21 equipment of the
Italia network.
Fig. 5.6
Now the NMS5UX system knows all the information that will allow it to get each single equipment
at the time of its connection.
71
5.
5.3.3
The Italia network shown in Fig. 5.7, is composed by equipment managed with Legacy protocol
(FAM) and equipment managed with SNMP protocol (Radio SDH).
The NMS5UX system is loaded on a Workstation that is connected, by means of Ethernet LAN,
to a CommServerS and to the equipment.
To each equipment, it has been assigned the specific local address by means of LOM/LCT.
The relevant IP addresses have been assigned to the Workstation and to the CommServerS
during their configuration.
Workstation
Lan
CommServerS
SDH Radio
10.10.10.20
143.1.1.2
2
8
Serial ports
SDH Radio
10.10.10.21
RS232
Equipment
type
SDH Radio
10.10.10.22
Local IP
Address of the
equipment
IP address
of the CS
FAM
6
FAM
9
Local address of
the equipment
RS485
FAM
8
RS485
Equipment type
FAM
7
Fig. 5.7
Before creating the objects that will allow to the system the equipment managing, it is necessary
to organize and to subdivide the network into containers, objects, etc.
During this operation, it is advisable to take into account the equipment connection mode and
their position on the field.
Warning. Subject example supposes that all the network equipment are created into the same
map. If the operator wants to subdivide the equipment into more maps, he has to respect the
indications pointed out at paragraph 5.3.4.
Fig. 5.8 shows a possible subdivision of the network.
72
5.
Nord Italia
(container)
1
Sud Italia
(container)
Workstation
2
Lan
7
CommServerS
Torino
(container)
3
2
4
NE logic
address
SDH Radio
10.10.10.20
143.1.1.2
8
Palermo
(container)
9
10
FAM
6
5
SDH Radio
10.10.10.21
12
6
NE IP
address
FAM
8
SDH Radio
10.10.10.22
8
FAM
9
NE logic
address
11
FAM
7
NE physical
address
Fig. 5.8
In Fig. 5.8, the containers have been coupled with a name that identifies a geographic area or
a town. A generic name can be assigned to the Container objects, but it is advisable to set a
name that has a geographic reference. In such a way, it will be already possible to detect the
position of the equipment by means of the name of the container symbol.
To each NE object, the system has assigned a physical address (IP Address for the NEs
managed with SNMP protocol 53 and physical address with the NEs managed with Legacy
protocol) and a logic one different for each created NE object.
The IP Address has to be equal to the IP Address locally set (by means of the LCT program)
for the relevant equipment 54.
The logic address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the
relevant icon. Also in this case as for the Container objects, it is possible to assign every value.
However, it is advisable to assign a name that make easier the equipment detection.
45.
ONLY if the equipment are inserted into an OSI network, it will be necessary to set also the GOSIP
address of the equipment.
54.
If the values are not the same, later, it will not be possible to activate the connection.
73
5.
Only for the NE objects relevant to the equipment managed with the Legacy protocol, during
their creation, it is necessary to couple all the informations necessary to allow the equipment
reaching. Such information are the IP Address of the CSB or of the WS and the number of the
used port.
Warning. For the equipment not directly connected to the serial port 55, it has to be set the IP
Address of the WS or of the CSB and the number of the port to which it is connected the
equipment installed upstream of the equipment chain to which belongs the equipment itself.
At the end, it is necessary to take into account that after having created the object (Container,
NE, etc.) into a specific map window, it is not possible to move it into another map window.
In Fig. 5.8, all the objects, that have to be created by the user in such a way that each equipment
if the Italia network can be managed by the NMS5UX system, are identified by a number (1, 2,
etc.) placed on the upper R.H. corner.
In Tab. 5.3, for each object present into Fig. 5.8 and identified by a number, there are some
information that allow understanding how and where it is necessary to create the symbols.
With details, it is pointed out the type of the object to be created, which values have to be
assigned to the parameters of the object 56 and in which map window it is necessary to insert
the symbols.
Then, the order used to list the objects respects a possible creation order that ensures the
creation of the Container objects before the creation of the object that have to be contained into
the relevant map window.
Warning. The CSB Port objects are automatically created during the creation procedure of the
relevant CSB object.
Then, it is possible to add Radio Link objects into every map window.
55.
The equipment can be connected to the supervisory system, directly or undirectly by means of
EOC or other dedicated connection lines creating, in such a way, equipment chains.
56.
Warning. The system does not points out all the parameters, but only the ones that have to be set
to allow the object creation.
74
5.
Tab. 5.3
Object
Container
Siae World
Container
Siae World
Container
Nord Italia
Label: Torino
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Torino
IP Address: 10.10.10.20
Logical Address: SDH 20 *
Gosip Address: **
Type: Radio sdh
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Torino
IP Address: 10.10.10.21
Logical Address: SDH 21 *
Gosip Address: **
Type: Radio sdh
Network Element
SNMP Managed
Torino
IP Address: 10.10.10.22
Logical Address: SDH 22 *
Gosip Address: **
Type: Radio sdh
Communication Server
Board
Sud Italia
IP Address: 143.1.1.2
Gosip Address: ***
Network Element
Legacy Protocol Managed
Sud Italia
Physical Address: 9
Logical Address: Fam 9 *
CS/WS Ip Address: 143.1.1.2
CS/WS Port: 8
Type: Fam
Container
Sud Italia
Label: Palermo
10
Network Element
Legacy Protocol Managed
Palermo
Physical Address: 6
Logical Address: Fam 6 *
CS/WS Ip Address: 143.1.1.2
CS/WS Port: 2
Type: Fam
11
Network Element
Legacy Protocol Managed
Palermo
Physical Address: 7
Logical Address: Fam 7 *
CS/WS Ip Address: 143.1.1.2
CS/WS Port: 2
Type: Fam
12
Network Element
Legacy Protocol Managed
Palermo
Physical Address: 8
Logical Address: Fam 8 *
CS/WS Ip Address: 143.1.1.2
CS/WS Port: 2
Type: Fam
It is possible to set a generic value, different from the pointed out one.
** Set the GOSIP Address of the equipment only if it is inserted into a OSI network (refer to paragraph 9.1.2.1).
*** Set the GOSIP Address of the CommServerS only if it is inserted into a OSI network (refer to paragraph 9.1.5).
Warning. In Tab. 5.3 there is not the WS object (relevant to the workstation present into the
network refer to Fig. 5.7) because it is not necessary for its creation. It should be necessary
75
5.
only in the case some equipment managed with Legacy protocol have been connected to the
WS ports.
The creation of every object causes the displaying on the video of the symbol into the relevant
map window.
By means of the Container symbols, it is possible to display the details of the network that
contains the equipment, for instance as shown by Fig. 5.9, for the FAM 9 equipment of the Italia
network.
Fig. 5.9
Now the NMS5UX system knows all the information that will allow it to get each single equipment
at the time of its connection.
76
5.
5.3.4
The Italia network shown by Fig. 5.10, is composed by FAM, OLTME, G series Radio type
equipment (equipment managed with Legacy protocol) and by SDH Radio, PDH Radio and PMP
type equipment (equipment managed with SNMP protocol).
The NMS5UX system is loaded on a Workstation that is connected, by means of Ethernet LAN,
to a CommServerS and to the equipment.
To each equipment, it has been assigned the specific local address by means of LOM/LCT.
The relevant IP addresses have been assigned to the Workstation and to the CommServerS
during their configuration.
Lan
IP Address
of the WS
Workstation
1
IP address
of the CS
CommServerS
143.1.1.1
n
143.1.1.2
8
Serial ports
Serial ports
RS232
RS232
RS485
Equipment type
Radio
10
FAM
6
EOC Radio
11
Equipment
local address
RS485
RS232
Radio
12
Oltme
21
FAM
7
FAM
8
Equipment type
SDH Radio
10.10.10.20
SDH Radio
10.10.10.21
SDH Radio
10.10.10.22
PMP
10.10.10.40
PDH Radio
10.10.10.30
Local IP
address of the
equipment
PDH Radio
10.10.10.31
SDH Radio
10.10.10.32
Fig. 5.10
77
5.
Before creating the objects that will allow to the system the equipment managing, it is necessary
to subdivide the network.
Let us suppose to subdivide the network into two subnetworks and to draw each subnetwork
into a different map.
For instance, the equipment managed with Legacy protocol and all the elements necessary for
their management will be inserted into the A subnetwork and drawn into the A map.
While the equipment managed with the SNMP protocol will be inserted into the B subnetwork
and drawn into the B map, as shown in Fig. 5.8.
Lan
Workstation
1
Radio
12
CommServerS
143.1.1.1
n
143.1.1.2
8
Radio
10
FAM
6
Radio
11
FAM
7
SDH radio
10.10.10.20
SDH radio
10.10.10.21
SDH radio
10.10.10.22
Oltme
21
A Subnetwork
A Map
FAM
8
PMP
10.10.10.40
PDH radio
10.10.10.30
PDH radio
10.10.10.31
B Subnetwork
B Map
SDH radio
10.10.10.32
Fig. 5.11
78
5.
2.
Subdivide the equipment of the A map into containers and identify the objects that have
to be created (a possible subdivision is shown in Fig. 5.5).
3.
Warning. The execution of the steps 2 and 3 is the same one described at paragraph 5.3.2.
4.
5.
Subdivide the equipment of the B map into containers and identify the objects that have
to be created (a possible subdivision is shown in Fig. 5.2).
6.
Warning. The execution of the steps 5 and 6 is the same one described at paragraph 5.3.1.
After having created the maps and drawn the subnetworks, at the opening of each map
it will be possible to see and to manage only the network part coupled with the open map.
It is possible to save on file the objects created into a map and then, to import them into
a different map (refer to paragraph 9.1).
79
5.
80
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
After having created all the objects necessary for the NMS5UX system to get the several
equipment 57, it is necessary to activate the connection, then the dialogue, between the
supervisory centre (logic NE objects created by the user) and the peripheral units (physical
equipment).
Warning. For the equipment managed with the Legacy protocol (FAM, OLTME, Radio
Standard, G series Radio), the connection phase (described at paragraph 6.2) is preceded by
the opening of the serial ports (described at paragraph 6.1) that are physically connected to
the equipment themselves.
For the equipment managed with the SNMP protocol (Radio PDH, Radio PDHAL, Elfo,
Radio SDH, ALS, SDH N+1, ADMC, ADM1, EXP 63, PMP) execute immediately the
connection (described at paragraph 6.2) because it is assumed that the connection between the
equipment and the supervisory system is ensured by the TCP/IP network.
57.
The creation modes of the objects are reported at paragraph 5.3 and 9.1.
81
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
6.1
Warning. The opening of the serial ports is NECESSARY ONLY for the equipment
managed with Legacy protocol.
For the equipment managed with SNMP protocol, do not execute this operation, but pass
immediately to the connection (described at paragraph 6.2).
For the equipment managed with Legacy protocol, before starting the connection procedure,
it is necessary to activate the management processes of the serial ports to which the equipment
themselves are physically connected.
This procedure is usually defined to open a serial port.
It is possible to connect the equipment managed with Legacy protocol to the supervisory centre
by means of the serial ports of the Workstation or by means of the ones of the CommServerS
or the ones of the Board inserted into the CommServerF.
According to the hardware elements provided with the system, it will be necessary to open the
serial ports of the workstation (represented by the WS Port symbols present into the [WS]) map
window and/or the serial ports of the CommServerS (represented by the CSB Port symbols
present into the Equipment window of the CommServerS) and/or the serial ports of the Board
of the CommServerF (represented by the CSB Port symbols present into the map window of
the CSB).
Warning. It is not necessary to open all the serial ports present into the network but only the ones
connected with the equipment to be managed.
6.1.1
Before opening the serial ports, it is necessary to activate the connection of the logic objects
that contain the ports themselves and that are managed by a software process that has to be
activated.
Then, before opening the WS ports and the CSB ports, it will be necessary to activate the
connection of the relevant Workstation and CS Board objects.
With details, the opening sequence of the ports is the following one.
82
1.
2.
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
2.
2.
The opening procedure of the serial port involves the management of the polling process
relevant to the equipment group connected to the port under examination. The HDLC polling
process and the return of the alarms/events will be activated at the connection of the equipment.
During the opening of each single port, the user will have to set the values of the T and N
parameters that define respectively the time and the transceiving number of a message before
that the system would consider an equipment as an unreachable one. The default values are
T=10 and N=2.
Then, only for the CSB Ports (of the CommServer edition 2.0 or next ones) is possible to define
the time range between the polling of an equipment and the next one.
Usually the opening procedure of the serial port, if the connection of the relevant WS or CSB
object has been successfully ended, is correctly executed.
If the connection procedure of the WS or of the CSB has not been successfully executed, check
the following conditions:
58.
The IP Address assigned to the logic object (WS or CSB) is equal to the one assigned
during the local configuration.
ONLY if the logic object refers to a CommServerS inserted into an OSI network, check
that the Gosip Address assigned to the object coincides with the Gosip Address
assigned during its local configuration.
For more detailled information refer to the CommServerS Manager equipment manual.
83
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
6.1.2
After having opened a serial port, it is possible to close it (it is deactivated the relevant managing
process) 59.
Warning. The operation is not accepted if there is also a single NE in connected status (refer
to paragraph 6.4.2) connected to the port to be closed.
Closing the serial port, it will not possible longer to connect the equipment physically connected
to the port itself. Then, the polling process, relevant to the equipment group connected to the
port under examination, is not managed longer.
Also the WS or the CSBs can be always disconnected if any of the serial ports present into them
is in open status.
Warning. A WS Port or CSB Port object can be automatically closed by the system after a
supervisory loop 60 or for an overflow of alarm signals on the serial port itself.
The automatic closing procedure is executed independently from the connection status of the
equipment connected to such ports.
At the end of the procedure, the equipment connected to the port under examination will results
unreachable, with the exception of the ones that were disconnected before the procedure; Such
ones do not change their status.
59.
The procedure:
S to disconnect a WS object is reported at paragraph 16.10.2.
S to disconnect a CSB object is reported at paragraph 16.9.2.
S to close a WS Port is reported at paragraph 16.12.3.
S to close a CSB Port of the CommServerF is reported at paragraph 16.11.3.
S to close a CSB Port of the CommServerS is reported in the equipment manual (refer to
paragraph 1.3.3).
60.
The supervisory network is overplaced to the transmission network enabling the proper interfaces.
The transmission network can be configured as a loop, on the contrary the supervisory network
does not allow this configuration type.
In a loop configuration, the propagation mode of a message causes the retyping of the message
itself, after having run into the entire loop, into the same supervisory port from which it has
entered. In such a way, it will reach the most upstream equipment present into the propagation
chain of the messages, until to reach the serial port from which such a message has been
forwarded.
Usually, when the supervisory system receives the same message that it has forwarded, it
automatically disables the serial port. In such a way, the message forwarded by the centre
continues to run into the loop. This situation is called supervisory loop.
84
6.
6.1.3
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
On the video, the connection status of the WS and CSB objects and the opening and the closing
of the CSB Ports and WS Ports is represented by the colour of the relevant icon (refer to Fig. 6.1
and Fig. 6.2).
The actually status of the object affects the operations that the user can execute; for instance
it is not possible to delete a WS object if it is in connected status.
85
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
DISCONNECTED
CONNECTED
Status
(colour of the WS icon:
brown)
Possible operations:
STo connect the WS
STo delete the WS object
STo change/check the
values of the WS object
attributes
UNREACHABLE
Status
(colour of ther WS icon:
red)
Possible operations:
STo delete the Ws object
STo change/check the
values of the WS object
attributes
STo disconnect the WS
Status
(colour of the WS icon:
green)
Connection
command
Possible operations:
STo disconnect the WS
(only if no one WS Port
is in open status
STo change/check the
values of the WS object
attributes
Disconnection
command
when the WS is
automatically
connected by the
system or manually
by the user
CLOSE
Status
(colout of the WS Port icon:
blue)
Possible operations:
STo open the WS Port
OPEN
opening
command of
the port
closing
command of
the port
Status
(colour ofthe WS Port icon:
green)
Possible operations:
STo close the WS Port
STo chekc the
configuration
parameters of the port
Fig. 6.1
86
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
DISCONNECTED
Status
(colour of the CSB icon:
brown)
Possible operations:
STo connect the CSB
STo delete the CSB
object
STo change/check the
values of the CSB
object attributes
UNREACHABLE
Status
(colour of the CSB icon:
red with X)
possible operations:
STo delete the CSB
object
STo change/check the
values of the CSB
object attributes
STo disconnect the CSB
CONNECTED
Status
(colour of the CSB icon
refer to paragraph 2.2.6.10)
Connection
command
Possible operations:
STo disconnect the CSB
(only if no one CSB Port
is in open status
STo change/check the
values of the CSB
object attributes
Disconnection
command
CLOSE
Status
(colour of the CSB Port
icon: blue)
Possible operations:
STo open the CSB Port
OPEN
opening
command of
the port
closing
cxommand of
the port
status
(colour of the CSB Port
icon: green)
Possible operations:
STo close the CSB Port
STo check the
configuration
parameters of the port
Fig. 6.2
87
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
6.2
CONNECTION PROCEDURE
The connection of the equipment is the last operation that the user has to execute to let the
supervisory system to get the equipment and to control it.
The operations that the user has to execute to connect an equipment are the following ones:
1.
2.
Here below, there are the descriptions of the phases used by the system to execute the
connection and its behaviour according to the answering messages forwarded by the
equipment.
Connection
When the user forwards the Connect command, the system above all forwards a message to
check the equipment reachability (Line Test command).
If the test has a negative result, the procedure is stopped and the connection will result failed.
The equipment does not change its connection status.
If the test has a positive result, the system will forward the network global parameters and then
will ask to the remote equipment to forward to the system itself the current values of the
attributes relevant to the configuration and to the alarms.
At the first connection, since no one information is stored into the database, the system gets
all the information that will considered as the real configuration.
At the end of the connection procedure (if it has been successfully ended) the supervisory centre
has the whole overview concerning the alarm status and the equipment configuration.
Then, if the equipment is managed with the Legacy protocol, the system will forward the
messages relevant to the configuration only when it is changed a parameter.
88
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
On the contrary, the alarm status is periodically get by means of a polling cycle (refer to
paragraph 7.1.1).
If the equipment is managed with the SNMP protocol, the equipment itself will spontaneously
inform the supervisory system about possible changes concerning the configuration or the
status of the alarms (SNMP trap).
A polling cycle from the supervisory system is kept only to check the reachability status of the
equipment.
The connection of an equipment causes the automatic insertion of the equipment itself into the
specific polling cycle.
Then, the system forwards to the equipment the network time (hours/minutes/seconds).
Warning. Only now, after having connected an equipment at least one time, it is possible to open
the relevant Equipment window (refer to paragraph 2.1.2).
89
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
6.3
To change the connection status of an equipment or to execute some tests or also to align again
the information stored into the database, the user has at disposal some commands: Line Test,
Connect, Disconnect, Alarm Realignment, Configuration Upload, LegacyReset &
Connect.
Here below there is the description of such commands.
6.3.1
Line Test
This command check the effective reachability of the remote equipment. The procedure
consists of the forwarding, executed by the system, of a test message to the equipment. If the
message is checked by the equipment, the test can be considered as passed.
all the equipment independently from their connection status have been programmed to answer
to the test message.
The test does not affect the connection or alarm status of the equipment.
The using mode of the command is reported at paragraph 16.1.
6.3.2
Connect
This command activates the connection between the supervisory system and the equipment.
If the command forwarding has a positive result, such a forwarding changes the connection
status of the equipment: from disconnected, unreachable it becomes connected.
It is not possible to forward to connect an equipment that is in connected status.
Warning. The Connect command, toward an equipment in unreachable status, is automatically
forwarded by the system at regular times.
The using mode of the command is reported at paragraph 16.2.
6.3.3
Disconnect
This command deactivates the connection between the NMS5UX system and the equipment.
The command forwarding changes the connection status of the equipment: from connected, it
becomes disconnected.
The using mode of the command is reported at paragraph 16.3.
90
6.
6.3.4
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
Alarm Realignment
This command aligns again the information relevant to the alarms stored into the database with
the ones really present into the equipment.
The procedure forces the system to ask to the remote equipment to forward the current status
of the alarms present into the equipment itself.
These information will later replaced by the ones recorded into the database.
The realigning request of the alarms does not affect the connection status of the equipment
or its configuration and it is applicable only for the equipment in connected status.
The total alarm status of the equipment (then the colour of the NE icon and of the Container icons
that contain it), will be defined by the seriousness level of the received alarms.
The using mode of the Alarm Realignment command is reported at the paragraph 16.6.
6.3.5
Configuration Upload
This command aligns again the information relevant to the alarms and to the configuration stored
into the database with the ones really present into the equipment.
The execution mode of the procedure is fundamentally equal to the one used for the execution
of the realigning procedure on the alarms (refer to paragraph 6.3.4); the only difference is that
the system requires to the equipment the status of the alarms and also the configuration
information relevant to all the objects known by the equipment itself.
Also in this case, the information replace the ones recorded into the database.
The Configuration Upload command does not affect the connection status of the equipment
and it applies only for the equipment in connected status.
The total alarm status of the equipment (then the colour of the NE icon and of the Container icons
that contain it), will be defined by the seriousness level of the received alarms.
The using mode of the command is reported at paragraph 16.7.
Warning. If the Configuration Upload command fails, the equipment, if it is managed with the:
D
SNMP protocol, does not change its status. The failure of the operation is pointed out
into the relevant Equipment window (refer to paragraph 2.1.2), into the Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] window (refer to paragraph 14.1.1) and by the asterisk on the
side of the NE icon (refer to paragraph 2.2.6.7).
91
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
6.3.6
Warning. The command is forwarded only if it has been selected one or more equipment
managed with the Legacy protocol. For the equipment managed with the SNMP
protocol, the forwarding of the command under examination is not available because
it could be equal to the forwarding of the Connect command.
This command removes all the information stored into the database, relevant to the equipment
configuration and then activates the connection between the supervisory system and the
equipment itself.
If the command forwarding has a positive result, such a forwarding changes the connection
status of the equipment: from disconnected, unreachable it becomes connected.
Warning. It is not possible to forward the Legacy Reset & Connect command toward an
equipment in connected status.
The using mode of the command is reported at paragraph 16.5.
92
6.
6.4
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
The connection status of an equipment essentially points out to the user if the equipment is or
not managed by the supervisory system and if it is, its functional status (alarms).
The different statuses that characterize an equipment are the following ones: disconnected,
connected, unreachable and maintenance.
On the video, the current status of an equipment is pointed out by means of the colour of the
relevant NE symbol. In fact one or more colours correspond to every status.
The colour of the NE icon affects also the colour of the icons relevant to the Container objects
that contain the equipment. In fact the Container objects reflect the connection or functioning
status of the equipment present into such objects according to the following rules:
D
If into a Container window there is at least a connected NE, the relevant icon will get
the colour relevant to the connected status 61.
If into a Container window there is at least a Container object with at least a connected
NE, the relevant icon will get the colour relevant to the connected status.
If into a Container window there are more connected NEs o other Container objects,
the colour of the icon will be defined by the colour of the NE or Container symbol where
it is present the most serious alarm.
Warning. The colour of the NE icon in maintenance status (refer to paragraph 6.4.4) does not
affect he colour if the Container icons where it is present the NE 62.
Here below for each status, it is pointed out: a brief description, the operations that the user can
execute, the conditions or the commands that define the passage from a status to another one
and the colour coupled to the NE icon.
6.4.1
Disconnect
It is the beginning status of an equipment just after its creation; then, it is the status that it is
reached after a disconnection command.
In this condition, the equipment is not managed by the system: no one message is forwarded
or received and the polling procedure is not executed (refer to paragraph 7.1.1).
61.
The description of the colours that characterize the NE or Container symbols is reported at
paragraph 2.2.6.10.
62.
For instance, if into a Container window there is a NE in connected status (green colour) and a
NE in maintenance status (pink colour), the Container icon will get the colour relevant to the
connected status (green).
93
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
Operations
The operations that the user can execute into this status are the following ones:
D
To forward the Line Test, Connect, LegacyReset & Connect command 63.
To open the Equipment window (only if the equipment has been connected for at least
one time) because the disconnection procedure does not involve the deleting of the
database relevant to the configuration and alarm information (alarm history).
However, in this case, the status and the values of the attributes, relevant to the objects
present into the window, will not refer to the current condition of the equipment but at
the last known configuration.
Icon colour
The icon colour coupled with the disconnected status is BROWN.
6.4.2
Connect
It is the status reached by the equipment after a connection procedure that has been correctly
executed.
In this condition, the equipment answers correctly to the system queries.
During the connection period of the equipment, the user is able to forward commands and to
ask for information.
The only exception for this rule is the presence of the LOM/LCT in Configuration mode (refer
to paragraph 6.5).
Then, when the NE is in connected status, it is assumed that there is a misalignment between
the alarm and/or configuration information known by the system and the real situation present
into the equipment, the user can align again the information choosing the Configuration
Upload or Alarm Realignment command (refer to paragraph 6.3).
63.
94
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
Operation
The operations that the user can execute into this status are the following ones:
D
To open the Equipment window and to execute all the configuration operations
(creation, deleting and change/check of the values relevant to the attributes) of the
objects present into the NE.
The status and the values of the attributes of the objects present into the Equipment
window refer to the real configuration of the equipment.
To change the forwarding status of the alarms/traps from the NE to the supervisory
system and to change the local seriousness level of the NE alarms (SNMP
Equipment Severity Code command refer to paragraph 13.3).
To change the SCT/LCT user list of the selected Network Element (SNMP LCT
Equipment Users command refer to paragraph 13.6).
To display the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected with the NE (SNMP
LCT Logged Users command refer to paragraph 13.7).
To display/change the remote equipment list stored in the controller of the NE (SNMP
NE Remote Element Table command refer to paragraph 13.8).
To transfer the NE configuration to another NE (real or virtual one) of the same type
(SNMP Configuration Download command refer to paragraph 16.8).
Warning. For the PMP type equipment, it is not possible to execute this operation.
To set the hysteresis parameters that characterizes the ringing alarms (Legacy
Network Alarm Hysteresis command refer to paragraph 13.1).
95
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
Icon colour
The colour of the icon coupled with the connected status depends on the alarms present into
the equipment itself. According to the seriousness level of the current alarms the colour can be
the following one:
D
light blue, into the equipment there is at least an alarm with Warning seriousness level
(simple signal).
yellow, into the equipment there is at least an alarm with Minor seriousness level
(alarm).
orange, into the equipment there is at least an alarm with Major seriousness level
(serious alarm).
red, into the equipment there is at least an alarm with Critical level (extremely serious
alarm).
If into the equipment there are more alarms at the same time with different seriousness levels,
the colour of the NE icon will represent the most serious alarm.
6.4.3
Unreachable
It is the status that is reached when the equipment, also with the automatic repetition of the
message, does not answer to the queries of the supervisory system or forwards unknown
messages.
In this condition the NE is not managed by the NMS5UX system, that however automatically
forwards a connection command at regular times.
Operations
The operations that the user can execute into this status are the following ones:
D
To open the Equipment window (only if the equipment has been connected for at least
one time).
But, in this case, the status and the values of the attributes relevant to the objects
present into the window does not refer to the current condition of the equipment but
to the last known configuration.
96
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
Icon colour
The colour of the NE icon coupled with this status is RED with an X on the symbol.
6.4.4
Maintenance
The equipment gets this status during the execution of an operation, for instance during the
connection.
In fact, this status points out a temporaneous condition. at the end of the operation on progress,
the NE will get the status coupled with its condition (connected, disconnected, unreachable).
Operations
When the NE is in this status, the system can not execute any operation.
Icon colour
The colour of the NE icon coupled with this status is PINK.
97
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
6.5
LOM/LCT
The word LOM/LCT identifies the software application program, loaded on PC or on portable
device (PCD), designed by Siae to manage and to locally configure its own devices.
Each type of equipment is provided with its own LOM Local Operator Manager or LCT Local
Craft Terminal program 64.
The operations that can be executed by means of the LOM/LCT are mainly the ones that can
be executed by means of the NMS5UX system.
Warning. More detailed information concerning the use of the LOM or LCT programs are
reported into the specific User Manuals, here below there are only some indications
concerning the relations between LOM/LCT and the NMS5UX system.
6.5.1
The local user can activate the connection between LOM/LCT and equipment by means of two
different modes: Monitoring 65 or Configuration 66.
In Monitoring mode, it is possible to check the configuration and the parameters of the
equipment, but it is not possible to execute any change or to ask for the execution of an
operation.
On the contrary, in Configuration mode, it is possible to check and to change the configuration
and the parameters of the connected equipment.
The local activation of a connection between LOM/LCT and equipment in Monitoring mode does
not affect the alarm acquiring or the command forwarding executed by the system: the NMS5UX
user can open the Equipment window (refer to paragraph 2.1.2) and execute reading (get) and
writing (set) operations.
On the contrary, when it is locally activated a connection between LOM/LCT and equipment in
Configuration mode, if the NE under examination is:
64.
LCT is an additional software module of the SCT program Subnetwork Craft Terminal. Each Siae
equipment is provided with its own additional software module called LCT <equipment
denomination>.
More detailled information concerning the SCT/LCT... program are reported in the relevant Siae
manuals.
65.
Warning. For SCT program, the Monitoring modality corresponds to the activation of the
SCTequipment connection with Read Only user profile.
66.
Warning. For SCT program, the Configuration modality corresponds to the activation of the
SCTequipment connection with Station Operator or System user profile.
98
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
managed with SNMP protocol 67, it is not possible to change the configuration
parameters or to forward commands with some exceptions: the NMS5UX user can
Open the Equipment window and execute reading (get) operations on all the
parameters and writing (set) operations only on the following attributes 68:
6.5.2
Execute the software reset of the equipment. The operation consists of the
reinitializing operation of all the communication channels (for instance with
the supervisory system) of the equipment.
During the period when the connection is activated in Configuration mode, it is not signalled to
the supervisory system any change relevant to the alarms.
When the local connection between LOM/LCT and equipment is deactivated the NMS5UX
system automatically executes a realigning procedure of the configuration (forwarding of the
Configuration Upload command) to see the possible changes executed by the local user and
to get all the current alarm signals.
If the local user has changed the configuration of the remote equipment, the new values are get
and replaced to the ones stored before into the database.
The activation and the deactivation of the local connection, as in Monitoring mode as in
Configuration mode, are spontaneously communicated by the equipment to the NMS5UX
system and signalled to the user:
D
into the map window, it is pointed out an asterisk on the side of the NE icon (refer to
paragraph 2.2.6.7).
Warning. This information is forwarded also to the Container icons that contain the
NE symbol.
67.
With the exception of the PMP type equipment, for which it is not possible to open the
Equipment window.
68.
For the description of the commands present into the Equipment window refer to the User Manual
relevant to the equipment type connected with the window (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
99
6.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
into the Equipment Info/Find: physical address ... window of the NE under examination
(refer to paragraph 11.1.1).
into the Equipment window of the NE under examination (only for the equipment
managed with SNMP protocol).
Then, the activation of the local connection in Configuration mode is signalled in the following
way:
D
into the map window, the NE icon gets the white colour (refer to paragraph 2.2.6.10).
Warning. This information is not forwarded to the Container icons that contain the NE
symbol 69.
6.5.3
Enabling/disabling of
Configuration mode
the
LCTequipment
connection
in
Warning. The description reported here below can be applied only for the equipment
managed with the SNMP protocol.
The NMS5UX user can enable (or disable) the LCT user (by means of the LCT program) for the
connection with the equipment (LCT Config parameter) in Configuration mode (refer to
paragraph 6.5.1).
With details if the parameter has the following value:
D
Enabled means that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment as
in Monitoring mode as in Configuration one.
Disabled means that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment in
Monitoring mode only.
Warning. Without taking into account the above mentioned setting, when the equipment is
turned off and turned on again or when it is reset the LCT Config parameter, it is automatically
set with the Enabled value.
The command to execute the operation is present into the Equipment window of the NE under
examination.
Warning. For each equipment, the status of the LCT Config parameter is pointed out into the
relevant Equipment window also into the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window (refer to
paragraph 14.1.1).
69.
100
For instance if into a Container window there is a NE in connected status (green colour) and a NE
connected with the LCT program in Configuration mode (white colour), the icon of the Container
will get the colour relevant to the connected status (green).
7.
The subject chapter describes the management, the acquisition and the displaying, executed
by the NMS5UX system, of:
D
the alarms and the events present into the equipment controlled by the system itself
(refer to paragraph 7.1).
the results of the Performance Monitoring measurements activated into the equipment
controlled by the system itself (refer to paragraph 7.2).
101
7.
7.1
ALARMS
The primary importance functions of the NMS5UX system are the detection, the visual signalling
and the centralized memorization of the alarm/status/event signals present into the managed
equipment.
The word alarm identify the failure signal created by an error or by a malfunctioning of the NE
or of one of its elements.
The words status and event identify the signals that do not point out a malfunctioning but a
status change, an operation on progress or a functioning condition. With details:
D
The event signals are created by the supervisory system itself, for instance the
beginning of a realigning operation of the alarms.
Warning. In the following part of the chapter, the generic word alarm refers to the alarm, status
and event signals.
7.1.1
Alarm acquiring
The acquiring process of the alarms changes according to the type of protocol used by the
equipment. With details for the equipment:
D
managed with the Legacy protocol, the acquiring of the alarms is executed by means
of a polling process by the supervisory centre, through the serial interfaces of the
Workstation (WS Port) or of the Communication Server Board (CSB Port), toward all
the equipment in connected status.
managed with SNMP protocol, the detection and reset signals of an alarm are
spontaneously forwarded to the supervisory centre by the equipment (trap SNMP).
A polling process executed by the supervisory centre is kept only to check the
reachability status of the equipment.
102
7.
Warning. The equipment in disconnected, unreachable or undefined status are not involved into
the polling process.
The alarm status can be acquired also forwarding the Alarm Realignment command (refer
to paragraph 16.6) or the Configuration Upload command (refer to paragraph 16.7).
Into the alarm history, it is possible to configure the maximum number of records (value that can
be set by the superuser) that can be memorised into the Alarm History table.
During the day, the system memorizes into the table all the alarms forwarded by the equipment
(also if their number exceeds the maximum value of records). At midnight, the system checks
the number of records; if such a value exceeds the maximum set value, the system will delete
the oldest records among the displayed and reset signals only.
Warning. If inside the alarm history all the alarms are activated and not yet reset ones and their
number exceeds the maximum set value, the system DOES NOT delete any record.
Polling execution
Warning. The contents of the subject paragraph refer to the equipment managed with
the Legacy protocol (FAM, OLTME, Radio standard, G series Radio). For the equipment
managed with SNMP protocol (PDH Radio, SDH Radio, PDHAL Radio, ADMC, PMP) the
polling process executes only the checking of the reachability of the equipment
themselves, and does not collect the alarms.
Each CSB/WS port autonomously executes the polling process relevant to the local equipment
(directly connected) and to the remote ones (connected in cascade by means of EOC, service
channels, etc.).
In such a way, the acquiring times of the alarms are strongly reduced because for a high
dimension network it is not executed a single polling process but as much processes as are the
managed and in open status CSB/WS ports.
The polling process is managed by a properly devoted program, loaded into the CommServer
for the CSB ports and into the Workstation for the WS ports. Such a programs makes cyclically
available the connection line for each single equipment connected to the same CSB/WS port.
The equipment involved into the polling cycle communicates to the supervisory system all the
detected changes, if the alarm status has changed from the last polling time.
After having forwarded all the information, the connection line will become available for the next
equipment. The duration of the polling cycle changes according to the number of equipment
connected to the CSB/WS port and to the quantity of the transmitted signals.
Though every signal is timestamped (by the remote equipment at the occurrence of such an
alarm), the duration of the polling cycle or the query sequence of the equipment into such a cycle
will not affect the correct displaying of the alarm information for the user.
103
7.
7.1.2
Alarm displaying
If it is present, into the open map window, the symbol of the NE where it has been
detected the signal, the colour of the symbol dynamically changes according to the
seriousness level coupled with the alarm (refer to paragraph 2.2.6.7).
Warning. If into the equipment there is an alarm with a seriousness level higher than
the one of the detected alarm, the icon does not change colour because such a colour
is defined by the alarm with the most seriousness level present into the equipment.
The NE icon contains also the information that there is an alarm not yet
displayed/accepted by a user (refer to paragraph 2.2.6.7).
104
The NE status (colour change and presence of an alarm not yet displayed/accepted)
is pointed out also into the Container map windows that contain the NE under
examination (the colour of the Container icons changes).
7.
Warning. The colour of the Container symbol, is defined by the colour of the NE symbol
present into it that at its turn contains the most serious alarm.
D
The system dynamically adds into the Alarm History Browser window (refer to
paragraph 12.1.1), if it is open, the record relevant to the detected signal.
Warning. If there are some active filters, it is possible that the record is not added
because it does not comply with the set filter criteria.
The system dynamically adds into the Current Alarm Browser window (refer to
paragraph 12.2.1), if it is open, the record relevant to the detected signal.
If it is open, into the Equipment window with Read Write access (refer to paragraph
2.1.2) relevant to the equipment where it has been detected the signal, the system
graphically changes the symbol of the NE 70.
Warning. If the Equipment window has Read Only access, the system does not signal
the alarm, because the window is not dynamically updated. To update the alarms, it
is necessary to ask for a new reading of the table relevant to the current alarms.
the alarm history 71 relevant to all the equipment (Network Alarm history command
refer to paragraph 12.1) or only to the selected one (NE Alarm history command
refer to paragraph 12.4).
the list of the alarms currently activated into all the equipment (Network Current
alarms command refer to paragraph 12.2) or only into the selected one (NE Current
alarms command refer to paragraph 12.5).
7.1.3
Alarm correlation
The wording alarm correlation means the feature to correlate, into the table of the equipment
alarms, the activation signal of an alarm with its reset one.
This new feature has changed the philosophy used to display the alarms into the Alarm History
Browser window (refer to paragraph 13.1.1).
70.
The description of the Equipment window is reported into the relevant equipment Manual (refer
to paragraph 1.3.3).
71.
The alarm history is the list of the signals acquired and recorded by the supervisory system
during the time. Into the alarm history, the system memorizes as the detection signal as the alarm
reset one.
105
7.
In fact, into the previous versions of the supervisory system, the notification for the
activation/reset of an alarm was displayed into the window with two different records and it was
not immediately possible to get an eventual correlation without using some complex processes.
Then, after a forced alignment of the alarm status 72, the system recorded newly all the
notifications relevant to the activated alarms on the equipment and the possible new alarms.
Then, it was possible to have into the window some different consecutive activation signals
relevant to the same alarm without having a corresponding reset signal.
With the implementation of the feature alarm correlation, the system displays the activation
notification of an alarm into the window through one record. Such a record points out the
activation date/time of the alarm itself. The system points out the reset of the same alarm adding
to the already present record the indication of the deactivation date/time (refer to paragraph
13.1.1).
Then, after a forced alignment of the alarm status, the system does not newly record all the
notification of the activated alarm on the equipment, but only the possible new alarms. Then,
at the end of the forced realignment, the system will automatically insert, into the relevant
record, the deactivation date/time for the alarms that do not result activated longer.
Warning. If an equipment has been disconnected, the system removes all the signals (activation
and activation/reset ones) relevant to such an equipment from the alarm history.
7.1.4
Alarm saving
It is possible to save the alarm history, stored into the database of the supervisory system, on
tape/disk or on file. With details, it is possible:
D
to save on tape and/or on disk the entire alarm history present into the database
(Alarm history backup command refer to paragraph 15.1).
Then, it will be possible to restore the data (Alarm history restore command refer
to paragraph 15.2) and to display them into a proper window (Old alarm history
command refer to paragraph 12.3).
72.
106
to save on file:
the entire alarm history (or a part of it) present into the database of the system
(Export command into the Alarm History Browser window refer to
paragraph 12.1.2.1).
the entire alarm history (or a part of it) restored from tape or disk (Export
command into the Old History Browser window refer to paragraph 12.3.2.1).
New reading of the configuration and of the alarm status after unreachable equipment conditions
or after local operator output or however with explicit operators operations.
7.
7.1.5
Every one of the alarm roots known and detected by the NMS5UX system is coupled with a
seriousness level that defines the alarm importance.
Each level is identified with a name and a colour, as reported into Tab. 7.1.
Tab. 7.1
Seriousness level
Name
Colour
Critical
Red
Serious alarm
Major
Orange
Alarm
Minor
Yellow
Warning
Light blue
Light alarm
The seriousness level of the alarms is the criterion used by the supervisory system to graphically
display for the user the functional status of the equipment and of the corresponding objects.
In fact, when an alarm occurs into a connected equipment, the icon that represents the
equipment changes its colour according to the seriousness level of the active alarm present into
the equipment itself. Also the colour of the Container symbols that contain the NE points out
the current alarm condition.
If into the equipment, there are more alarms with different seriousness levels at the same time,
the colour of the icon will represent the most serious alarm; the same feature is valid for the icons
of the containers.
Then, the seriousness level is reported also into the Alarm History Browser window (refer to
paragraph 12.1.1) and Current Alarm Browser window (refer to paragraph 12.2.1).
107
7.
For each alarm, the network seriousness level is COMMON for all the NEs of the same type
present into all the OpenView maps.
To change the network seriousness of an alarm, use the SNMP Network Severity Code
command (refer to paragraph 13.2) 73.
Warning. This command is available only for the user with superuser profile.
The local seriousness level is the level that characterizes the alarm when it is stored into the
controller of the NE and displayed by the local management system (LOM/LCT).
For the same alarm, it is possible to define a local seriousness level different for the several
NEs.
To change the local seriousness level of an alarm, use the SNMP Equipment Severity Code
command (refer to paragraph 13.3).
Example
Let us suppose to have connected, to the NMS5UX system, two SDH Radio type NEs: NEA
and NEB.
By means of the SNMP Equipment Severity Code command, it is locally defined that the x
alarm for the NEA has Normal seriousness level, while for the NEB, it has Minor seriousness
level.
On the contrary, using the SNMP Network Severity Code command, it is defined that the x
alarm, for all the SDH radio type NEs has Critical seriousness level.
Into the NEA, the detection (or the reset) of the x alarm will be stored into the controller of
the NE and seen from the local management group (LOM/LCT) with Normal seriousness level,
while it will be seen by the NMS5UX system with Critical seriousness level.
While into the NEB, the detection (or the reset) of the x alarm will be stored into the controller
of the NE and seen from the local management group (LOM/LCT) with Minor, seriousness
level, while it will be seen by the NMS5UX system with Critical seriousness level.
7.1.5.2 Change of the seriousness level for the User Input Alarm
The description reported at paragraph 7.1.5.1 can be applied for all the alarm signals (of all the
types of equipment managed with the SNMP protocol) with the exception of the alarms for the
user inputs.
The seriousness level of the User Input Alarm is defined by means of a specific command
present into the Equipment window.
Such a level represents as the network seriousness level as the local seriousness one. This
means that, if, for instance, it is defined that the alarm User Input x for a NE has Critical
seriousness level, at its detection, the alarm will be stored into the controller of the NE, seen
by the LCT program and by the NMS5UX system with Critical seriousness level.
73.
108
The change of the network seriousness level for an alarm is not communicated to the NE
controller because the new setting affects exclusively and only the alarm indication into the
NMS5UX supervisory system.
7.
The setting of the seriousness level is independent for each User Input Alarm, and it is local to
the NE selected for the operation. This means that the setting has to be executed for each single
User Input Alarm of each single NE.
More detailed information concerning the user inputs and the command to change their
seriousness level are reported into the Equipment Manuals of the NMS5UX system (refer to
paragraph 1.3.3).
7.1.6
Alarm enabling/disabling
Warning. The contents of the subject paragraph are valid only for the equipment
managed with the SNMP protocol.
The NMS5UX system allows enabling/disabling the alarms and/or the forwarding of the relevant
traps 74. With details, it is possible:
D
to disable the alarm; in this case the detection (or the reset) of the alarm signal is neither
recorded into the NE controller nor communicated to the supervisory program: as if the
alarm was never occurred.
to disable the forwarding of the trap; in this case the detection (or the reset) of the alarm
signal is recorded into the NE controller but it is not communicated to the supervisory
system.
Warning. If it is forwarded a Configuration Upload command to the NE, the system will
get also the alarm signals with the forwarding of the relevant trap disabled.
to enable the alarm and the forwarding of the trap; in this case the detection (or the
reset) of the alarm is recorded into the NE controller and communicated to the
supervisory system (with the forwarding of the relevant trap) that will display it into the
current alarms and into the alarm history (default condition).
Warning. The enabling/disabling of the alarm and the forwarding of the trap is independent for
each alarm, and it is local to the NE selected for the operation. This means that the setting has
to be executed for each single alarm of each single NE.
To enable/disable the alarms and to forward the traps of an equipment, use the SNMP
Equipment Severity Code command (refer to paragraph 13.3).
Then, it is possible to check the NEs that have at least an alarm/trap disabled opening the
Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window (refer to paragraph 14.1.1).
74.
The word trap means the message (in this case concerning the detection or the reset of the alarm
signal) spontaneously forwarded by the NE to the supervisory system.
The word alarm means the detection signal (or the reset one) of an alarm that is stored into the
NE controller.
109
7.
7.1.7
Ringing alarms
In some cases, into an equipment, it is possible to have an alarm activated and reset several
times within a short time range.
The instability that characterizes these alarms, called ringing alarms, produces a quantity of
signals such as to be able to saturate the network. In fact, at each activation/reset of the alarm,
the supervisory system memorizes a signal.
For such a reason, before recording an alarm signal, the system checks the stability of the signal
itself.
The criterion used to detect is an alarm is or not a ringing alarm is the following one: NMS5UX
considers an alarm as a ringing one when, during a t time range, it records that the number
of activations relevant to such a signal is higher than the thr_in threshold.
The system will not consider longer an alarm as a ringing one if, during the next t time range,
the number of the deactivations relevant to such an alarm is lower than the thr_out threshold.
Example. Lets us suppose to have set the values t=120, thr_in=3, thr_out=1. The A alarm during
the time range equal to 120 seconds, is activated and reset twice and at its third activation
(thr_in=3) the supervisory system marks it as a ringing alarm: the system will not record the
next activations/resets into the Alarm History table.
During the next time range of 120 seconds, if the A alarm is activated and reset one time only
(thr_out=1), the supervisory system will not consider longer the A alarm as a ringing one.
The superuser can change the t parameter and the thr_in and thr_out thresholds. Their
default values are: t = 120 sec., thr_in = 3, thr_out =1.
Into the Alarm History Browser window, when an alarm exits from the ringing status and the
last signal arrived from the equipment points out the alarm deactivation, the system will execute
the signal management without changes the respect to a normal signal of reset alarm: the
system correlates the alarm to the preceding signal.
While, when an alarm exits from the ringing status and the last signal arrived from the
equipment points out the alarm activation, the system will execute the management in the
following way: at first, it will transmit a signal of reset alarm that will be correlated to the preceding
signal of ringing alarm and later it will transmit a new signal of activated alarm. Into the Alarm
History Browser window, the system will display a record of reset ringing alarm followed by a
record of activated alarm.
Warning. The system does not reset the ringing condition relevant to an alarm at the forced
realignment of the alarm status.
110
7.
7.2
PERFORMANCE MONITORING
The quality of the signal concerning the telecommunication equipment manufactured by Siae
microelettronica can be checked by means of Performance Monitoring (PM) measurements.
A PM measurement consists on the recording, during a predefined time (observation time), of
the values concerning some specific control parameters 75 (BER, error counting, etc.).
Some threshold limits 76 have been assigned to such parameters.
The exceeding of the threshold limit points out a signal degradation, more or less serious. This
condition creates an alarm, that is stored and managed by the equipment and by the NMS5UX
supervisory system as any other alarm.
7.2.1
75.
The parameters under examination change according to the type of equipment and
measurements supported by such an equipment. Usually, all the executed measurements refer
to ITUT Reccomandations (for instance G.828, G.826, etc.).
76.
The setting of the threshold limits can be changed by the NMS5UX user.
The setting mode of the threshold limits relevant to the control parameters is reported into the
Equipment manuals relevant to the NE types managed by the supervisory system (refer to
paragraph 1.3.3).
77.
The description of the Equipment window and the activation/deactivation procedure of the PM
measurements are reported into the equipment manuals relevant to the NE type under
examination (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
111
7.
If at the end of the observation time the measurement has not yet deactivated, the system starts
another observation time and so on until when the measurement is stopped.
When the supervisory system makes a query to the equipment, the equipment itself will forward
to the system the records (daily and primary ones) that it has stored.
The Siae equipment group the results of the PM measurements into observation times of 15
minutes (primary records) and of 24 hours (daily records).
The observation times are not synchronized with the instant when the measurement is
activated, but they refer for the primary records, to the quarter of an hour of the solar day (00.00,
00.15, 00.30, etc) and for the daily records to the 00.00 time of the solar day.
For instance, if a measurement starts at 11.40, the first primary record will have as observation
time the period 11.40...11.45 (corresponding to the range 11.30...11.45), while the first daily
record will have as observation time the period 11.40...00.00.
For each measurement type, the equipment keeps stored the last 16 primary records
(corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last 2 daily records (corresponding to the last 2 days).
The proceeding records are overwritten.
If an equipment has some PM measurements on progress and it is started again or turned off,
later, when it starts up again or it is turned on again, the measurements that have been activated
before the turning off, will be automatically startedup again.
the records (primary and daily), relevant to the period when the measurement has been stopped,
will result empty and if the system has reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily one,
they will be overwritten on the proceeding ones.
7.2.2
The results relevant to the PM measurements will be get by the NMS5UX system by means of
a polling process equal to the one used for the alarm acquiring of the equipment managed with
the Legacy protocol 78 with the only difference that the alarm polling cycle is cyclically executed
while the PM querying action is executed at regular times that can change from 1 up to 4 h
(default 2 hours) 79.
The PM querying process is managed by means of a dedicated program that executes the
queries and has also the function to define which equipment have to be involved into the
querying operations.
78.
The PM query operation functions in the same way of the alarm polling as for the mode used for
the message forwarding as for the relation between PM querycommand forwarding and the
relation between PM queryLOM presence (referr to paragraph 7.1.1).
79.
The frequency used for the PM information request, executed by the supervisory centre to the
equipment, is defined by the function Tx15 minutes. By defaulf, the T value is 8 (8x15min=2h), but
it can be changed by the superuser user ranging from 4 (4x15min=1h) up to 16 (16x15min=5h).
112
7.
An equipment involved into the querying cycle has to comply with the following rules:
D
Equipment type. Not all the equipment managed by the NMS5UX system supports the
PM function. Such equipment are not involved into the PM polling cycle.
Equipment status. The system involves in the query procedure only the equipment in
connected status. The equipment in disconnected, unreachable or undefined
status are not involved in the query procedure.
Status of the PM measurements. The system involves in the query procedure only the
equipment that have at least one active measurement on progress when it is executed
the PM polling.
After a PM query, the involved equipment forwards the daily and primary records relevant to the
measurements on progress.
If the measurement has been deactivated, at the query of the NMS5UX system, the equipment
forwards all the records (primary and daily ones) calculated till that time, with the exception of
the last record.
For instance, if the measurement has been activated at 9.27 and deactivated at 18.42, the
record relevant to the observation period 9.15...9.30 is transferred to the supervisory system
in incomplete status, while the record relevant to the period 18.30...18.45 is not forwarded.
If the measurement has been activated and deactivated more times during the same
observation period, the system will forward to the NMS5UX system, the record that groups the
results concerning the last executed measurement.
For instance, if the measurement has been activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, and then
it is activated again at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.00...9.15 will contain
the results of the measurements relevant to the period 9.09...9.15, while the system will not
forward the results relevant to the period 9.02...9.07.
7.2.3
The NMS5UX user can always display the results of the PM measurements into a specific
equipment subdivided into daily or primary records of the last 6 months.
To display the daily records, select the equipment into the map window and choose the
Performance Monitoring command (refer to paragraph 10.2.1).
To display the primary records, execute the procedure described at paragraph 10.2.2.
It is possible to display also the results of the PM measurements that have been previously
saved on tape or disk by means of the Old Performance Monitoring command (refer to
paragraph 7.2.4 and 10.3).
113
7.
7.2.4
It is possible to save the results of the PM measurements, stored into the database of the
supervisory system, on tape/disk or on file.
With details, it is possible:
D
To save on tape and/or disk all the results of the PM measurements relevant to a month,
present into the database (Pm backup command refer to paragraph 15.4).
Then, it will be possible to restore the data (Pm restore command refer to paragraph
15.5) and to display them into a proper window (Old Performance Monitoring
command refer to paragraph 10.3).
To save on file:
During the saving operations, it is possible to forward the file to a user, via email.
the data are saved in ASCII format, that can be detected by the great part of the text
processing programs and of the electronic sheets.
114
Section
Menu and
commands
115
116
Warning
The commands of the NMS5UX release 6.4 graphical interface, are integral
parts into the HP OpenView Windows Network Node Manager graphical
platform.
Into the Siae World map window and into all the other map windows of the
supervisory system, there are all the menus and commands provided for the
two graphical interfaces.
In this section, there is ONLY the description of the menus and of the
commands specific for the NMS5UX graphical interface (options
proceeded by the wording SIAE).
For the description and the use of the menus and of the commands of the HP
OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform, refer to the specific
documentation.
The options preceded by the wording:
D
Legacy ..., point out the commands relevant to the Siae equipment
managed with the Legacy protocol only.
Warning. The Legacy... commands are present into the menus only
if the software modules for the management of the Legacy
equipment have been installed.
SNMP ..., point out the commands relevant to the Siae equipment
managed with the SNMP protocol only.
The commands with the label that does not point out the Legacy or SNMP
wording, are relevant to all the Siae equipment.
Some commands described here below are optional ones. Therefore, such
commands can be absent into the specific menu of its own NMS5UX system.
117
118
8.
to save on file the objects present into the open map or into a container of the map.
to open a file that contains the memorised objects of a map (or of a container) and
to import such objects into the currently open map.
Warning. The command is available for the superuser, privileged and advanced
user profile only.
D
119
8.
8.1
IMPORT/EXPORT
System access
User profile
to save on file the objects present into the open map or into a container of the map.
to open a file that contains the memorised objects of a map (or of a container) and to
import such objects into the currently open map.
8.1.1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Type into the Selection box, the name of the file with the extension eim (for instance
map01.eim), into which the user wants to save the map.
Warning. The system saves the file into a default folder: the user can change this
setting.
6.
8.1.2
1.
120
8.
2.
3.
5.
Type into the Selection box, the name of the file with the extension eim (for instance
map02.eim), into which the user wants to save the map.
Warning. The system saves the file into a default folder: the user can change this
setting.
6.
8.1.3
1.
Start up the supervisory system and open the map where the objects memorised on
the file have to be imported (according to the procedure shown into paragraph 8.1.1
or 8.1.2).
2.
3.
4.
If the user wants that the objects present into the file replace the ones present into the
open map, he has to activate the Clear SubMap box.
The user has not to activate the box, if he wants to add the object present into the file
to the ones present into the open map. The system does not add the identical objects
present into the same container.
5.
6.
Select into the Files area, the desired file with eim extension.
Warning. The system suggests the files present into the default folder. If it is necessary,
change the path.
121
8.
7.
8.1.4
1.
Start up the supervisory system and open the map that contains the container where
the objects memorised on the file have to be imported (according to the procedure
shown into paragraph 8.1.1 or 8.1.2).
2.
3.
4.
If the user wants that the objects present into the file replace the ones present into the
container, he has to activate the Clear SubMap box.
The user has not to activate the box, if he wants to add the object present into the file
to the ones present into the selected container. The system does not add the identical
objects.
5.
6.
Select into the Files area, the desired file with eim extension.
Warning. The system suggests the files present into the default folder. If it is necessary,
change the path.
7.
122
8.
8.2
CHANGE MAP
System access
User profile
The Change Map command allows closing the currently open map and opening another one.
Permission column points out the available access type. With details:
Read/Write wording points out that the operator can open the map with
Read/Write or Read Only access.
Read wording points out that the operator can open the map only with Read
Only access (the Read/Write access has already been seized).
Comment column points out some additional notes. The (Current Map) wording
points out the currently open map.
2.
3.
Open Map READ/WRITE to open the map with Read Write access.
Open Map READ/ONLY to open the map with Read Only access.
Read Only, select the Open Map READ/ONLY pushbutton to open the map with
Read Only access.
The Open Map READ/WRITE pushbutton is not available.
At the selection of the pushbutton, the system automatically closes the map and
opens the new one.
4.
At the displaying of the NMS5UX Login window, type the name (Login box) and the
access code (Password box) relevant to its own user.
5.
123
8.
124
9.
Add, it creates objects (Network Element, Container, Radio Link 80, Workstation,
Communication Server Board) 81 for the graphical displaying of the network into the
map windows.
Map Realignment, it allows creating, into the currently open map, the copy of a NE,
WS, CSB object present into another map.
Generate Info for WEB, allows to check the database information necessary to the
Siae RAN (Remote Access Nms5ux) application 82.
Warning. The command is OPTIONAL.
Warning. The above listed commands are necessary to display graphically the involved
equipment network into the maps and to provide, to the NMS5UX system, all the information
necessary for the supervisory operations and for the monitoring of each single equipment.
Before use such commands, the operator has to read chapter 5.3 that points out the modes to
correctly and quickly configure his own supervisory system.
80.
Optional command.
81.
The NMS5UX system is equipped with a series of predefined objects. Such objects are the base
elements that the user will have to use to draw his own network inside the map.
82.
125
9.
9.1
ADD
System access
User profile
ReadWrite
Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The Add command allows creating an object into the activated map window.
The command choice opens a menu that contains the following options:
D
Radio Link for Scoreboards, it creates a Radio Link object as it is pointed out into
the paragraph 9.1.3.
The Radio Link objects need to represent graphically a logic connection between two
NE objects of the same type (for instance two SDH Radio objects or two PDH Radio
ones).
The system points out the list of the created Radio Link objects into the Radio Link
Brower window (refer to paragraph 15.8).
It is possible to create all the desired Radio Link objects.
Warning. The Radio Link for Scoreboards command is OPTIONAL.
126
9.
When the operator creates a WS object, the system automatically creates the
corresponding WS Port objects into the relevant [WS] window. Each WS Port object
is characterized by the number of the port displayed at the bottom of the icon.
Warning. The creation of the WS object is MANDATORY if into the network there are
some equipment managed with Legacy protocol and physically connected with the
ports of the WS (refer to paragraph 5.1.3 and 5.3.2).
It is possible to create all the desired WS objects.
Warning. The subject command is present into the menu only if the software modules
for the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
D
Warning. After its creation the symbol of an object is displayed ONLY into the map
actually open (the map where it has been created). If the user wants that the new object
is present into two different maps, he has to create the relevant symbol into both maps.
then, if the created symbol (NE, WS or CSB type) is already present into a OpenView map,
it will automatically get the status of the already existing object.
For instance, if into the map A there is the symbol NE1 in connected status, at the creation of
the symbol NE1 (same IP or physical address) into the map B, the symbol will result connected
because it gets the status of the twin symbol.
9.1.1
Add Container
Open the window map where it has to be created the new Container object.
Warning. It is possible to create every type of container into every map window with
127
9.
3.
Into the Label text box, type the name to be assigned to the object (alphanumeric string
with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 30 characters).
The name will be displayed under the object symbol and will constitute the name of the
map window that is opened at the double selection of the symbol.
4.
Into the Type box, select the container type to be created among the following options:
Subnetwork, Station, Substation or Communication Server.
5.
Into the Comment box, type possible information relevant to the object (max 500
characters).
The setting of this parameter is not mandatory.
6.
9.1.2
The Add Network Element command allows creating a Network Element object into the
activated map window.
Its choice opens an additional menu that contains the following options:
D
SNMP Managed, it creates a Network Element object managed with the SNMP
protocol (refer to paragraph 9.1.2.1).
Warning. Use this command when the NE object to be created has a corresponding
equipment present into the network.
SNMP Managed (Virtual), it creates a virtual Network Element object managed with
SNMP protocol (refer to paragraph 9.1.2.2).
Warning. Use this command when the NE object to be created does not have a
corresponding equipment present into the network.
83.
128
The map windows that are opened respectively selecting a WS object and a CSB one.
9.
Warning. Use this command when the NE object to be created does not have a
corresponding equipment present into the network.
Warning. The subject command is present into the menu only if the software modules
for the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
Warning. A NE is not automatically managed by the NMS5UX system at the creation of the
relevant object, but it is necessary to forward a connection command (refer to paragraphs 6.2
and 16.2.1). The only exception is if the created NE is already present into a OpenView map
in connected status; in this case, the NE, just after its connection, will automatically get the
condition of the same symbol present into the other map.
Open the map window where it has to be created the new object.
Warning. It is possible to create a NE object into every map window with the exception
of the [WS] and [CSB] windows 83.
2.
3.
Into the IP Address text box, type the IP address to be assigned to the NE.
If the user wants to create a PMP object, he has to type into the IP Address box of the
Proxy interface used for the connection to the desired master station.
Warning. After the NE creation, the value can not be changed.
The IP address set into this box has to CORRESPOND to the IP address of the NE,
locally defined by means of the LCT. If the addresses are not the same ones, it will not
be possible to forward any command to the NE itself.
It is not possible to assign the same value to two different NEs also if they are two
different type ones.
Warning. If into an OpenView map there is already a NE object with the same IP
Address set into the field, the system will automatically point out, into all the other fields
of the Add Equipment window, the values assigned to the same object present into the
other map.
4.
Into the Logical Address text box, type the logic address (alphanumeric string with
maximum 32 characters) to be assigned to the new NE.
Warning. After the creation of the NE, the value can not be changed.
The logic address will be displayed under the symbol of the NE.
129
9.
It is possible to assign, as logic address, the same value assigned to the IP Address
parameter, while it is not possible to assign the same logic address to two NEs.
5.
ONLY if the new NE is inserted into a OSI network 84, activate the Osi Address box
and set the GOSIP (Government OSI Profile) address of the equipment, as pointed
out in the GOSIP address of the SNMP object paragraph.
6.
Into the Type box, select the NE SNMP type to be created among the available ones
(refer to Fig. 9.1).
In the area, there will be present only the types of SNMP NE that can be managed by
ones NMS5UX system.
Warning. After the creation of the NE, such a value can not be changed.
SDH N+1
Radio
AL series
Radio
ADMC
Multiplexer
ELFO
Radio
ADM1
Multiplexer
EXP 63
Multiplexer
US series
Radio
Point MultiPoint
system
ALS series
Radio
IPBOX
equipment
Fig. 9.1
7.
ONLY if the equipment is managed by Proxy Agent and the Siae Proxy Agent
application is installed, select the Proxy Address pushbutton.
At the choice of the pushbutton, the system displays the Proxy Address window.
8.
Type into the Proxy NE IP Address box, the address used by the Proxy Agent to
acknowledge the equipment.
9.
Only if the following parameters are different from the default ones configured by the
system administrator (see manual NMS5UX System Administrator), type in the box:
Spec. Primary Trap Dest. text box, the address of the machine to which the
Proxy Agent forwards the traps coming from the equipment.
Spec. Secondary Trap Dest. text box, the address of an additional machine
to which the Proxy Agent forwards the traps coming from the equipment.
84.
130
The OSI network is a network where it is used, as communication protocol between the network
elements, also the OSI (Open System Interconnection) protocol.
9.
The new symbol is displayed into the New Object Holding Area box of the activated
map. Move the icon on a generic point of the window.
Default
Changeable
number
value
by the user
Yes
Ver (Version)
Auth (Authority)
Reserved
Domain (Routing Domain)
Area
System ID (Network Element Identification)
Sel (Selector)
1
3
2
2
2
6
1
39
Country
Code
82
1D
Part
IDP
DSP
Parameter
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
To change the AFI, IDI, VER, Auth, Domain, Area parameters (default part of the GOSIP
Address):
1.
Press the Setup Default button present into the box of the Add Equipment window.
The system opens the Gosip Default Option window.
2.
To change the AFI, IDI, VER, Auth parameters, type, into the relevant boxes, the value
of the corresponding byte/s.
3.
To change the Domain parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and
select the desired value from the list.
To add a value to the list:
Into the Label box, type a name for the domain under examination.
Into the Hex value boxes, type the values of the bytes that represent the
domain and press OK.
131
9.
4.
To change the Area parameter, press the arrow on the side of the box and select the
desired value into the list.
To add or to remove a value from the list, execute the procedures pointed out for the
Domain parameter.
5.
Press OK.
Press the Settings pushbutton present into the Add Equipment window.
The system opens the Settings window.
2.
Type into the boxes the value of the 6 bytes that compose the System ID and press
OK.
Into the text box on the side of the Settings pushbutton, the system points out the
value of the set System ID.
Open the map window where the user wants to create the new virtual NE object.
Warning. It is possible to create a virtual NE object into every map window with the
exceptions of the [WS] and [CSB] windows 83.
2.
3.
Into the Logical Address text box, type the logic address (alphanumeric string with max.
32 characters) to be assigned to the new virtual NE.
Warning. After the NE creation, such a value can not be changed.
The logic address will be displayed under the symbol of the equipment.
It is not possible to assign the same logic address to two different NEs.
4.
Into the Type box, select the type of the virtual NE managed with the SNMP protocol
to be created among the available ones (refer to Fig. 9.1).
Warning. After the creation of the NE, this value can not be changed.
5.
Select the Additional Info, pushbutton to insert some information relevant to the
created equipment.
The choice of the pushbutton opens the Additional Info window where the user can
insert some information respectively into the Additional info #1, ... #2 e ... #3 boxes.
Press Done to close the window.
132
9.
Into the Comment box, type additional information (max. 500 characters).
The setting of this parameter is not mandatory.
7.
Open the map window where it has to be created the new object.
Warning. It is possible to create a NE object into every map window with the exception
of the [WS] and [CSB] windows 83.
2.
3.
Into the Physical Address text box, type the physical address comprised between 2 and
60000 (the value 1 is not allowed), to be assigned to the new NE.
Warning. After the creation of the NE, the value can not be changed.
Choosing the Auto pushbutton, the system automatically sets as value of the
parameter the first available address. It is possible also to set a value into the Physical
Address field and then to press the Auto pushbutton; in this case, the system will
automatically display the first available address that follows the set value.
The physical address set into this field has to CORRESPOND to the NE address,
locally defined by means of the LOM. If the addresses are not the same one, it will not
be possible to forward any command to the NE itself.
It is not possible to assign the same address to two different NEs also if they are two
different type ones.
Warning. If into an OpenView map there is already a NE object with the same physical
Address set into the field, the system will automatically point out, into all the other fields
of the Add Equipment window, the values assigned to the same object present into the
other map.
4.
Into the Logical Address text box, type the logic address (alphanumeric string with
maximum 32 characters) to be assigned to the new NE.
The logic address will be displayed under the symbol of the equipment.
133
9.
It is possible to assign, as logic address, the same value assigned to the Physical
Address parameter, while it is not possible to assign the same logic address to two
NEs.
Warning. After the creation of the NE, the value can not be changed.
5.
Into the CS/WS Ip Address text box, type the IP address of the Communication Server
Board or of the Workstation to which it is (or it will be) connected the Legacy NE.
The box under examination is equipped with a contextual menu (accessible by means
of the R.H. pushbutton of the mouse) that lists all the addresses of the created WSs
and CSBs, then well known by the system (connected and not connected ones).
The Local Ip Address option corresponds to the address of the local machine where
it is loaded the NMS5UX system. The choice of an address automatically sets the
CS/WS Ip Address box.
Warning. The setting of this parameter is not mandatory but, if it is not set or it is not
correctly set, it will not be possible to forward any command (Connect, Line Test, etc.)
toward the NE under examination.
6.
Into the CS/WS Port text box, type the number of the port of the Communication Server
Board or of the Workstation to which it is (or it will be) connected the NE.
7.
Into the Type box, select the NE type to be created among the available ones (refer
to Fig. 9.2).
In the area, there will be present only the types of Legacy NE that can be managed by
ones NMS5UX system.
Warning. After the creation of the NE, the value can not be changed.
Multiplexer
FAM e
CFAM
Multiplexer
OLTME
Radio serie G
con interfaccia
Legacy
Radio serie B
(Standard)
Fig. 9.2
8.
ONLY if the equipment is managed by Proxy Agent and the Siae Proxy Agent
application is installed, select the Proxy Address pushbutton.
Warning. The Proxy Agent manages only G series Radio equipment with Legacy
interface.
At the choice of the pushbutton, the system displays the Proxy Address window.
9.
Type into the Proxy NE IP Address box, the address used by the Proxy Agent to
acknowledge the equipment.
10. Only if the following parameters are different from the default ones configured by the
system administrator (see manual NMS5UX System Administrator), type in the box:
134
Spec. Primary Trap Dest. text box, the address of the machine to which the
Proxy Agent forwards the traps coming from the equipment.
9.
Spec. Secondary Trap Dest. text box, the address of an additional machine
to which the Proxy Agent forwards the traps coming from the equipment.
Open the map window where it has to be created the new object.
Warning. It is possible to create a NE object into every map window with the exception
of the [WS] and [CSB] windows 83.
2.
Open the Add Network Element Legacy Protocol Managed (Virtual) menu.
Warning. The subject command is present into the menu only if the software modules
for the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
The system displays the Add Virtual Equipment window.
3.
Into the Logical Address text box, type the logic address (alphanumeric string with max.
32 characters) to be assigned to the new virtual NE.
The value will be displayed under the symbol of the equipment.
It is not possible to assign the same logic address to two different NEs.
Warning. After the creation of the NE, this value can not be changed.
4.
Into the Type box, select the type of the virtual NE managed with the Legacy protocol
to be created among the available ones (refer to Fig. 9.2).
Warning. After the creation of the NE, this value can not be changed.
5.
Select the Additional Info pushbutton to insert some information relevant to the
created equipment.
The choice of the pushbutton opens the Additional Info window where the user can
insert some information respectively into the Additional info #1, ... #2 e ... #3 boxes.
Press Done to close the window.
The setting of this parameter is not mandatory.
6.
Into the Comment box, type additional information (max. 500 characters).
The setting of this parameter is not mandatory.
7.
135
9.
The new symbol is displayed into the New Object Holding Area box of the activated
map window. Move the icon on a generic point of the window.
9.1.3
Open the map window where it has to be created the new Radio Link object.
Warning. It is possible to create every type of Radio Link object into every map window
with the exception of the [WS] and [CSB] windows 83.
2.
Select the two NE objects of the same type (for instance two SDH radio objects or two
PDH radio ones) between which the connection has to be traced.
Warning. If the user selects one object only or more than two ones, the option is not
available.
3.
4.
Into the Label text box, type the name to be assigned to the connection (alphanumeric
string composed by a minimum of 1 character and a maximum of 30 ones).
It is possible to assign the same label to more connections also if they are connections
of different type.
The setting of this attribute is not a mandatory one.
5.
Into the Connection Type area, select the line type (broken line, dot line, etc.) to be
connected to the link.
6.
Into the Comment area, type possible information (500 character maximum).
The setting of this parameter is not a mandatory one.
7.
9.1.4
Add LegacyWorkstation
This command allows creating a Workstation (WS) object, as it is described here below:
1.
136
9.
2.
3.
Into the IP Address text box, type the IP address of the Workstation.
Warning. After the creation of the WS, this value can not be changed.
It is not possible to assign the same IP Address to two different Workstations.
Warning. If into an OpenView map there is already a WS object with the same IP
Address set into the field, the system will automatically point out, into all the other fields
of the Add Workstation window, the values assigned to the same object present into
the other map.
4.
Into the Name text box, type the name to be assigned to the object (alphanumeric string
with a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 30 characters).
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different Workstations.
The name will be displayed under the object symbol and it will constitute the name of
the [WS] map window that is opened at the double selection of the symbol.
5.
Define the total number of the serial ports equipped with the Workstation moving the
cursor Number of Serial Ports: along the horizontal bar.
For each different position of the cursor, the system displays a different number of
ports. It can be set a value between 1 and 100 (default value 8).
Warning. After the creation of the WS, this value can not be changed.
6.
Into the Comment box, type possible information relevant to the WS (max 500
characters). The setting of this parameter is not mandatory.
7.
Warning. A WS is not automatically managed by the NMS5UX system at the creation of the
relevant object, but it is necessary to forward a connection command (refer to paragraphs 6.1
and 16.10.1).
The only exception is if the created WS is already present into a OpenView map in connected
status; in this case, the WS, just after its connection, acquires the condition of the same symbol
present into the other map.
85.
Warning. During the creation of the first WS, if the operator types, into the Name box, the name
of the WS (assigned by the System Administrator root), the supervisory system automatically
sets the relevant value into the IP Address field.
The name IP address correspondance is obtained by the etc/hosts file.
137
9.
9.1.5
This command allows creating a Communication Server Board object (CSB), as described here
below:
1.
Open the map window it has to be created the new CSB object.
Warning. It is possible to create a CSB object into every map window with the exception
of the [WS] and [CSB] windows 83.
It is advisable to create the CSB objects into the Communication Server container map
window.
2.
3.
Into the IP Address text box, type the IP address of the CSB.
Warning. After the creation of the CSB, the IP address can not be changed.
It is not possible to assign the same IP Address to two different CSBs 86.
The IP Address will be displayed under the object symbol and it will constitute the name
of the map window that is opened at the double selection of the symbol.
Warning. If into an OpenView map there is already a CSB object with the same IP
Address set into the field, the system will automatically point out, into all the other fields
of the Add CS Board window, the values assigned to the same object present into the
other map.
4.
ONLY if the new object refers to a CommServerS inserted into an OSI network 84,
activate the Osi Address box and set the GOSIP address (Government OSI Profile)
of the equipment, as it is pointed out into the paragraph GOSIP address of the SNMP
object (refer to paragraph 9.1.2.1).
5.
Into the Comment box, type additional information (max. 500 characters).
The setting of this parameter is not mandatory.
6.
Warning. A CSB is not automatically managed by the NMS5UX system at the creation of the
relevant object, but it is necessary to forward a connection command (refer to paragraphs 6.1
and 16.9.1).
The only exception is if the created CSB is already present into a OpenView map in connected
status; in this case, the CSB, just after its connection, acquires the condition of the same symbol
present into the other map.
86.
138
For the CommServerF equipment, it is not possible to assign the same address to two different
CS Boards, also if they have been inserted into different CommServerF ones.
9.
9.2
MODIFY/VIEW
System access
User profile
The Modify/View command allows displaying and possibly changing the values of the
parameters relevant to the selected object.
Warning. If the same object has been created into two different maps, at the changing of the
parameter values of such an object into a map, the system automatically CHANGES the values
of the parameters relevant to the same object into the other map.
The choice of the Modify/View command opens a menu where there are the following options:
Container, Network Element, Radio Link for Scoreboards 80, LegacyWorkstation,
Communication Server Board, that are described into the following paragraphs.
Warning. The values of some parameters can nor be changed. If the operator has to change
such parameters, it is advisable to remove the object and then to create it again assigning the
new values to the parameters.
9.2.1
Modify/View Container
This command allows displaying/changing the parameters of the selected Container object, as
described here below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
139
9.
9.2.2
2.
3.
NE managed with the SNMP protocol, it is always possible to change the Proxy
Address, Comment parameters while the Osi Address parameter can be changed
ONLY if the NE is in disconnected status (brown icon).
Warning. It is not possible to change the Ip Address, Logical Address, Type
parameters.
The description and the setting mode of the parameters are the same ones
pointed out at paragraph 9.1.2.1.
4.
140
9.
9.2.3
2.
3.
4.
9.2.4
Modify/View LegacyWorkstation
This command allows displaying/changing the parameters relevant to the selected Workstation
object, as described here below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
9.2.5
141
9.
1.
2.
3.
It is always possible to change the Comment parameter, while the Osi Address
parameter can be changed ONLY if the CS Board (CommServerS) is in disconnected
status (brown icon).
The description and the setting mode of the parameters are the same ones pointed out
at paragraph 9.1.5.
Warning. It is not possible to change the IP Address parameter.
The Edition parameter points out the edition number of the firmware that manages the
CS Board. This value is spontaneously forwarded by the equipment controller during
the first connection. It is not possible to change it.
4.
142
9.
9.3
DELETE
System access
User profile
ReadWrite
Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
9.3.1
Delete Container
9.3.2
The command under examination deletes the selected Network Element object.
At its choice, the system displays a confirmation window. Choose the OK pushbutton to
execute the operation.
The operator can executed the subject operation also pressing the R.H. side pushbutton of the
mouse and selecting the SIAE Delete command.
Warning. If the NE object is present into a single map, it is possible to delete it only if it is in
disconnected status (brown icon).
On the contrary, if the same NE is present into more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol
also if it is in connected status, with the exception of the last copy for which it is applicable the
above pointed out rule: it can be deleted only if it is in disconnected status.
143
9.
9.3.3
9.3.4
Delete LegacyWorkstation
The command under examination deletes the selected Workstation (WS) object.
At its choice, the system displays a confirmation window. Choose the OK pushbutton to
execute the operation.
Warning. The subject command is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
Warning. If the WS object is present into a single map, it is possible to delete it only if it is in
disconnected status (brown icon) and if into the [WS] map window (that is opened after the
double selection of the symbol) there are not WS Port object in open status (green icon).
On the contrary, if the same WS is present into more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol
also if it is in connected status and if, into the [WS] window, there are WS Port in open status,
with the exception of the last copy for which it is applicable the above pointed out rule: it can
be deleted the WS only if it is in disconnected status and if there are not, into the [WS] window,
WS Port objects in open status.
9.3.5
The command under examination deletes the selected Communication Server Board (CSB)
object.
At its choice, the system displays a confirmation window. Choose the OK pushbutton to
execute the operation.
Warning. If the CSB object is present into a single map, it is possible to delete it only if it is in
disconnected status (brown icon) and if into the map window (that is opened after the double
selection of the symbol) there are not CSB Port object in open status (green icon).
144
9.
On the contrary, if the same CSB is present into more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol
also if it is in connected status and if, into the window, there are CSB Port in open status, with
the exception of the last copy for which it is applicable the above pointed out rule: it can be
deleted the CSB only if it is in disconnected status and if there are not, into the CSB window,
CSB Port objects in open status.
145
9.
9.4
ARRANGE SYMBOLS
System access
User profile
ReadWrite
Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
9.4.1
The subject command allows aligning horizontally the symbols selected into the map window
as it is described here below:
1.
2.
9.4.2
The subject command allows aligning vertically the symbols selected into the map window as
it is described here below:
1.
2.
146
9.
9.5
MAP REALIGNMENT
System access
User profile
ReadWrite
Superuser, Privileged
to create, into the currently open map, the copy of a NE, WS or CBS object present
into another map (refer to paragraph 9.5.1).
to check the Network Element, Workstation and Communication Server Board objects
present into the open map and that do not have any other copy into another map.
9.5.1
To create, into the open map, the copy of a NE, WS or CBS object
present into another map
1.
Into the map window, select the container where the object has to be created.
2.
3.
4.
Open the popup menu and select the map that contains the object to be created into
the currently open map.
5.
Press OK.
Into the Map Realignment window (refer to Fig. 9.3), the system displays the name of
the map selected by the user, and into the lower Equipment, Workstations, C.S. Boards
areas, it points out the equipment present into the selected map but that are not present
into the currently open map.
6.
7.
8.
147
9.
Menu bar
(1)
Name of the
map selected
by the user
Fig. 9.3
148
9.
9.5.2
Into the menu bar relevant to the Map Realignment window, the system provides the menus and
the commands described here below.
Refresh Info. It executes a new reading of the database and updates the information
present into the window.
"
Select Map.It allows selecting the map for which the user wants to display the CNE, WS,
CSB objects into the Map Realignment window.
Warning. Into the Map Realignment window, the system displays only the equipment
present into the selected map but that are not present into the currently open one.
149
9.
9.6
System access
User profile
ReadWrite
Superuser, Privileged, Advanced, Normal, Entry
150
10
10.
PERFORMANCE SIAE
PERFORMANCE
151
10.
10.1
System access
User profile
The Performance Monitoring Read option executes a new reading of the results concerning
the PM measurements relevant to the selected equipment.
At its choice, the system forwards an updating request of the results directly to the controller
of the selected equipment.
The system points out the end of the operation through a message that reports the result of the
operation itself.
Warning. The system forwards the request only if the selected NE is in connected status.
152
10.
10.2
PERFORMANCE MONITORING
System access
User profile
The Performance Monitoring option displays the results of the PM measurements 87 relevant
to the selected Network Element.
With details, the choice of this option allows the following operations:
D
to check the results of the PM measurements subdivided into daily records (24 hours)
88 and for each record, to check the values of the control parameters (refer to
paragraph 10.2.1).
to check the results of the PM measurements subdivided into primary records (15
minutes) and for each record, to check the values of the control parameters (refer to
paragraph 10.2.2).
Warning. This option is available only if it has been selected a real Network Element 89. If the
type of the selected NE does not support PM measurements, the system will display a warning
message.
Into the map window, select the NE for which the user wants to check the PM
measurements.
2.
87.
The PM measurements change according to the type of the selected NE. Their description is
reported into the equipment user Manual relevant to the type of the NE under examination (refer
to paragraph 1.3.3).
88.
The NMS5UX system allows displaying the results of the PM measurements subdivided into daily
records or primary ones. More detailed information concerning the Performance Monitoring
measurements, the observation period and the daily and primary records are reported into the
paragraph 7.2.
89.
153
10.
3.
Set into the Date Reference and Day previous boxes 90 the desired values.
Warning. Into the Graphic Performance Monitoring window, the system can display at
maximum the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting from the current day)
91.
4.
5.
The user has to activate the box if he wants that, at the selection of a control
parameter relevant to the measurement point, the system automatically selects
also the other control parameters that are compatible with the measuring unit of
the selected option (refer to step 7.).
The user has to deactivate the box if he wants that, at the selection of a control
parameter, the system automatically does not select any other parameter.
6.
7.
Select the control parameters for which the system has to display the results of the PM
measurements.
Warning. Into the same diagram, it is not possible to display all the control parameters
of a TP. Such parameters have been subdivided according to the measurement unit
used for their counting: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc.
The system displays the Graphic Performance Monitoring window shown by Fig. 10.1.
When the user selects a parameter, the name of the relevant TP changes its color: it
turns from orange to red. While the selected control parameter is characterized by a
small ball placed on its L.H. side.
When the user has selected a control parameter, he can select all the parameters that
have the same measuring unit present on the same TP or into every one of the other
TPs.
The control parameters that do not have the same measuring unit of the selected
parameter will not be available (wording with grey color).
Warning. To be able to display the results of parameters with measuring units
different from the one of the currently selected, it is necessary to deselect all
the control parameters (refer to Option Deselect all TPC para. 10.2.1.1) and
then select newly the new parameters.
90.
91.
The results of the PM measurements are memorized into the system database (Performance
Monitoring table). Such results remain available for a period of 6 months and after that the system
automatically removes them.
92.
154
10.
Characteristics
relevant to the
equipment, to the
selected time
range and to the
drawing (1)
Menu bar
(2)
Characteristics of the
selected control parameters
and relevant to the record
over which it has been
positioned the mouse (5)
Characteristics of
the records (4)
Fig. 10.1
155
10.
red, it means that the pointed out value is higher than the threshold value set for the
specific parameter.
yellow, it means that the pointed out value is lower than the threshold value.
white, it means that, for the parameter coupled with the value, it has not set a threshold
value (not active threshold).
156
10.
File menu
"
Option menu
"
"
Thresholds. It displays into the diagram a hatched line that represents the threshold value
of each selected control parameter. Each hatched line will have the same color that
represents the parameter into the diagram.
"
93.
The control parameters changes according to the TP. Their description is reported into the
equipment user Manual relevant to the NE type involved by the measurement.
157
10.
Help menu
"
Into the map window, select the NE with the PM measurements to be checked.
2.
Open the Graphic Performance Monitoring window following the procedure described
at paragraph 10.2.1.
3.
Position the mouse on the record of the day relevant to the primary records to be
displayed and then, click quickly twice on it.
The system displays the Graphic Performance Monitoring window.
Into such a window, the user can check the result of the PM measurements for all the
primary records relevant to the chosen day.
The window elements and their description are the same ones shown in Fig. 10.1.
To return to the displaying of the primary records, click quickly twice on a generic point of the
window.
158
10.
10.3
System access
User profile
The Old Performance Monitoring command allows displaying the results of the Performance
Monitoring (PM) measurements present into the Old Performance Monitoring table relevant to
the selected Network Element.
Into the Graphic Performance Monitoring OLD table, the system stores the results of the PM
measurements saved with the Pm backup command (refer to paragraph 15.4) and restored by
means of the Pm restore command (refer to paragraph 15.5).
With details, the choice of this option allows the following operations:
D
to check the results of the PM measurements subdivided into daily records (24 hours)
present into the Old Performance Monitoring table (refer to paragraph 10.3.1).
to check the results of the PM measurements subdivided into primary records (15
minutes) present into the Old Performance Monitoring table (refer to para. 10.3.2).
Warning. The Old Performance Monitoring command is available only if it has been selected
a real Network Element 89.
If the selected type of NE does not support PM measurements, the system will display a warning
message.
Into the map window, select the NE for which the user wants to check the PM
measurements.
2.
3.
159
10.
Warning. If at the window opening the table is empty, it is necessary to recover, from
the backup file saved before, the list of the desired measurements (refer to paragraph
15.5).
Such measurements will remain available into the Old Performance Monitoring table
and into the Graphic Performance Monitoring OLD window, until when the system
will recover a different list of measurements.
Into the map window, select the NE with the PM measurements to be checked.
2.
Open the Graphic Performance Monitoring OLD window following the procedure
described at paragraph 10.3.1.
3.
Position the mouse on the record of the day relevant to the primary records to be
displayed and then, click quickly twice on it.
The system displays a new Graphic Performance Monitoring OLD window.
Into such a window, the user can check the result of the PM measurements for all the
primary records relevant to the chosen day.
The window elements and their description are the same ones shown in Fig. 10.1.
To return to the displaying of the primary records, click quickly twice on a generic point of the
window.
160
10.
10.4
System access
User profile
The Export Performance Monitoring command allows saving on file the results of the
Performance Monitoring (PM) measurements of all the selected Network Elements.
Then, during the operation, it is possible to forward the file to a user, via email.
Warning. The command is available only if it has been selected one or more real Network
Elements 89 of the same type.
Into the map window, select one or more real Network Elements of the same type.
2.
3.
Position the mouse cursor into the TPclass area and press the mouse R.H.
pushbutton.
The system displays the list of the measurements foreseen for the selected type of NE.
4.
5.
Choose one or more measuring points for which the results of the PM measurements
have to be saved on file. It is possible to select more records.
6.
7.
Daily pushbutton, it allows saving on file the daily records relevant to the selected
measuring point/s.
Set the date (into the Date boxes) and the time (into the Time boxes) respectively for
the starting (Start Date Time box) and for the ending (Stop Date Time box) of the time
for which the results of the PM measurements have to be saved.
The supervisory system has at disposal the results of the PM measurements relevant
to the last 180 days (6 months).
8.
Type the file name, for which the operator wants to save the data, into the File Name
box.
161
10.
The system provides a default name composed by specific information, such as, for
instance, the date, the time, the NE logic address. The format of the provided default
name can be changed by the user with Superuser profile.
Warning. The file is saved into the directory opt/nms5ux/ExportPM/ (the setting can not
be changed).
9.
ONLY if the user wants to forward the file to another user, it is necessary to set the
name of the user into the Remote Access box.
If the user positions the mouse cursor on the text box and press the mouse R.H.
pushbutton, the system displays a predefined list of users 94.
In this case, the file will be as saved into the predefined directory as forwarded to the
set user.
94.
The predefined list of users has to be set and later it can be changed by the user with Superuser
profile.
Warning. to be able to forward the file, the system administrator has to configure properly the mail
server.
162
10.
10.5
VIEW/MODIFY PM STATUS
System access
User profile
The View/Modify PM Status command displays the list of the Performance Monitoring (PM)
measurement points that characterize the selected type of equipment 95.
For each measurement point, the system points out the functioning status of the relevant
measurement (activated, deactivated).
At the choice of this option, the system displays the View/Modify PM Status window shown in
Fig. 10.2.
Through the options present into the window, the user can execute the following operations:
95.
to activate at the same time one or more PM measurements for one or more NEs of
the same type, chosen among the ones selected into the map window (refer to
paragraph 10.5.1.2).
to deactivate at the same time one or more PM measurements for one or more NEs
of the same type, chosen among the ones selected into the map window (refer to
paragraph 10.5.1.2).
If it has been selected more NE objects, the system points out the PM measurements relevant to
the first type of selected NE. For instance, if it has been orderly selected a SDH type NE, a FAM
type NE and a PDH type NE, at the choice of the option under examination, the system displays
the PM measurements that characterize the SDH equipment.
163
10.
Menu
bar (3)
Fig. 10.2
164
10.
All Equipment pushbutton, to display into the Termination Point area, the measurement
points relevant to all the equipment.
Selected Equipment pushbutton, to display into the Termination Point area, the
measurement points relevant to the selected equipment only. This pushbutton is
available only after having selected at least one equipment.
S Termination Point Class area, the system points out the measurement types relevant to the
equipment type selected into the map window. Select the following pushbuttons:
All TP Class pushbutton, to display into the Termination Point area, the measurement
points relevant to all the measurement types.
Selected TP Class pushbutton, to display into the Termination Point area, the
measurement points relevant to the selected measurement types only. This
pushbutton is available only after having selected at least one measurement type.
S Termination Point Instances area, the system points out the status of the measurement point.
Activate the following boxes:
Running Counters box, to display into the Termination Point area, the activated
measurement points.
Not Running Counters box, to display into the Termination Point area, the deactivated
measurement points.
(2) Foe each measurement point, the system points out the following data:
S Logical Addr., equipment logic address.
S TP Class, name of the measurement type.
S TP Instance, name of the measurement point.
S Status, measurement status: activated (Running wording), deactivated (Not running wording).
(3) the description of the menus and of the relevant options is reported at paragraph 10.5.1.
165
10.
"
"
166
Start. It activates the PM measurements. The choice of this option opens a submenu that
contains the following options:
All, it activates all the PM measurements relevant to all the equipment selected
into the map window.
Stop. It deactivates the PM measurements. The choice of this option opens a submenu
that contains the following options:
All, it deactivates all the PM measurements relevant to all the equipment selected
into the map window.
Refresh Info. It executes a new reading of the database and it updates the information
present into the window.
11
11.
Equipment Info, it displays the characteristics and the functional status of the
selected Network Element.
Radio Certificate, it allows recording (saving on file and/or printing) the data relevant
to the equipment.
Warning. This option is available only for Radio SDH, Radio PDH, Radio PDHAL, G
series Radio, ELFO, SDH N+1, ALS.
Legacy Hw/Sw Edition Inventory, it displays the list of the objects 96, relevant to
the Network Elements managed with Legacy protocol, known by the NMS5UX
system present into the open map.
For each object, it is reported the version of the hardware and of the software/firmware
Warning. The subject command is present into the menu only if the software modules
for the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
Legacy Physical Unit Inventory, it displays the list of the objects 96 relevant to the
Network Elements managed with Legacy protocol, known by the NMS5UX system
present into the open map.
For each object, it is possible to change the identification code.
Warning. The subject command is present into the menu only if the software modules
for the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
SNMP Software Inventory, it displays the list of the NEs, the characteristics of the
sw/fw present into each equipment and the list of the units, relevant to each equipment,
that contain a controller or a programmable logic unit (FPGA).
Warning. This command is available only for the equipment managed with SNMP
protocol.
96.
Legacy Alarm Average, it allows checking the average number of the alarms for
second received by the NMS5UX system, such a check is executed by the equipment
managed with Legacy protocol.
Each Network Element is seen by the supervisory system as an assembly of objects that
represent one or more physical parts of the NE itself.
More detailled informartion concerning the objects that characterize each single type of Network
Element are reported into the relevant equipment Manual (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
167
11.
Warning. The subject command is present into the menu only if the software modules
for the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
168
11.
11.1
EQUIPMENT INFO
System access
User profile
The Equipment Info command allows displaying the characteristics and the functional status
of the selected Network Element.
The operator can execute the subject operation also pressing the R.H. side pushbutton of the
mouse and choosing the SIAE Eq. Info command.
Warning. The command is not available if it has been selected a workstation or a communication
server board.
If the user selects more Network Element symbols and chooses the command under
examination, the system opens more Equipment Info/Find:... windows, one for each selected
NE.
Date/Time. Date and time when the window has been open or refreshed (by means of the
Refresh command choice).
"
"
"
"
Ws Name, Board, Port, Status. Respectively Workstation name (WS), IP Address of the
Communication Server Board (CSB) or of the WS and number of the port to which it is
connected the NE. Into the Status boxes, it is pointed out the connection status of the
CSB/WS and of the serial port.
Warning. These information are available and meaningful only for NEs managed with the
Legacy protocol.
"
Equipment status. The status of the connection between the NE and the supervisory
system.
For the description of the statuses, refer to paragraph 6.4.
"
169
11.
It is pointed out the seriousness level of the alarm present into the NE. If there are more
alarms with different seriousness levels, the system will point out the level relevant to the
most serious alarm.
"
LCT Presence. Status of the connection between the Local Craft Terminal (LCT) program
and the NE. The value:
D
LCT Absent points out that the LCT user is not currently connected with the equipment.
LCT Present (readwrite) points out that the LCT user is connected with the equipment
in Configuration mode.
LCT Present (readonly) points out that the LCT user is connected with the equipment
in Monitoring mode.
Enabled it points out that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment
as in Configuration mode as in Monitoring one.
Disabled it points out that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment
in Monitoring mode only.
This parameter is available and meaningful only for the NEs managed with the SNMP
protocol.
For more detailed information refer to paragraph 6.5.3.
"
Active points out that there is at least one not acknowledged alarm (current and/or
into the alarm history).
To acknowledge an alarm, refer to the paragraphs 12.1.2.2 and 12.2.2.2.
D
"
Cleared points out that all the possible alarms are acknowledged.
LCT Presence not ack. Acknowledging status of the LCT Present signal of the NE. The
wording:
D
Active points out that, from the last time that it has been opened the Equipment window
for the NE under examination, the LCT program has been connected to the NE at least
one time in Configuration mode.
To acknowledge the LCT Presence signal, open the Equipment window.
Cleared points out that, indicate from the last time that it has been opened the
Equipment window, the LCT has not been connected in Configuration mode.
"
Current alarms. The number of the current alarms present into the NE.
"
Alarm history. The number of alarm signals, relevant to the NE, stored into the alarm
history. Into the box:
170
11.
D
"
NAck, the system points out the number of not acknowledged signals.
If a parameter has been disabled, it means that it is not available because it is not a meaningful
one for the status and/or for the NE type to which it is referred the window.
Warning. The information pointed out into the window correspond to the characteristics
and to the functional status of the NE when it is selected the command.
to refresh the information, choose the Refresh pushbutton (refer to paragraph 11.1.2).
No one parameter present into the Equipment Info/Find window can be changed with the
exception of the Remark field.
"
"
Clear. It is not available into the subject context (refer to paragraph 12.2).
"
Refresh. It executes a new reading of the database and it refreshes the information present
into the window.
At the choice of the pushbutton, the system refreshes the date/time (refer to paragraph
11.1.1) and it will point out the time of the refresh execution.
"
2.
Choose the page orientation selecting the Landscape or Portrait option pushbutton.
3.
Into the Printer Name box, the system automatically sets the default printer (Default
Printer). If the user wants to address the printing operation on another peripheral unit,
he has to type into the box the name of the printer to be used.
4.
171
11.
The printing format use to print the information corresponds to the one used to display
them.
To save the information in a file:
1.
2.
Into the File Name box, type the path and the file name where the user wants to save
the information. If the user types only the file name, it will be saved into the
homedirectory of the user that has locally opened the graphical interface of the
NMS5UX system.
3.
"
172
11.
11.2
RADIO CERTIFICATE
System access
User profile
The Radio Certificate option allows recording the data relevant to the selected equipment.
At the option selection, the system displays the EqpInfoPage window that points out all the
characteristics of the terminal.
To record the equipment, type the relevant characteristic into the proper boxes and then choose
Save.
Warning. The Save pushbutton is available only for the user with Superuser, Privileged and
Advanced profile.
It is possible to save the certificate on a file (selecting the Print to File option) or to print it
(selecting the Print to Printer option).
Warning. This command is available only for Radio SDH, Radio PDH, Radio PDHAL, G
series Radio, ELFO, SDH N+1, ALS.
173
11.
11.3
System access
User profile
The Legacy Hw/Sw Edition Inventory command displays the version of the hardware and
of the software/firmware of the objects 96 relevant to the Network Elements known by the
NMS5UX system present into the currently open map.
Warning. The subject command is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
Warning. Into the Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window, that is displayed at the command choice,
the system displays only the objects relevant to NEs managed with Legacy protocol.
The Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window is composed by a table where there is the list of the
objects, by the menu bar and by a lower status bar. All these elements are described into the
following paragraphs.
Using the command present into the window, it is possible to execute the following operations:
D
Equipment. It points out the NE type, managed with Legacy protocol, that contains the
object.
"
Address. It points out the logic address of the NE that contains the object.
"
"
Slot. It points out the topologic position of the object inside the NE, pointed out by a letter
and eventually by a number. Some objects are not provided with such an information.
"
Hw/Sw Edition. It points out the edition number of the hardware and of the
software/firmware relevant to the physical unit coupled with the object to which it is referred
the record.
Warning. The information present into the table correspond to the characteristics of the objects
at the selection of the command.
174
11.
Print/Save. It prints or saves on a file the information. The choice of the subject command
opens a submenu that contains the following options:
Filtered Items, it prints/saves the list of the displayed records. If there are not
activated filters, the displayed records correspond to the ones stored into the
database.
Selected Items, it prints/saves the record range pointed out by means of the
mouse. This command is available only if it has been selected at least one record.
The choice of every command opens the Output Device Selection window. The using
modes of the window are pointed out at paragraph 11.1.2.
"
Set Filter. It opens the Set Filter window that allows filtering and ordering the list.
the filtering operation consist on detecting one or more criteria in such a way that the
system displays only the records that comply with all the specified criteria. The ordering
operation consists on detecting the order that has to be used for the record displaying.
To filter and/or to order the data into a list, it is necessary to click on one or more boxes
present into the window, according to the criteria to be used. The activation of each box
expands the window displaying a section that contains the following options:
D
Match Object Type box. In this section it is possible to set, as filter, a specific object
of a NE executing the following procedure:
a.
b.
Match Address box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, one or more NE logic
addresses, executing the following procedure:
Type the NE address into the text box and choose the Add pushbutton 97. The system
inserts the value into the area placed under the Match Address box.
175
11.
The user can delete from the list a single option choosing, after having selected such
an option, the Remove pushbutton or he can delete all the options at the same time
choosing the Remove All pushbutton.
D
Match Edition box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the edition of the
hardware and/or of the software/firmware (sw/fw) of the unit, executing the following
procedure:
Type into the first text box (max 2 numbers) the edition number of the hardware and/or
type into the remaining 3 boxes (placed under the symbol /) the edition number (max.
2 characters for each box) of the sw/fw.
To execute a general search, use the wild character asterisk (*).
The value 0/0.0.0 points out that the edition of the hardware and/or of the
software/firmware (sw/fw) relevant to the unit under examination is unknown.
Match unit code box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, one or more
identification codes of the unit or of the NE part to which corresponds the object.
The setting mode of the filter is the same one described for the Match Address criterion.
Sort by box. In this section, it is possible to order the records with respect to the
parameters: Address, Unit Code, Hw Edition, Object Name, Sw Edition.
The field description is the same one pointed out at paragraph 11.3.1.
To set the ordering criterion, activate the desired option pushbutton.
After having set the criteria, press the OK pushbutton (the system executes the filtering
and/or ordering command and closes the window) or the Apply one (the system executes
the command but it does not close the window).
The system will display, into the Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window, only the records that
comply with all the activated options.
Every time that the system filters the list, it considers all the records, as the displayed
records as the hidden ones.
Into the window, there are also the Clear pushbutton (it removes the activation of all the
filters and displays the complete list of the records), the Cancel pushbutton (it closes the
window and does not execute the command) and the Help pushbutton (it opens the online
manual).
Warning. When the system closes the Physical Unit Inventory window, the possible
activation of the filters is automatically removed.
"
Refresh Info. It executes a new reading of the database and it refreshes the information
present into the window.
At the command choice, the date/time (refer to paragraph 11.3.3) is refreshed and it will
point out the refreshing time.
97.
It is possible to use the wild character asterisk (*). For instance typing into the text box:
S12 the system will display, into the Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window, the NE with address
12.
S12* the system will display the NEs with the address that begins with 12 (12, 120, 121, etc.).
S1*2 the system will display the NEs with the address that begins with 1 and ends with 2 (12,
102, 112, etc.).
176
11.
the date and the time when it has been opened or refreshed (by means of the choice
of the Refresh Info command refer to paragraph 11.3.2.2) the window.
177
11.
11.4
System access
User profile
The Legacy Physical Unit Inventory command displays the list of the objects 96 relevant to
the Network Elements known by the NMS5UX system into the actually open map and it allows
changing the identification code assigned to each single object.
Warning. The subject command is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
Warning. Into the Physical Unit Inventory window, displayed at the command choice, the system
points out only the objects relevant to the Network Elements managed with the Legacy
protocol.
The Physical Unit Inventory window is composed by a table that lists the objects, by a menu bar
and by a lower status bar. All these elements are described into the following paragraphs.
By means of the commands present into the window, the user can execute the following
operations:
D
Equipment. It points out the type of NE, managed with the Legacy protocol, where there
id the object.
"
Address. It points out the logic address of the NE where there is the object.
"
"
Slot. It points out the topologic position of the object inside the NE, pointed out by a letter
and eventually by a number. Some objects are not provided with such an information.
"
Unit Code. It points out the identification code assigned by the manufacturing company
(siae microelettronica) to the unit or to the NE part to which corresponds the object.
Warning. The information present into the table correspond to the characteristics of the objects
present at the command selection.
178
11.
Print/Save. It prints or saves on a file the information present into the window.
The using modes of the command are pointed out at the paragraph 11.3.2.1.
"
Set Unit Code. It opens the Set Unit Code window where it is possible to change the
identification code coupled with each single object, executing the following procedure:
a.
Open the Equipment Type option menu and choose the type of the NE to which
belongs the object.
b.
Open the Object Type option menu and choose the object.
c.
Into the Unit Code text box, type the identification code of the object.
If after having changed the code, the user wants to reset the preceding one, it is
sufficient to press the Default pushbutton.
d.
Set Filter. It opens the Set Filter window that allows filtering and/or ordering the list.
The setting modes of the filters and/or the ordering criteria present into the window are the
same ones described at paragraph 11.3.2.2.
"
Refresh Info. It executes a new reading of the database and refreshes the information
present into the window.
At the command choice, the date/time (refer to paragraph 11.4.3) is refreshed and it will
point out the refreshing time.
179
11.
180
the date and the time when it has been opened or refreshed (by means of the choice
of the Refresh Info command refer to paragraph 11.4.2.3) the window.
11.
11.5
System access
User profile
the list of the NEs managed with SNMP protocol and the characteristics of the sw/fw
present into each equipment 98.
the list of the units, present into every NE managed with SNMP protocol 98, that contain
a controller or a programmable logic unit (FPGA).
The lists (equipment and units) are not displayed at the same time into the Snmp NE Software
Inventory window (that is displayed at the choice of the option). The system displays such lists
one as an alternative to the other one according to the selected option pushbutton.
In fact, into the Snmp NE Software Inventory window, under the menu bar, there are the following
pushbuttons:
D
NE Software Inventory. Its choice displays, into the Snmp NE Software Inventory
window, the list of the NEs managed with SNMP protocol. The description of the
information available for each NE are pointed out at paragraph 11.5.1.
Unit Software Inventory. Its choice displays, into the Snmp NE Software Inventory
window, the list of the units. The description of the information available for each unit
are pointed out at paragraph 11.5.2.
98.
181
11.
"
"
"
Status. Status of the connection between the equipment and the supervisory system:
Connected, Disconnected, Unreachable.
For the description of the statuses, refer to paragraph 6.4.
"
Release Bench 1. Name of the file and version of the equipment sw/fw present on the
memory bench 1.
"
Bench 1 Status. Functioning status of the memory bench 1. With details the wording:
running points out that it is on progress the sw/fw of the involved memory bench.
loaded points out that the sw/fw is present into the memory bench but it is not
currently on progress (standby).
not loaded points out that the sw/fw is not present into the memory bench.
downloading points out that it is on progress the updating of the sw/fw relevant to
the memory bench.
"
Release Bench 2. Name of the file and version of the equipment sw/fw present on the
memory bench 2.
"
Bench 2 Status. Functioning status of the memory bench 2. The details of the wordings
are the same already described for the Bench 1 Status parameter.
Warning. The system does not automatically update the information present into the table.
Logical Addr. Logic address of the equipment that contains the unit.
"
Type. Equipment type that contains the unit: Radio SDH, Radio PDH, Workstation, etc.
"
182
11.
"
Status. Status of the connection between the equipment that contains the unit and the
supervisory system: Connected, Disconnected, Unreachable.
For the description of the statuses, refer to paragraph 6.4.
"
"
Element. Name of the element, where it is uploaded the sw/fw, present into the unit:
controller, programmable logic unit, etc.
"
Actual Release. Name of the file and version of the equipment sw/fw present into the
element.
Warning. The system does not automatically update the information present into the table.
Print/Save. It prints or saves into a file the information. The choice of this command opens
a submenu that contains the following options:
All items, it prints/saves the list of all the records memorised into the database.
Filtered Items, it prints/saves the list of the displayed records. If there are not
some activated filters, the displayed records corresponds to the ones memorised
into the database.
Selected Items, it prints/saves the range of the records highlighted through the
mouse. This command is available only if it has been selected at least one record.
The choice of every command opens the Output Device Selection window. The using
modes of the window are pointed out at paragraph 11.1.2.
"
Open Equipment. It opens the Equipment window (refer to paragraph 2.1.2) relevant to
the selected type of equipment.
183
11.
At the command selection, the system can display a message. The description of the
Equipment window and of the messages that can be displayed at its opening are reported
into the specific equipment Manual (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
The Equipment window can be opened also clicking quickly twice on the record of the
equipment.
Warning. This command is available only if into the Snmp NE Software Inventory
window it has been activated the NE Software Inventory pushbutton.
"
Equipment Info. it opens the Equipment Info/Find window that displays the characteristics
and the operating status of the selected equipment.
If the user selects two or more records, he can open the relevant Equipment Info/Find
windows at the same time.
The description of the Equipment Info/Find window is reported at paragraph 11.1.
Warning. This command is available only if into the Snmp NE Software Inventory
window, it has been activated the NE Software Inventory pushbutton.
"
Refresh Info. It executes a new reading of the database and refreshes the information
present into the window.
At the choice of the command, the system refreshes the date/time (refer to paragraph
11.5.4) and it will point out the time of the refresh execution.
"
Software Download. It opens the Software Download window that allows executing the
updating of the equipment sw/fw.
If the user selects more NEs of the same type, at the selection of the command, the system
opens only one Software Download window through which it is possible to execute the
operation for all the NEs at the same time.
The description of the Software Download window is reported at paragraph 13.9.
Warning. This command is available only if, into the Snmp NE Software Inventory
window, it has been activated the NE Software Inventory pushbutton.
"
Read Data From NE. It forwards an information updating request to the controller of the
selected NE.
At its choice, the system forwards an updating request of the results directly to the controller
of the selected equipment.
The system points out the end of the operation through a message that reports the result
of the operation itself.
Warning. The system forwards the request only if the selected NE is in connected status.
Warning. This command is available only if, into the Snmp NE Software Inventory
window, it has been activated the NE Software Inventory pushbutton.
"
Bench Switch. It switches the operation of the memory benches relevant to the controller
of the selected NE.
Warning. This command is not available for the user with Entry profile.
At the choice of this command, the system displays a confirmation window. Select Ok to
execute the operation.
184
11.
At the end of the operation, the system displays a message that points out the result of the
operation. If the operation has been successfully executed, the system forces the bench
in running status to the loaded status and vice versa 99.
Warning. It is not possible to switch the memory bench when the updating of the sw/fw is
on progress (wording downloading refer to Fig. 13.4) and when into a bench it is not
present the equipment sw/fw (wording not loaded).
Warning. This command is available only if, into the Snmp NE Software Inventory
window, it has been activated the NE Software Inventory pushbutton.
Set Filter. It opens the View Filter window that allows filtering the list.
The filtering operation consists on detecting one or more criteria in such a way to display
only the records that comply with all the pointed out criteria.
To filter the data present into a list, click on one or more boxes present into the window,
according to the criteria to be used.
The activation of every box expands the window displaying a section that contains the
following options:
D
Match logical address box. Into this section, the user can set as filter one or more NE
logic address according to the following mode:
Type the NE address into the text box positioned under the Match Address box.
The user can use the asterisk wild character (*). For instance, if he types into the box
the letter/s:
p, the system will display into the window the NE with p logic address.
p*, the system will display the NEs with the logic addresses that begins with
the letter p.
p*o, the system will display the NEs with the logic addresses that begins with
the letter p and ends with the letter o.
Match equipment type box. Into this section, the user can set as filter the equipment
types that have to be displayed: Radio PDH, Radio SDH, etc.
To activate the desired options, click on the boxes placed on the side (the box is
activated when, inside it, it is present the symbol n
).
Match IP Address box. Into this section, the user can set as filter the IP address of
the equipment in the following mode.
Into the four text boxes (displayed at the selection of the option pushbutton under
examination), type the parts that compose the desired IP Address. The user can use
the asterisk wild character (*).
99.
Warning. This operation causes an automatic disconnection and a new connection of the NE. If
the new connection is not successfully executed, the NE gets the status of unreachable and, with
regular intervals, the supervisory system will automatically forward the new connection command.
185
11.
Match connection status box. Into this section, the user can select, as filter, the status
of the connection between the NE and the supervisory system: Connected,
Disconnected, Undetermined, Unreachable.
To activate the desired options, click on the boxes placed on the side (the box is activate
when, inside it, it is present the symbol n
).
Match Bench Release box. Into this section, the user can set, as filter, the version
and/or the using status of the sw/fw present into the memory benches of the
equipment.
To set as filter the sw/fw version, select into the list 100 the desired release. The system
points out the selected option into the text box.
To set as filter the using status of the sw/fw, activate the following option pushbuttons:
Not Loaded, the system will display, into the window, the NEs with the memory
benches without any uploaded sw/fw.
Warning. This option is available only if it has not been selected any sw/fw release.
If it has been selected a release, the user can delete it.
Loaded, the system will display, into the window, the NEs with a sw/fw release that
corresponds to the one set into the text box, its sw/fw is in Loaded status (the
sw/fw is present into the memory bench but it is not currently used).
Running, the system will display, into the window, the NEs with a sw/fw release
that corresponds to the one set into the text box, its sw/fw is in Running status (the
sw/fw is present into the memory bench and it is currently used).
Warning. This filter is available only if, into the Snmp NE Software Inventory
window, it has been activated the NE Software Inventory pushbutton.
D
Match Object box. Into this section, the user can set as filter a specific unit and/or
element of the unit in the following way:
a.
b.
Select the element (controller, programmable logic unit, etc.) into the Element
Type list.
The user can set a single element at a time or all the elements of the unit set into
the Unit Type box (choosing the All Elements option).
Warning. This filter is available only if, into the Snmp NE Software Inventory
window, it has been activated the Unit Software Inventory pushbutton.
D
Match Actual Release box. Into this section, the user can set as filter the release of
the sw/fw present into an element (controller, programmable logic unit, etc.).
To set as filter the release of the sw/fw, select from the list 101 the desired release. The
system displays the selected option into the text box.
Warning. This filter is available only if, into the Snmp NE Software Inventory
window, it has been activated the Unit Software Inventory pushbutton.
100.
Into the list, the system displays the releases of the sw/fw present into the equipment pointed out
into the Snmp NE Software Inventory window.
101.
Into the list, the system displays the releases of the sw/fw present into the elements pointed out
into the Snmp NE Software Inventory window.
186
11.
After having set the criteria, choose the OK pushbutton (it executes the filter command
and closes the window) or the Apply one (it executes the filter command and does not close
the window).
The system will display, into the Snmp NE Software Inventory window, only the records
that comply with all the activated options.
Each time that the system filters the list, it takes into account all the records as the displayed
records as the hidden ones.
Into the window, there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of all the filters and
displays the complete list of the records), Cancel (it closes the window and does not
execute the command) and Help (it opens the help online) pushbuttons.
Warning. When the system closes the Snmp NE Software Inventory window, it
automatically removes also the possible activation of the filters.
the number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of yy). If there
are not some activated filters, the number of the displayed records corresponds to the
total number of records.
the date and time when the system has opened or refreshed (through the choice of the
Refresh Info option refer to the relevant paragraph) the window.
187
11.
11.6
System access
User profile
The Legacy Alarm Average option allows checking the average value of the alarms received
by the NMS5UX system; such a check is executed by the equipment managed with the
Legacy protocol.
Warning. The subject command is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
At the choice of the option, the system displays the shAverage window that point out into the
following boxes, the following data:
D
Last Hour Avg box, it points out the average value of alarms for second received during
the last hour.
Current Hour Avg box, it points out the average value of alarms for second received
during the current hour.
Last Minute Avg box, it points out the average value of alarms for second received
during the last minute.
ACTUAL TIME box, it points out the date and time relevant to the window opening or
to the window updating.
Warning. The information present into the window refer to the average value of the alarms at
the window opening time.
To update the data, press the Refresh pushbutton.
At the choice of the option, the system will update the date/time and it will point out the time of
the refresh execution.
188
12
12.
Network Alarm History, it displays the history 102 of the alarm 103, status and event
104 signals stored into the database of the NMS5UX system relevant to the NEs
present into the open map.
Old Alarm History, it displays the history of the signals that have been saved on file
before.
NE Alarm History it displays the history of the alarm signals, the status and the event
relevant to the selected equipment only.
SNMP NE History Log, it allows reading the log of the alarms, memorised into the
equipment controller.
Warning. This command is available only for the equipment managed with SNMP
protocol, except for the Elfo and SDH N+1 equipment.
Alarm Summary, it displays the history resume concerning the alarm, status and
event signals memorised into the database of the NMS5UX system relevant to the
NEs present into the open map.
102.
The word History means the list of the signals that have been acquired or recorded by the
supervisory system during time. The system records into the alarm history as the detection signal
as the reset one relevant to the alarm.
103.
The word alarm means the failure signal created by an error or by a malfunction of the NE or of
a part of the NE itself.
104.
The words status and event identify respectively the signals that do not point out a malfunctions
but a status change and an operation on progress or a functioning condition.
The status signals are spontaneously communicated by the Network Element (NE) to the
supervisory system, such as for instance:
Sthe activation/deactivation of the connection between the LCT and the NE (refer to para 6.5);
Sthe start/stop of the updating relevant to the equipment software/firmware (refer to para 13.9
and 13.11);
Sthe activation/deactivation of the manual operation;
Sthe activated/standby status of duplicated parts of Network Element.
while the event signals are created by the supervisory system itself, such as for instance the
starting of a realigning position of the alarms.
189
12.
Transaction Log, it displays the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users,
that have changed the network configuration (for instance, the addition of an object),
the supervisory system configuration (for instance, the addition of a NMS5UX user) or
the configuration of a Network Element (for instance, the change of a parameter).
NMS5UX Inspect, it opens the Siae Inspect program for the control and the analysis
of the system processes and alarms (NMS5UX, HP OpenView, workstation/server).
Warning. The NMS5UX Inspect command is OPTIONAL.
190
12.
12.1
System access
User profile
The Network Alarm history command displays the history 102 of the alarm 103, event and status
104 signals relevant to the NEs present into the open map.
At the command choice, the system displays the Alarm History Browser window composed by
a table that lists the signals, by a menu bar and by a lower status bar. All these elements are
described into the following paragraphs.
By default, the system applies a filter to the list of the signals. At the opening of the window, the
system will display only the signals with a detection date that is successive with respect to the
midnight of the current day.
Warning. At the opening of the window, the system can display a warning message that points
out that into the database there is a number of signals higher than N. For this reason, into the
Alarm History Browser window, the system will display the records up to N, by means of a
chronological order from the most recent one up to the oldest one.
The limit N is not a memorization limit but simply a display limit of the signals. To be able to
read the signals successive to N, it is sufficient to delete some records.
The limit N can be changed by the user with Superuser profile.
By means of the commands present into the window, it is possible to execute the following
operations:
D
To copy, into a text editor, the list of the signals (refer to paragraph 9.5.2.1).
Activate (and deactivate) the automatic refresh procedure of the information (refer to
paragraph 12.1.2.2).
To point out into the map window, the symbol of the Network Element to which it is
referred the record (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.3).
To check the time between two different signals (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.3).
To open the Equipment Info/Find window for the NE to which it is referred the selected
record (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.3).
105.
A writing operation is the deleting and the marking of the records into the Alarm History Browser.
window.
191
12.
Severity. This field (represented by a box with colour and by a wording) points out if the
record refers to an alarm, status or event signal (refer to paragraph 12.1) and if the signal
has been detected or it has been reset; in the case that it refers to an alarm, it is pointed
out also its seriousness level. With details:
Backgr. color
Wording Description
Green
Normal
Event signal detected.
Blue
Status
Status signal detected.
Light blue
Warning Alarm signal with Warning seriousness detected .
Yellow
Minor
Alarm signal with Minor seriousness detected .
Orange
Major
Alarm signal with Major seriousness detected .
Red
Critical
Alarm signal with Critical seriousness detected .
Without Backgr. Normal
Event signal reset.
Without Backgr. Status
Status signal reset.
Without Backgr. Warning Alarm signal with Warning seriousness reset.
Without Backgr. Minor
Alarm signal with Minor seriousness reset.
Without Backgr. Major
Alarm signal with Major seriousness reset.
Without Backgr. Critical
Alarm signal with Critical seriousness reset.
"
Ack. The signals can be marked by the user, the Ack field points out the marking status
of the record.
If the field is empty, the signal has not been marked, if it is present the character:
S, it means that the record has been marked when the signal was detected but
not yet reset. In this case, if the signal has been reset, it is possible to mark newly
the record (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.2).
C, it means that the record has been marked when the signal was detected and
also reset.
The records can be marked by means of the Acknowledge command or clicking twice on
a generic point of the record (for the description of the Acknowledged Info window that is
displayed at the execution of the subject operation, refer to paragraph 12.1.2.2).
"
"
"
"
"
Object. Name of the physical or logic object to which it is referred the alarm. The event
signals are not provided with such an information.
"
106.
The element that has created the signal sets the date/time; in most cases, it is the main controller
of the Network Element.
192
12.
Print/Save. It prints or saves on file the list of the signals. The command choice opens a
submenu that contains the following options:
Filtered, It prints/saves the list of the displayed records. If it has not been activated
some filters, the displayed records correspond to the ones stored into the
database.
The choice of every command opens the Output Device Selection window. The using
modes of the window are pointed out at paragraph 11.1.2.
The format and the information contents of the print is the same one of the displayed table.
"
Export. It copies, into a window of the Text Editor program, the signals. Then, it will be
possible to add, to change, to delete, to print and to save the contents of the window into
a file.
The command choice opens a submenu that contains the following options:
Selected, it displays the Text Editor History... window where it is present the
record range pointed out with the mouse.
Filtered, it displays the Text Editor History... window where there is the list of
the displayed record. If it has not been activated any filters, the displayed records
correspond to the ones stored into the database.
For the using modes of the Text Editor program provided with the CDE user interface
(Common Desktop Environment), refer to the relevant manual or the help on line.
"
Delete. It removes, from the list and from the database of the supervisory system, one or
more records. The command choice opens a submenu that contains the following options:
Selected Alarms, it deletes the range of the records pointed out with the mouse.
Filtered Alarms, it deletes the list of the displayed records. If it has not been
activated any filters, the displayed records correspond to the ones stored into the
database.
All Alarms, it deletes all the records stores into the database.
193
12.
Warning. The command is available if there is, into the status bar of the Alarm History
Browser window, the symbol n(refer to paragraph 12.1.4). To make available the
command, it is necessary to refresh the window selecting the marking symbol.
Then, the command is available only for the user with Superuser, Privileged or Advanced
profile.
"
Acknowledge. It allows marking one or more records, in such a way that the system
memorizes that the user has seen the signals.
The command choice opens a submenu that contains the following options:
Selected Alarms, it marks the range of the records pointed out with the mouse.
Filtered Alarms, it marks the list of the displayed records. If it has not been
activated any filters, the records displayed correspond to the ones stored into the
database.
All Alarms, it marks all the records stored into the database.
If the operator chooses one of the above listed commands or clicks twice by means of the
L.H. pushbutton of the mouse on the selected record(s), the system displays the
Acknowledged Info window, where it is possible to customize the marking. With details,
into the:
User box, it is pointed out the username of the NMS5UX user that has requested
the marking of the records. The value of the box is automatically set with the
username of the NMS5UX user that has opened the map. This value can not be
changed.
After having set the parameters, press the OK pushbutton to execute the operation. After
having marked a record, it is not possible to delete the operation.
If the selected record refers to a signal detected but not yet reset, the system will mark
the record through the letter S. While if the record refers to a signal detected and reset, the
system will mark the record through the letter C.
Only for the records marked through the letter S, when the relevant signal is reset, it will
be possible to mark newly the record through the above described procedure. After the
second marking procedure, the system will replace the letter S with the letter C.
Warning. This command is not available if there is, into the status bar of the Alarm History
Browser window, the symbol n(refer to paragraph 12.1.4). To make available the
command, it is necessary to refresh the window selecting the marking symbol.
Then, the command is available only for the user with Superuser, Privileged or Advanced
profile.
"
194
12.
The first command freezes the information displayed on the video, stopping the automatic
refresh procedure of the window. This operation can be executed also selecting the symbol
! present into the status bar.
when the user chooses the command or the symbol, the system replaces, into the menu,
the Freeze Window wording with the Unfreeze Window. one, while, into the status bar, it
replaces the symbol ! with the symbol : .
The second command activate newly the automatic refresh procedure of the information.
The user can execute this operation also selecting the symbol : present into the status
bar.
When the user chooses the command or the symbol, the system replaces, into the menu,
the Unfreeze Window wording with the Freeze Window. one, while, into the status bar, it
replaces the symbol : with the symbol !.
"
Reread Database. It executes a new reading of the record stored into the database and
refreshes the information present into the window.
At the command choice, the system can display a warning message (refer to para. 12.1).
Set Filter. It opens the Filters Setting window that allows filtering the list of the signals stored
into the system database.
The filtering operation consists on defining one or more criteria in such a way that the
system displays only the records that comply with all the specified criteria.
To filter the data of a list, activate one or more boxes 107 present into the Filters Setting
window, according to the criteria to be used. The activation of each box enables the criterion
or expands the window displaying an additional section
The available criteria are the following ones:
D
107.
Match Severity box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, the signal type (alarm,
status, event refer to paragraph 12.1), the activation status of the signal and the
seriousness level for the alarms (the colour of the box, when it has been activated,
corresponds to the one coupled with the seriousness level of the alarm or with the
signal type). With details, the box:
Critical, (red) points out the alarm signal with Critical seriousness level.
Major, (orange) points out the alarm signal with Major seriousness level.
Minor, (yellow) points out the alarm signal with Minor seriousness level.
Warning, (light blue) points out the alarm signal with Warning seriousness level.
Status, (blue) points out the status signal.
Normal, (green) points out the event signal.
195
12.
Occured After and Occured Before boxes. In these sections, it is possible to set, as
filter, the date/time of the signal.
If the user activates the Occured After box, the system displays into the list only the
records with a recording date equal to or successive with respect to the one pointed
out on the side of the option.
If the user activates the Occured Before box, the system displays only the records with
a recording date equal to or preceding with respect to the one pointed out on the side
of the option.
To change the date/time displayed on the side of the specific option, move the indicator
of the scroll bar or click on the arrows placed on the sides of the bar. If the user chooses
the Coarse Granularity option, into the box placed above the bar, it is possible to
change the date/time with steps of an hour, while if he chooses the Fine Granularity
option, with steps of 1 second.
If the user activates the boxes at the same time and set properly the date/time, it is
possible to define a time range.
Match Address box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, one or more logic
addresses of Network Element.
The user can set the desired logic addresses by means of one of the following modes:
Select the symbol or the symbols of the involved NEs, directly into the map window
and choose the Add From Map pushbutton.
Type the logic address of the NE into the Source box and choose the Add
pushbutton.
The so set values are inserted into the area on the side of the Match Address box.
It is possible to delete a single option from the list, choosing, after having pointed out
such an option, the Remove pushbutton or all the options at the same time choosing
the Remove All pushbutton.
D
Match Object box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, a specific object by
means of the execution of the following procedure:
a.
Open the Equipment Type option menu and choose the type of NE to which
belongs the object.
b.
Open the Object option menu and set the desired object.
The user can set a single class of objects at a time or all the classes at the same
time choosing the All Objects option.
Match Selected Alarm box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, a specific
signal. Into the Alarm History Browser window, the system will display all the records
that contain, into the Message field, the same type of information of the actually
selected record 108.
Warning. this criterion is not available if it has not been selected any record or if it has
been selected two or more records.
108.
For instance, if the user selects a record with the Message LOM Disconnected, the system will
display, into the Alarm History Browser window, the records with the Message LOM
Disconnected, LOM Connected Monitor, LOM Connected Config.
196
12.
the TIC identification code (Trouble Identification Code) assigned by the user to
the record during the marking, activating the TIC box and assigning the code.
the username of the NMS5UX user that has executed the marking, activating the
User box and typing the username.
If the user activates the Match Unacknowledged box, the system will display records
that have not been marked yet.
After having set the criteria, choose the OK pushbutton (it executes the filtering operations
and closes the Filters Setting window) or the Apply one (it applies the filters and does not
close the window).
The system will display, into the Alarm History Browser window, only the records that
comply with all the activated options. Each time that the system filters the list, it considers
all the records, as the displayed ones as the hidden ones.
Warning. When the operator closes the Alarm History Browser window, the system
automatically removes the possible activation of the filters.
Into the Filters Setting window, there are also the following pushbuttons:
Load .... It opens the file that contains a specific setting of the filters saved before
(refer to the description of the Save... pushbutton).
At the pushbutton choice, the system displays the Load Filter window.
Select the desired file into the Files list.
Warning. The path, pointed out into the Selection box, can not be changed.
To confirm the operation, choose the OK pushbutton.
Delete .... It deletes the file that contains a specific setting of the filters saved
before (refer to the description of the Save... pushbutton ).
At the Delete... pushbutton choice, the system displays the Delete Filter window.
197
12.
"
Clear Filters. It removes the activation of all the filters with the exception of the
Match Severity, Match Acknowledged, Match Unacknowledged boxes.
Elapsed Time. It defines the time that divides the recording operations of two different
signals.
The command choice opens a submenu that contains the following options:
Set > Clear Time, it points out the time between the detection of a signal and its
reset.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected a single detected
and reset signal.
Time between Set, it points out the time between the detection of two different
signals.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected two different
adjacent or not adjacent signals.
First Set > Last Clear, it points out the time between the detection of the oldest
signal and the reset of the most recent one.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected two different,
adjacent or not adjacent, detected and reset signals.
Clear > Set, it points out the time between the reset of the oldest signal and the
detection of the most recent one.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected two different,
adjacent or not adjacent, detected and reset signals.
The choice of everyone of the above mentioned options displays a window that points out
the time range expressed by means of days, hours, minutes and seconds.
"
HighLight Equipment On Map. It points out, into the its window, the symbol of the Network
Element to which it is referred the selected record.
The system points out the Network Elements changing the colour of the symbol name: from
black with white background (normal condition) to white with black background.
If it has been selected the signal(s) of a single NE, the system points out the symbols and
opens and/or brings at front the window where there is the symbol. If the user selects the
signals of different NEs, the system points out the symbols only.
"
ClearHighlights. It removes the pointed out condition from all the symbols marked with
the HighLight Equipment On Map command (described at the preceding paragraph).
"
Equipment Info. It opens the Equipment Info/Find window that displays the characteristics
and the functional status of the Network Element to which it is referred the selected record.
If the user selects two or more records relevant to different NEs, the system can open, at
the same time, the specific Equipment Info/Find windows. The detailed description of the
Equipment Info/Find window is reported at paragraph 11.1.
198
12.
"
Set Time, the signals are listed according to the detection date/time (Set Time).
* CLEAR Time, the signals are listed according to the reset date/time (Clear Time).
As it is pointed out into the windows, the system will consider the not yet reset signals
with a reset date/time equal to 0.
Recording Sequence, the supervisory system lists the signals according to their
recording date/time into its own database.
To set the order used to list the signals, activate the option pushbutton:
D
Ascending; the first record of the table corresponds to the most recent signal; the
system lists the successive ones through a decreasing order.
Descending; the first record of the table corresponds to the oldest signal; the system
lists the successive ones through an increasing order.
If the user activates the Group by Address pushbutton, the system will order the signals also
according to their own address (second ordering criterion).
When the system executes the operation, it takes into account all the records memorised into
the database and not only the displayed ones.
the symbol : points out that the information present into the Alarm History Browser
window are frozen. While the symbol ! points out that the information are not frozen,
but the system automatically updates them (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.2).
the number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of yy). If it has
not been activated any record, the number of the displayed records corresponds to the
total number of records.
199
12.
The presence of the symbol npoints out that the information present into the Alarm History
Browser window has not been refreshed. To refresh such information, click on the symbol n
(refer to paragraph 12.1.4).
Two or more NMS5UX users (each one on a different terminal) have opened the Alarm
History Browser window for the same map and into an Alarm History Browser window,
the user deletes or marked some records, the system does not dynamically refresh all
the open windows. This operation is necessary to prevent the needing to refresh
continuously the windows while the users are using them.
It is marked one or more records into a Current Alarms Browser window. The record
is not automatically marked also into the Alarm History Browser window if it is opened.
200
12.
12.2
System access
User profile
The Network Current alarms command allows displaying the list of the alarm 103, of the event
and of the status 104 signals actually activated into the Network Elements present into the open
map.
At the command choice, the system displays the Current Alarms Browser window that is
composed by a table that lists the signals, by a menu bar and by a lower status bar. These
elements are described into the following paragraphs.
By means of the commands present into the window, it is possible to execute the following
operations:
D
To activate (and to deactivate) the automatic refresh procedure of the information (refer
to paragraph 12.2.2.2).
To point out, into the map window, the symbol of the Network Element to which it is
referred the selected record (refer to paragraph 12.2.2.3).
To check the time range between two different signals (refer to paragraph 12.2.2.3).
To open the Equipment Info/Find window for the NE to which it is referred the selected
record (refer to paragraph 12.2.2.3).
201
12.
"
Acknowledge. It allows marking one or more records, in such a way that the system
memorizes that the user has seen the signals.
The command choice opens a submenu that contains the following options:
Selected Alarms, It marks the range of the records pointed out with the mouse.
Filtered Alarms, It marks the list of the displayed records. If it has not been
activated any filter, the displayed records correspond to the ones memorised into
the database.
All Alarms, It marks all the records memorised into the database.
The record can be marked also clicking quickly twice on the record itself.
"
Freeze Window/Unfreeze Window. The system display the commands one as the
alternative of the other.
The first command freezes the information displayed on the video, stopping the automatic
refresh procedure of the window. The operation can be also executed selecting the symbol
! present into the status bar.
When the user chooses he command or the symbol, the system replaces, into the menu,
the Freeze Window wording with the Unfreeze Window. one, while, into the status bar, it
replaces the symbol ! with the one : .
The second command activates newly the automatic refresh procedure of the information.
The operation can also be executed selecting the symbol : present into the status bar.
When the user chooses the command or the symbol, the system replaces, into the menu,
the Unfreeze Window wording with the Freeze Window. one, while, into the status bar, it
replaces the symbol : with the one !.
"
Reread Database. It executes a new reading of the records stored into the database and
refreshes the information present into the window.
202
Set Filter. It opens the Filters Setting window that allows sorting the list of the signals.
12.
The description and the setting mode of the sorting criteria are the same ones pointed out
at paragraph 12.1.2.3, with the exception of the Match Acknowledged and Match
Unacknowledged criteria that are described here below.
If the user activates the Match Acknowledged box, the system will display, into the list, the
records that have been marked (refer to paragraph 12.1.2.2).
If the user activates the Match Unacknowledged box, the system will display the records
that have not been marked yet.
"
Elapsed Time. It defines the time range that passed between two different signals.
The description and the using mode of the command is pointed out at paragraph 12.1.2.3.
"
HighLight Equipment On Map. It points out, into the map window, the symbol of the
Network Element to which it is referred the selected record.
The description and the using mode of the command is pointed out at paragraph 12.1.2.3.
"
ClearHighlights. It removes the pointed out condition from all the symbol marked by
means of the HighLight Equipment On Map command (described at the preceding
paragraph).
"
Equipment Info. It opens the Equipment Info/Find window that displays the characteristics
and the functional status of the Network Element to which it is referred the selected record.
The description of the Equipment Info/Find window is reported at paragraph 11.1.
The symbol : points out that the information present into the Current Alarms Browser
window are frozen. While, the symbol ! points out that the information are not frozen,
but the system dynamically refreshes them (refer to paragraph 12.2.2.2).
the number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of yy of Current
Alarms). If it has not been activated any filter, the number of the displayed signals
corresponds to the total number of signals.
203
12.
204
12.
12.3
System access
User profile
The Old alarm history command allows displaying the history 102 of the alarm 103, of the event
and of the status 104 signals present into the Old History table relevant to the Network Elements
present into the open map.
Into the Old History table, the system memorizes the history of the signals saved by means of
the Alarm history backup command (refer to paragraph 15.1) and restored by means of the
Alarm history restore command (refer to paragraph 15.2).
At the command choice, the system displays the Old History Browser window composed by a
table that lists the signals, by a menu bar and by a lower status bar. These elements are
described into the following paragraphs.
Warning. If, at the window opening, the table is empty, it is necessary to recover, from the
backup file saved before, the list of the desired signals (refer to paragraph 15.2).
Such signals will remain available into the Old History table and into the Old History Browser
window, until when the system recovers a different list of signals.
By means of the commands present into the Old History Browser window, it is possible to
execute the following operations:
D
To copy into a text editor the list of the signals (refer to paragraph 12.3.2.1).
To point out, into the map window, the symbol of the Network Element to which it is
referred the selected record (refer to paragraph 12.3.2.3).
To check the time range between two different signals (refer to paragraph 12.3.2.3).
205
12.
"
Export. It copies the signals into a window of the Text Editor program.
The using modes of the command are pointed out into the paragraph 9.5.2.1.
"
Reread Database. It executes a new reading of the records stored into the Old History
table and refreshes the information present into the window.
"
Elapsed Time. It defines the time range that passed between two different signals.
The description and the using mode of the command is pointed out at paragraph 12.1.2.3.
"
HighLight Equipment On Map. It points out, into the map window, the symbol of the
Network Element to which it is referred the selected record.
The description and the using mode of the command is pointed out at paragraph 12.1.2.3.
"
ClearHighlights. It removes the pointed out condition from all the symbol marked by
means of the HighLight Equipment On Map command (described at the preceding
paragraph).
"
Sort. It sorts the list of the records according to the recording date and time of the signals.
206
12.
The selection of this command opens the Sort window activating the following option
pushbutton:
D
Ascending, the first record of the table correspond to the most recent signal; the system
lists the successive ones through decreasing order.
Descending, the first record of the table correspond to the oldest signal; the system
lists the successive ones through increasing order.
When the system executes the operation, it takes into account all the records memorised into
the database and not only the displayed ones.
Reread Database. It executes a new reading of the records stored into the Old History
table and refreshes the information present into the window.
the number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of yy). If it has
not been activated any filter, the number of the displayed signals corresponds to the
total number of signals.
207
12.
12.4
NE ALARM HISTORY
System access
User profile
The NE Alarm history command displays the history 102 of the alarm signals 103, of the event
and of the status ones 104 relevant to the selected Network Element only.
The operator can execute the subject operation also pressing the R.H. side pushbutton of the
mouse and selecting the SIAE NE Alarm History command.
At the selection of the command, the system displays the Alarm History Browser window
described at paragraph 12.1.
To display the signals relevant to the other equipment, deactivate the Match Address filter (refer
to paragraph 12.1.2.3).
208
12.
12.5
NE CURRENT ALARMS
System access
User profile
The NE Current alarms command allows displaying the list of the alarm/event/status signals
currently activated into the selected equipment.
The operator can execute the subject operation also pressing the R.H. side pushbutton of the
mouse and selecting the SIAE NE Current Alarms command.
At the selection of the command, the system displays the Current Alarms Browser window
described at paragraph 12.2.
To display the signals relevant to the other equipment, deactivate the Match Address filter (refer
to paragraph 12.2.2.3).
209
12.
12.6
System access
User profile
The SNMP NE History Log command allows reading the log of the alarms, memorised into
the equipment controller.
The system memorizes the log read from equipment (called Network Element log NE log) 110
into the server/workstation, and keeps it available for successive queries of the user.
Warning. This command is available only for the equipment managed with SNMP protocol,
except for the Elfo and SDH N+1 equipment.
At the choice of the command, the system displays the Equipment History Log Management
Main Window window shown in Fig. 12.1.
By means of the commands present into the window, the user can execute the following
operations:
D
to delete the signals memorised into the controller of an equipment (refer to paragraph
12.6.6).
109.
Warning. The user with Entry profile can only check the data.
110.
The wording Network Element log (NE Log) identifies a file where the system records the alarm
and status signals memorized into the controller of the selected equipment.
Warning. The list of the NE Logs and their contents can be displayed only through the Equipment
History Log Management Main Window window.
210
12.
List of the
selected NE
Logs for which
the system can
displays the
details of the
signals (3)
(1) The system identifies each equipment through a record that contains:
S the symbol that represents the equipment type (SDH, PDH, PMP, etc.).
S the equipment IP address.
S the equipment logic address.
When the user selects the equipment symbol, its edge becomes red.
To display the list of the memorised NE Logs relevant to an equipment, it is necessary to
select quickly twice the symbol of the equipment.
(2) The system identifies each NE Log through a record that points out the date
(daymonthyear) and the time (hour:minutes:seconds) of the file creation.
When a NE Log is deactivated, it means that it has been selected to be displayed. When the
NE Log is removed from the Selected Files List area (refer to paragraph 12.6.3), the system
activates again the relevant record into the area under examination.
(3) The system identifies each NE Log through a record that contains:
S the symbol that represents the equipment type (SDH, PDH, PMP, etc.).
S the equipment IP address.
S the equipment logic address.
S the date and time of the file creation.
The procedure to insert the NE Logs into the area under examination and to display the
details of their signals is pointed out at paragraph 12.6.3.
Fig. 12.1
NMS5UX Release 6.4 MN.00144.E 001
211
12.
Into the Selected Equipment area, select the equipment for which it has to be created
a NE Log.
2.
3.
Send Read/Delete File Request, to create the NE Log and to delete the signals
memorised into the equipment controller.
Send Read File Request, to create the NE Log and to prevent the deleting of the
signals.
The system displays the created NE Log into the ...history log file area. The system
automatically saves the NE Log with the name corresponding to its creation date_time.
Warning. If the system displays the Uploaded file is empty. File is not saved message,
it does not create the log file because the system does not memorize any signal into
the equipment controller.
Into the Selected Equipment area, select the equipment for which the user wants
creating a NE Log.
2.
Into the Selected Equipment area, select quickly twice the equipment for which it has
to be created the NE Log.
Into the ...history log files area, the system will display the list of the NE Logs relevant
to the selected equipment.
212
12.
2.
Select quickly twice the NE Log for which it has to be checked the relevant content.
The system displays the NE Log into the Selected File List area. The system disables
the file into the ...history log file area.
3.
Repeat the step 2 and eventually the step 1, to insert into the Selected File List area
all the desired NE Logs.
4.
The user can removes from the Selected File List area:
5.
a single file selecting the icon that characterizes the file and pressing the R.H. side
pushbutton of the mouse. The system displays a popup menu. Select the
Remove From List pushbutton.
111
Into the Selected Equipment area, select quickly twice the equipment for which it has
to be deleted a NE Log.
Into the ...history log file area, the system will display the list of the NE Logs relevant
to the selected equipment.
2.
Select the NE Log and press the R.H. side pushbutton of the mouse.
The system displays a popup menu.
3.
111.
Into the Selected Equipment area, select the equipment for which the user wants to
delete all the NE Logs.
With the exception of some commands of the menus, present into the Alarm History Browser
window but not into the NE Logger Browser one.
213
12.
2.
3.
Into the Selected Equipment area, select the equipment for which it is necessary to
delete the signals.
2.
3.
Warning. The user can delete the signals memorised into the controller of an equipment also
during the creation operation of a NE Log (refer to paragraph 12.6.1).
214
12.
12.7
ALARM SUMMARY
System access
User profile
The Alarm Summary option displays the history RESUME of the alarm, event and status
signals subdivided according to their seriousness level.
The signals refer to the Network Elements present into the open map.
At the option selection, the system displays the Siae Alarm Summary window shown into
Fig. 12.2.
By means of the commands present into the window, the user can execute the following
operations:
D
D
it points out
the filter
activation (1)
Automatic
refresh of the
information (2)
Refreshing
time of the
information (3)
Subdivision
criterion of
the signals
(5)
Number of
signals
subdivided
according to
the signal
type
seriousness
level (4)
Status
change
indication (6)
Number of
detected and
reset signals (7)
Total number
of signals
Number of
detected but
not yet reset
signals (8)
Select this
pushbutton to
refresh the data
Select this
pushbutton to
set the filters (9)
Fig. 12.2
215
12.
(3) this parameter points out the time between an automatic refresh of the data and the next one (this
parameter is a meaningful one only when the Auto Refresh box has been activated).
To change this parameter, type the new value into the text box (numeric value comprised between 30
and 999 seconds). The user can change the value also when it has been activated the automatic
refresh procedure. In such a case, at the next refresh, after having changed the timeout, the system
will get the new value as the valid one.
(4) Into the Siae Alarm Summary window, it is possible to have the absence of one or more records
relevant to the signal type/seriousness levels. Their presence is submitted to the activation of the
specific box into the Filters Setting window (refer to paragraph 12.7.1).
When the user deactivates the box, relevant to a type of signal/seriousness level, the system displays
into the Siae Alarm Summary window, the Filtered record, into which it points out the complessive
signals of the remaining records present into the window 112.
The Filtered record have the same functions of the other records. With details:
S If the user selects the Filtered pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser
window that reports the complessive signals of the remaining records present into the
window.
S On the side of the Cleared pushbutton, the system points out the complessive number of
detected/reset signals relevant only to the records present into the window. Then, if the user
selects the Cleared pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser window that
reports the details of the signals under examination.
S On the side of the Active pushbutton, the system points out the complessive number of
signals detected but not yet reset relevant only to the records present into the window. Then,
if the user selects the Active pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser
window that reports the details of the signals under examination.
112.
For instance, if into the window, there are only the Critical (Cleared 20 Active 15) and Major
(Cleared 5 Active 3) records, the Filtered record will point out the sum of their signals (Cleared
25 Active 18).
216
12.
(5) In this column, the system reports the criterion used to subdivide the signals. With details, into the
record:
S Critical, the system points out the alarm signals with Critical seriousness level. Then, if the
user selects the Critical pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser window
that reports only the alarm signals with Critical seriousness level.
S Major, the system points out the alarm signals with Major seriousness level. Then, if the user
selects the Major pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser window that
reports only the alarm signals with Major seriousness level.
S Minor, the system points out the alarm signals with Minor seriousness level. Then, if the user
selects the Minor pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser window that
reports only the alarm signals with Minor seriousness level.
S Warning, the system points out the alarm signals with Warning seriousness level. Then, if the
user selects the Warning pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser window
that reports only the alarm signals with Warning seriousness level.
S Status, the system points out the status signals. Then, if the user selects the Status
pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser window that reports only the status
signals.
S Normal, the system points out the event signals. Then, if the user selects the Normal
pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser window that reports only the event
signals.
S All, the system points out all the signals (alarms, status, events). Then, if the user selects the
All pushbutton, the system opens the Alarm History Browser window that reports all the
signals.
(6) The presence of the asterisk on the side of the record points out that, from the opening of the Siae
Alarm Summary window or from the last selection of the Clear Alert pushbutton, it has happened
a change (it has been detected or reset a signal).
To remove the asterisk, select the Clear Alert pushbutton.
(7) Into this column, the system reports the number of detected/reset signals subdivided according to their
seriousness level or the total ones. With details, on the side of the pushbutton:
S Cleared (Critical record ), the system points out the number of the detected/reset alarms with
Critical seriousness level.
Then, if the user selects the pushbutton under examination, the system opens the Alarm
History Browser window that reports only the detected /reset alarms with Critical seriousness
level.
S Cleared (Major record ), the system points out the number of the detected/reset alarms with
Major seriousness level.
Then, if the user selects the pushbutton under examination, the system opens the Alarm
History Browser window that reports only the detected /reset alarms with Major seriousness
level.
S Cleared (Minor record ), the system points out the number of the detected/reset alarms with
Minor seriousness level.
Then, if the user selects the pushbutton under examination, the system opens the Alarm
History Browser window that reports only the detected /reset alarms with Minor seriousness
level.
S Cleared (Warning record ), the system points out the number of the detected/reset alarms
with Warning seriousness level.
217
12.
Then, if the user selects the pushbutton under examination, the system opens the Alarm
History Browser window that reports only the detected /reset alarms with Warning
seriousness level.
S Cleared (Status record ), the system points out the number of the detected/reset status
signals.
Then, if the user selects the pushbutton under examination, the system opens the Alarm
History Browser window that reports only the detected /reset status signals.
S Cleared (Normal record ), the system points out the number of the detected/reset event
signals.
Then, if the user selects the pushbutton under examination, the system opens the Alarm
History Browser window that reports only the detected /reset event signals.
S Cleared (All record ), the system points out the complessive number of the detected/reset
signals.
Then, if the user selects the pushbutton under examination, the system opens the Alarm
History Browser window that reports all the detected /reset signals.
(8) Into this column, the system reports the number of detected but not yet reset signals subdivided
according to their seriousness level or the total ones. With details, on the side of the box:
S Active (Critical record ), the system points out the number of the detected alarms with Critical
seriousness level.
Then, if the user selects the pushbutton under examination, the system opens the Alarm
History Browser window that reports only the detected alarms with Critical seriousness level.
S Active (Major record ), the system points out the number of the detected alarms with Major
seriousness level.
Then, if the user selects the pushbutton under examination, the system opens the Alarm
History Browser window that reports only the detected alarms with Major seriousness level.
S Active (Minor record ), the system points out the number of the detected alarms with Minor
seriousness level.
Then, if the user selects the pushbutton under examination, the system opens the Alarm
History Browser window that reports only the detected alarms with Minor seriousness level.
S Active (Warning record ), the system points out the number of the detected alarms with
Warning seriousness level.
Then, if the user selects the pushbutton under examination, the system opens the Alarm
History Browser window that reports only the detected alarms with Warning seriousness level.
S Active (Status record ), the system points out the number of the detected status signals.
Then, if the user selects the pushbutton under examination, the system opens the Alarm
History Browser window that reports only the detected status signals.
S Active (Normal record ), the system points out the number of the detected event signals.
Then, if the user selects the pushbutton under examination, the system opens the Alarm
History Browser window that reports only the detected event signals.
S Active (All record ), the system points out the complessive number of the detected signals.
Then, if the user selects the pushbutton under examination, the system opens the Alarm
History Browser window that reports all the detected signals.
(9) The choice of the pushbutton opens the Filters Settings window described at the paragraph 12.7.1.
218
12.
12.7.1
When the user selects the Filter pushbutton, the system opens the Filters Setting window that
allows sorting the list of the signals.
The sorting operation consists of defining one or more criteria in such a way to display only
the signals that comply with all the specified criteria.
To sort the data into a list, activate one or more boxes 113 present into the Filters Setting window
according to the desired criteria. The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the
window displaying an additional section.
The available criteria are the following ones:
"
Match Severity box. In this section, the user can set as filter, the signal type (alarm, status,
event), and for the alarms their seriousness.
With details the box 114:
Critical, (red) points out the alarm signal with Critical seriousness.
Major, (orange) points out the alarm signal with Major seriousness.
Minor, (yellow) points out the alarm signal with Minor seriousness.
Warning, (light blue) points out the alarm signal with Warning seriousness.
Status, (blue) points out the status signal.
Normal, (green) points out the event signal.
Warning. The deactivation of a box causes the removal of the relevant record from
the Siae Alarm Summary window and the displaying of the Filtered record (refer
to note 4 of Fig. 12.2).
"
Occured After and Occured Before boxes. In these sections, it is possible to set as filter
the signal date/time.
If the user activates the Occured After box, into the Siae Alarm Summary window, the
system will take into account only the signals with a recording data equal to or successive
with respect to the one pointed out on the side of the option.
If the user activates the Occured Before box, the system will take into account only the
signals with a recording data equal to or preceding with respect to the one pointed out on
the side of the option.
To change the date/time displayed on the side of the specific option, move the pointer of
the scroll bar or click on the arrows placed on the sides of the bar. Into the box placed over
the bar, if the user chooses the Coarse Granularity option, he can change the date/time with
steps of one hour, while if he chooses the Fine Granularity option with steps equal to one
second.
If the user activates at the same time the boxes and properly sets the date/time, he can
define a time range.
"
Match Address box. In this section, the user can set as filter one or more logic address
of Network Element.
113.
114.
The color of the box when it is activated is the same color coupled with the alarm seriousness or
with the signal type.
219
12.
The user can set the desired logic addresses through one of the following modes:
Select the symbol or the symbols of the interested NEs, directly into the map
window and choose the Add From Map button.
Type the logic address of the NE into the Source box and choose the Add button.
The system inserts the set values into the area placed on the side of the Match Address
box.
The user can delete from the list a single option choosing, after having highlighted such an
option, the Remove button or he can delete all the options at the same time selecting the
Remove All button.
"
Match Object box. In this section, the user can set as filter a specific object by means of
the following procedure:
a.
Open the Equipment Type option menu and select the NE type to which the object
belongs.
b.
Open the Object option menu and set the desired object.
The user can set a single object class at a time or all the classes at the same time
selecting the All Objects option.
"
Match Message String box. In this section, the user can set as filter an alphanumeric
string; into the Siae Alarm Summary window, the system will take into account only the
signals that contain, into the Message field (refer to paragraph 12.1.1), the set character
string.
If the user activates the Case Sensitive box, the system will distinguish between uppercase
and lower case characters; on the contrary, if the user deactivates the box, the system will
not be able to detect any difference.
"
Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged boxes. In these sections, the user can
set as filter the marking status of the signals.
If the user activates the Match Acknowledged box, into the Siae Alarm Summary window,
the system will take into account only the signals that have been marked (refer to
paragraph 12.1.2.2). Then, it is possible to point out:
The TIC (Trouble Identification Code) identification code assigned by the user to
the record during the marking, activating the TIC box and selecting the code.
The username of the NMS5UX user who has executed the marking, activating the
User box and typing the username.
If the user activates the Match Unacknowledged, box, the system will take into account only
the not yet marked signals.
"
Description box. Into this box, the user can insert a description that will be displayed into
the Filters:... area of the Siae Alarm Summary window.
After having set the criteria, choose the OK button (the system executes the sorting
operations and closes the Filters Setting window) or the Apply one (it applies the filters and
does not closes the window).
Each time that the system sorts the list, it takes into account all the records, as the displayed
records as the hidden ones.
220
12.
Warning. When the user closes the Siae Alarm Summary window, the system automatically
removes the possible activation of the filters.
Into the Filters Setting window, there are also the following pushbuttons:
Load .... It opens the file that contains a specific setting of filters that have been
previously saved (refer to the description relevant to the Save... button).
At the choice of the button, the system displays the Load Filter window.
Select the desired file into the Files list.
Warning. The path pointed out into the Selection box can not be changed.
To confirm the operation choose the OK button.
Delete .... It deletes the file that contains a specific setting of filters that have been
previously saved (refer to the description relevant to the Save... button).
At the choice of the Delete... button, the system displays the Delete Filter window.
Select the desired file into the Files list.
Warning. The path pointed out into the Selection box can not be changed.
To delete the file select the OK button.
Clear Filters. It removes the activation of all the filters with the exception of the
Match Severity, Match Acknowledged, Match Unacknowledged boxes.
221
12.
12.8
NMS5UX STATISTICS
System access
User profile
The command allows displaying the alarm, event and status signalimgs that occurred on all the
equipment of the network and filtering them according to predefined criteria.
When the command is selected, the NMS5UX Alarms Statistics window displayed in Fig. 12.3
opens. The commands present in this window allows executing the following operations:
D
to display the signalings of all the equipment, subdivided by time interval (par. 12.8.1)
to display the signalings of all the equipment, subdivided by equipment (par. 12.8.2)
to display the signalings of all the equipment , subdivided by typology (par. 12.8.3)
It is possible to execute the update of the data displaying selecting the Reload pushbutton.
115.
The filtering operation consists in determining one or more criteria in such a way that
only the signalings that satisfy the specified criteria are displayed.
222
12.
Fig. 12.3
223
12.
Select the Graphics Networks Events Counters command: the window displays
a histogram graph of the signalings of all the equipment of the network subdivided by
day 116. The detail can be deepened by each single day listed in the graph.
2.
Double click with the left button of the mouse on the histogram of a given day to display
the subdivision of the signalings of the selected day by intervals of 15 minutes 117.
3.
Now, double click with the left button of the mouse on the histogram of a given period
of 15 minutes to display the subdivision of the signalings relevant to the selected 15
minutes by equipment 117.
4.
Now, double click with the left button of the mouse on the histogram of a given
equipment to display the signalings relevant to the equipment under examination 117.
2.
Double click with the left button of the mouse on the histogram of a given equipment
to display the subdivision of the signalings of the equipment by day 117.
3.
Now, double click with the left button of the mouse on the histogram of a given day to
display the subdivision of the signalings by intervals of 15 minutes 117.
4.
Now, double click with the left button of the mouse on the histogram of a given intervals
of 15 minutes to display the signaling relevant to the selected interval 117.
116. By default, the window displays the signalings relevant to the last 30 days and only for the days when
signalings occurred. To modify the time window of the displaying, it is necessary to act on a system
configuration file. Refer to the administrator manual for the details of the operation.
117. Select the Up button to return to the immediately previous displaying.
224
12.
2.
Double click with the left button of the mouse on the histogram of una segnalazione
per visualizzare la suddivisione delle segnalazioni per giorni 117.
3.
Now, double click with the left button of the mouse on the histogram of a given day to
display the subdivision of the signaling by intervals of 15 minutes 117.
2.
3.
Select the pushbutton relevant to the set of signalings that you wish to display:
Activate one or more box present in the Filtered Graph Creation window (Fig. 12.3),
according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box enables the
criterion and expands the window displaying another section. When one or more
filtering criteria are active, an asterisk is displayed on the Filter pushbutton. A box is
active when the symbol n is present on it.
The available criteria are:
Match Date box. It sets the time interval which the signalings must belong
to in order to be displayed. The cascade menu offers four options:
==, only the signalings of the day determined by the position of the cursor on
the right side will be displayed118
>=. only the signalings of the days following the day determined by the
position of the cursor on the right side and of that day itself will be displayed
118
<=, only the signalings of the days before the day determined by the position
of the cursor on the right side and of that day itself will be displayed 118
118.
225
12.
<>, only the signalings of the day between the two dates pointed out by the
positions of the cursors will be displayed 118
226
Match Source box. It sets a given equipment as source of the signalings which
must be displayed. Select the Select pushbutton, a window opens that
allows the selection of the single wished equipment. Select the wished
equipment. The Reset pushbutton deletes all the equipment possibly
present in thematch list. It is possible to set only one equipme per timeor more
equipment at the same time (multiple selection).
Match Object box. It sets a given object as filter. Open the Equipment Type
option menu and select the type of NE which the NE belongs to. Open the
Object option menu and set the wished object . It is possible to set only one
class of object per time or all the class at the same time selecting the All
Objects item.
12.
12.9
TRANSACTION LOG
System access
User profile
The Transaction Log command allows displaying the list of the operations executed by the
NMS5UX users that have requested some changes of the network configuration (for instance
the adding of a Network Element), of the configuration of the supervisory system (for instance
the adding of a user) or of the configuration of a Network Element (for instance the change of
a parameter).
Warning. If the user that has selected the command has the:
D
Superuser profile, the list points out the operations executed by the NMS5UX users
of all the existing maps.
Privileged or Advanced profiles, the list points out the operations executed by the
NMS5UX users of its own map.
At the command choice, the system displays the Transaction Browser window composed by a
table that lists the operations, by a menu bar and by a lower status bar. These elements are
described into the following paragraphs.
Warning. To make quicker the reading from database and to prevent the displaying of too old
records, at the opening of the window, the system points out only the operations executed into
the last N days (default N=10 days, it can be configured by the user with Superuser profile).
This does not means that the oldest records can not be displayed, but that it is automatically
applied a filter.
By means of the commands present into the window, it is possible to execute the following
operations:
119.
A Writing operation is the deleting of the records into the Transaction Browser window.
227
12.
"
"
Map Name. The name of the map where it has been executed the operation.
"
User Name. The name of the user who has executed the operation.
"
"
Object. The name of the logic or physical object to which it is referred the operation.
"
Information. The alphanumeric string that better specifies the type of the operation.
Warning. the information present into the window correspond to the operations
executed until the time when the user selects the command or executes the refresh (refer
to paragraph 12.9.2.2).
The presence of the symbol points out that the information is not available because it is not
a significant one for the operation type to which it is referred.
228
Print/Save. It prints or saves on a file the list of the operations. The command choice opens
a submenu that contains the following options:
All records, it prints or saves the list of the operations stored into the database.
Filtered records, it prints/saves the list of the displayed operations. If it has not
been activated any filter, the displayed records correspond to the ones memorised
into the database.
12.
The choice of every command opens the Output Device Selection window. The using
modes of the window are pointed out at paragraph 11.1.2.
The format and the information contents of the print is the same one of the displayed table.
"
Delete records. It removes the selected records from the list and from the database.
The command choice displays a confirmation window that points out the number of the
records to be deleted. Choose OK to execute the operation.
Warning. This command is available only for the user with Advanced, Privileged and
Superuser profile.
"
Refresh Info. It executes a new reading of the database and refreshes the information.
At the command choice, the system refreshes the date/time (refer to paragraph 12.9.3) and
it will point out the refreshing time.
Set Filter. It opens the View Filter window that allows filtering the list of the operations
stored into the system database.
The filtering operations consists on defining one or more criteria in such a way that the
system displays only the records that comply with all the specified criteria.
To filter a list, activate one or more boxes 120 present into the View Filter window, according
to the criteria to be used. The activation of each box expands the window displaying an
additional section. The available criteria are the following ones:
D
Match user box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the NMS5UX user who
has executed the operation.
Select the desired user name from the list of the existing users.
Match date boxes. In these sections, it is possible to set, as a filter, the time range
when it has been executed the operation.
To set the filter, move the indicators of the Events occurred on or ... scrolling bars to
set the desired time range. Into the Transaction Browser window, the system will
display the operations that have an execution date more recent than the one pointed
out into the Events occurred on or after field and more ancient than the one pointed
out into the Events occurred on or before field.
If the user activates the Granularity boxes placed on the side of the bars (Coarse
wording), it is possible to change the date/time with steps of 1 hour, while if he
deactivates such boxes (Fine wording) with steps of 1 second.
120.
229
12.
b.
The categories that group the options are pointed out here below:
NMS LOG, Operations relevant to the data present into the system
database.
NMS SPECIAL, Operations that have changed the status of the serial ports
used for the connection of the NMS5UX system to the NEs.
NMS USERS, Operations executed on the NMS5UX users.
The operations coupled with each category are pointed out in Tab. 12.1.
D
Match object box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the Network Element
or a specific object of a NE, executing the following procedure:
a.
b.
Match Field String box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, an alphanumeric
string; into the Transaction Browser window, the system will display all the records that
contain the set wording, in the Element, Object or Information field according to the
executed setting (refer to the following procedure).
To set the filter, execute the following procedure:
a.
Select the pushbutton relevant to the field of the Transaction Browser window
where the user wants to apply the filter (Element, Object or Information field).
b.
230
12.
If the user activates the Exact Match box, the system will consider only the records
that exactly contain, into the field, the set wording; On the contrary, if the user
deactivates the box, the system will display the signals that contain, into the filed,
a value that contains also the set wording.
D
Match map box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the map to which it is
coupled the NMS5UX user who has executed the operation.
Select the map name from the list of the existing maps.
Warning. The filter is available only for the user with superuser profile.
After having set the criteria, choose the OK pushbutton (it applies the filters and closes
the View Filter window) or the Apply pushbutton (it applies the filters and does not close
the window).
The system will display, into the Transaction Browser window, only the records that comply
with all the activated options. Each time that the system filters the list, it considers all the
records, as the displayed ones as the hidden ones.
To delete the activation of all the filters and to display the complete list of the operations,
choose the Clear pushbutton.
Warning. When the user closes the Transaction Browser window, the system automatically
removes the eventual activation of the filters.
the number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of xx). If it has
not been activated any filter, the number of the displayed records corresponds to the
total number of records.
the date and the time when the window has been opened or refreshed (by means of
the choice of the Refresh Info command refer to paragraph 12.9.2.2).
231
12.
Such operations remain stored for a certain number of day (that can be configured by the user
with Superuser profile default 90 days), after that they are automatically removed.
During this period, it is possible to remove manually the signals (refer to paragraph 12.9.2.2).
It is advisable to delete and/or to store on file periodically the least significant records, in such
a way to prevent the saturation of the database. In fact, the system stores on disk all the signals
until when it finds free space.
Tab. 12.1
Category
ACCESS
NMS
COMMANDS
NMS EDIT
NMS EQ.
MANAGER
NMS LOG
232
Operation
Description
ACCESS NOT
AUTHORIZED
LOGIN
LOGOUT
CONNECT EQ
DISCONNECT EQ
RESETCONNECT EQ
ADD ELEMENT
DELETE ELEMENT
Deleting of a NE
MODIFY ELEMENT
NETWORK SEVERITY
CHANGE
BACKUP CONFIG
CC OPERATION
CONFIG DOWNLOAD
CREATE OBJECT
DELETE OBJECT
EQUIPMENT SEVERITY
CHANGE
PERIPH DOWNLOAD
RESET EQ.
CONTROLLER
SET ATTRIBUTES
SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD
SPECIAL ACTION
TS OPERATION
DATABASE BACKUP
RESTORE ALR
HISTORY
RESTORE PERF
SAVE PERF
12.
Tab. 12.1
Category
NMS
SPECIAL
NMS
USERS
Operation
Description
CLOSE PORT
CONNECT WSCS
DISCONNECT WSCS
Disconnection of a WS or of a CSB
OPEN PORT
CREATE USER
DELETE USER
MODIFY USER
233
12.
The NMS5UX Inspect command allows opening the Siae Inspect program for the control and
the analysis of the system processes and alarms (NMS5UX, HP OpenView,
workstation/server).
The selection of the command opens the Inspect window. The description and the using mode
of the window are reported into the administrator manual (NMS5UX Administrator manual).
234
13
13.
Legacy Network Alarm Hysteresis, it allows setting the hysteresis parameters that
characterizes the ringing alarms.
Warning. The command is available only for the user with superuser profile and it
affects only the NEs managed with the Legacy protocol.
Then, the command is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
SNMP Network Severity Code, it changes the network seriousness level couple
with the alarm 121 of a type of NE.
The network seriousness level is the level that characterizes the alarm when it is
displayed by the NMS5UX system 122.
The network seriousness level coupled with an alarm is common to all the NEs of the
same type present into all the maps managed by the supervisory system.
Warning. The command is available only for the user with superuser profile and it
affects only the NEs managed with the SNMP protocol.
to enable/disable the alarm and the forwarding status of the trap 123 executed by
the selected NE, to the supervisory system.
When the user has enabled an alarm, the detection (or reset) of such an alarm is
stored by the equipment and communicated to the supervisory system by means
121.
With the exception of the alarms relevant to the user inputs (refer to paragraph 7.1.5.2).
122.
For instance, let us suppose to have connected, to the NMS5UX system, two NEs with SDH Radio
type: NEA and NEB.
By means of the SNMP Equipment Severity Code command, the system locally defines that the
x alarm for the NEA has Normal seriousness level, while for the NEB has Minor seriousness
level. On the contrary, by means of the SNMP Network Severity Code command, the system
defines that the x alarm for all the SDH radio type NEs has Critical seriousness level.
Into the NEA, the detection (or reset) of the x alarm will be stored into the NE controller and
seen by the local management program (LCT) with Normal seriousness level, while it will be
seen by the NMS5UX system with Critical seriousness level. While into the NEB, the detection
(or reset) of the x alarm will be stored into the NE controller and seen by the local management
program (LCT) with Minor seriousness level, while it will be seen by the NMS5UX system with
Critical seriousness level.
235
13.
of the forwarding of the relevant trap (only if the trap forwarding function has been
enabled).
When the user has disabled an alarm, its detection (or reset) is not stored by the
equipment and not communicated to the supervisory system: as if the alarm has
never occurred.
To change the local seriousness level of the alarms 121 relevant to the selected
NE 122.
The local seriousness level is the level that characterizes the alarm when such
an alarm is stored into the NE controller and displayed by the local management
system (LCT).
For the same alarm, it is possible to define a local seriousness level different for
the several Network Elements.
Warning. This command is available only for the NEs managed with SNMP protocol,
except for the Elfo and SDH N+1 equipment.
D
superuser profile, can check the list of the NMS5UX users present into all the
OpenView maps; add, delete users and change the characteristics of the users,
create a new map.
entry, normal, advanced and privileged profiles, can change the password coupled
with his own users.
NMS5UX Logged Users, it allows displaying the list of the NMS5UX users connected
with the supervisory system and the list of the activated siae application programs
(browser, manager, etc. ).
SNMP LCT Equipment Users, it allows displaying and changing the LCT user list
of the selected Network Element.
Warning. This command is available only for the NEs managed with SNMP protocol,
except for the Elfo and SDH N+1 equipment.
SNMP LCT Logged Users, it displays the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX)
connected with the NE selected at the choice of the option; then, it allows forcing the
disconnection (logout) of one or more users.
Warning. This command is available only for the NEs managed with SNMP protocol,
except for the Elfo and SDH N+1 equipment.
SNMP NE Remote Element Table, it manages the remote equipment list of the
selected NE.
Warning. This command is available only for the NEs managed with SNMP protocol,
except for the Elfo and SDH N+1 equipment.
123.
The trap is the message (in this case, it is a detection or reset message of the alarm signal)
spontaneously forwarded by the NE to the supervisory system.
236
13.
SNMP Scheduled Sw Dwl Status, it displays the list of the NEs, managed with
SNMP protocol, that have been programmed for the updating of the equipment
software/firmware (sw/fw).
SNMP NE Sw/Fw Release, it displays the version and allows updating the
equipment software/firmware of the selected NE.
Warning. This command is available only for the NEs managed with SNMP protocol,
except for the Elfo and SDH N+1 equipment.
Legacy Scheduled Sw Dwl Status it displays the list of the NEs, managed with
Legacy protocol, that have been programmed for the updating of the equipment
software/firmware (sw/fw).
Warning. The command is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
237
13.
13.1
System access
User profile
The Legacy Network Alarm Hysteresis option allows setting the values of the t and n
parameters that define the observation hysteresis relevant to the ringing alarms 124.
Warning. The setting of the t and n parameters affects only the equipment managed
with the Legacy protocol.
Warning. The command is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
The choice of the option opens the Fleeting Alarms Manager window that contains the following
elements:
D
n box. It points out the number of transitions during the t time range.
To increase or to decrease the pointed out value, select the arrows placed on the side
of the box. It is possible to set a value comprised between 2 and 32.
Default pushbutton. It resets, into the t and n fields, the default values that
correspond to t=1 and n=10.
Apply pushbutton. It implements the new settings and it does not close the window.
Close pushbutton. It closes the window and does not execute the operation.
Warning. The t and n parameters are common parameters for all the equipment managed
with the Legacy protocol (network global parameters). Such parameters are periodically
forwarded from the central part toward the peripheral one through a broadcast message.
124.
238
More detailed information concerning the ringing alarms are reported at paragraph 7.1.7.
13.
13.2
System access
User profile
The SNMP Network Severity Code command allows displaying the seriousness level
coupled with the alarm signals 125 relevant to a specific type of NE.
Warning. This command is present into the menu only into the map windows, open with the
superuser profile.
At the command choice, the system displays the Siae Events Manager window shown in
Fig. 13.1.
By means of the commands present into the window, it is possible to change the seriousness
level coupled with the alarm signal (refer to paragraph 13.2.1.2).
Warning. The change of the seriousness level acoupled with an alarm is COMMON to all
the NEs of the same type present into all the OpenView maps.
The new seriousness level (called network level) will not be communicated to the NE because
the new setting affects only and exclusively the alarm indication of the NMS5UX supervisory
system.
The seriousness level (called local level) used to see the same alarm, by the NE and by the
local management system (LCT), is defined by means of the SNMP Equipment Severity Code
command (refer to the description at the beginning of the chapter and to paragraph 13.3).
125.
239
13.
Menu
bar (1)
NE types
managed
by the
NMS5UX
system
(2)
Alarms that
characterize
the selected
NE type (3)
Fig. 13.1
240
13.
Apply Changes. It confirms the changes executed for the seriousness level of the alarms.
To change the seriousness level of an alarm, execute the following procedure:
1.
Select into the Equipment area (refer to Fig. 13.1) the desired NE type.
2.
Into the area below, select the alarm for which the user wants to change the
seriousness level.
3.
4.
Category box, it is pointed out the NE type. The value of the field can not be
changed.
Trap ID box, it is pointed out the identification code of the trap coupled with the
alarm. The value of the field can not be changed.
Event Name box, it is pointed out the denomination of the alarm signal. The value
of the field can not be changed.
Severity box, it is pointed out the seriousness level of the alarm signal.
Open the Severity check box and select from the list the new seriousness level.
If the user chooses the Default pushbutton, the system resets the current setting.
5.
6.
Select, from the menu bar, the Action Apply Changes command.
The new value is removed from the New column and pointed out into the Severity
column.
241
13.
13.3
System access
User profile
The SNMP Equipment Severity Code command displays the list of the alarm signals that
characterize the selected NE type.
For each signal, it is pointed out the alarm status (enabled/disabled) and the forwarding status
of the relevant trap 126 from the NE to the NMS5UX system.
Warning. The command is available only if it has been selected a single Network Element
managed with SNMP protocol in connected status, except for the Elfo and SDH N+1
equipment..
At the command choice, the system displays the Equipment Severity Code window that is
composed by a table that lists the alarm signals, by a menu bar and by a lower status bar. These
elements are described into the following paragraphs.
By means of the commands present into the window, it is possible to execute the following
operations:
D
126.
to disable the alarm; in this case the detection (or the reset) of the alarm signal
is neither recorded into the NE controller nor communicated to the supervisory
program: as if the alarm has never occurred.
to disable the trap forwarding; in this case the detection (or the reset) of the alarm
signal is recorded into the NE controller but it is not communicated to the
supervisory system 128.
to enable the alarm and the trap forwarding; in this case the detection (or the reset)
of the alarm signal is recorded into the NE controller and communicated to the
supervisory program (by means of the forwarding of the relevant trap) that
displays it into the current alarms and into the alarm history (default condition).
The wording trap means a message (in this case a detection or a reset message of the alarm
signal) spontaneously forwarded by the NE to the supervisory system.
The wording alarm means the detection (or the reset) signal of an alarm that is stored into the
NE controller.
127.
It is possible to check the NEs that have at least a disabled alarm/trap opening the Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] windoe (refer to paragraph 12.1.1).
128.
Warning. If the user has forwarded an Configuration Upload command to the NE under
examination, the system will get also the alarm signals that have the relevant trap forwarding
disabled.
242
13.
To change the seriousness level coupled with the alarm signal 129 (refer to paragraph
13.3.2.2).
Warning. The change of the seriousness level coupled with an larm is LOCAL
and concerns only thr selected NE.
The local seriousness level is the level that characterizes the alarm because it is
stored into the NE controller and displayed by the local management system (LCT).
The seriousness level of the same alarm seen by the NMS5UX system, is defined
by means of the SNMP Network Severity Code command (refer to the description
at the beginning of the chapter and to paragraph 13.2).
"
Object. Name of the object (that represents one or more physical or logic parts of the NE)
coupled with the alarm signal.
"
Status. Status of the alarm and of the trap forwarding executed by the NE towards the
system. The wording:
Enabled means that the alarm and the trap forwarding are enabled.
Warning. The information present into the window corresponds to the status of the signals at
the time of the command selection or at the time of the operation.
The Sort By option pushbuttons allow ordering the list according to:
D
When the system executes the operation, it considers all the records stored into the database
and not only the displayed ones.
129.
243
13.
View/Modify Severity. It displays and allows changing the alarm enabling status/trap
forwarding and/or the seriousness level coupled with the selected alarm signal.
The command choice (available only after having selected a signal from the list) opens the
View/Modify Severity Code window that into the :
D
Status area, points out the alarm enabling status and the trap forwarding one relevant
to the signal.
If it has been activated the:
Enabled pushbutton, it means that the alarm and the trap forwarding is enabled.
Severity area, points out the seriousness level coupled with the signal.
The NMS5UX default wording, on the side of the seriousness level, points out the
default setting that the supervisory system has coupled with such a signal.
To change the alarm enabling status/trap forwarding and/or the seriousness level, execute
the following procedure:
1.
Select the option pushbutton relevant to the desired value respectively into the Status
and/or Severity area.
Warning. If it has been selected the Alarm Disabled option pushbutton (Status area),
it is not possible to change the seriousness level coupled with the alarm.
2.
"
244
Refresh Info. It executes a new reading of the database and refreshes the information
present into the window.
13.
At the command choice, the system refreshes the date/time (refer to paragraph 13.3.3) and
will point out the refreshing time.
Filter. It opens the View Filter window that allows filtering the list.
The filtering operation consists on defining one or more criteria in such a way that the
system displays only the records that comply with all the specified criteria.
To filter the data of a list, click on one or more boxes present into the window, according
to the criteria to be used. The activation of each box (the box is activated when inside it there
is the symbol n
) expands the window displaying a section that contains the following
options:
D
Match Object box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, the object to which
belongs the alarm signal.
To set the filter, select the desired object from the list.
Match Status box. In this section, it is possible to set, as filter, the forwarding status
of the traps/alarms. If the user activates the:
Enabled check box, the system will display the signals that have the relevant alarm
and trap forwarding enabled.
Trap Disabled check box, the system will display the signals that have the relevant
alarm and trap forwarding disabled.
Alarm Disabled check box, the system will display the signals that have the
relevant alarm disabled.
245
13.
246
the number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of yy). If it has
not been activated any record, the number of the displayed records corresponds to the
total number of records.
the date and the time when the window has been opened or refreshed (by means of
the choice of the Refresh Info command refer to paragraph 13.3.2.2).
13.
13.4
Warning. According to his own user profile, the user has to respect the specific
description.
The NMS5UX System Users command allows displaying the list of the NMS5UX users present
into all the existing OpenView maps.
At the command choice, the system displays the User Management window that is composed
by a table that lists the users and by a menu bar. These elements are described into the following
paragraphs.
By means of the commands present into the window, it is possible to execute the following
operations
D
"
Level. Profile of the NMS5UX user: Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser.
The description of the profiles is reported at paragraph 3.3.4.
"
Map name. Name of the OpenView map that contains the NMS5UX user.
"
"
Expiration time. Expiration date/time of the password coupled with the NMS5UX user.
247
13.
The wording Not expired points out that the user has not been coupled with any expiration
date.
"
Edit Menu
"
"
Into the User Management window, select the Edit Create Map command.
The system displays the Create new map window.
2.
To type, into the Map Name text box, the new map name (alphanumeric string with
minimum 6 and maximum 20 characters).
3.
Users Menu
"
Into the User Management window, select the Users Create command.
The system displays the Insert new users window.
2.
Select, into the Users list, the UNIX user to be coupled with the new NMS5UX one.
To each UNIX user, it can be coupled only a single NMS5UX user.
Into the list, the system points out only the UNIX users that have not coupled yet with
a NMS5UX user.
3.
Into the Login box (area Nms5ux Users), set the name of the new user.
Automatically, it is pointed out the name of the UNIX user selected at the preceding
step; it is possible to change it typing, into the text box, an alphanumeric string with
minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters.
248
13.
4.
From the Level list, select the option pushbutton relevant to the profile to be coupled
with the new user.
Warning. The Superuser pushbutton is not available because it is not possible to
create a second user with such a profile.
5.
6.
Internet, if you wish that the new user is acknowledged also by the Siae RAN
(Remote Access Nms5ux) application 130.
Ring Man., if you wish that the new user is acknowledged also by the Siae Ring
Manager application 130.
Define an expiration date of the password, into the Expiration data boxes.
Automatically, the system points out a default date 131; it is possible to change it typing,
into the text boxes, the day (Day box), the month (Month box) and the year (Year box)
or it is possible to avoid the coupling of a date for the expiration date of the password
activating the Life time check box.
7.
Into the Write text box (Password area), type the access code to be assigned to the
new user (alphanumeric string with minimum 6 and maximum 21 characters).
8.
Type again the access code into the Rewrite text box.
For privacy reasons, the system displays, into both boxes, an asterisk (*) for each
typed character.
9.
Select from the Map list, the map to be coupled with the user.
Into the list, the system displays all the available OpenView maps.
The system points out the name of the selected map into the Map associate box.
Warning. If the user to be created has the Advanced or Privileged profile, it is possible
to create a new map 132.
To execute the operation, it is sufficient to type, into the Map associate text box, the
map name (alphanumeric string with minimum 6 and maximum 20 characters).
130.
131.
The default setting can be changed by the user with superuser profile. For more detailled
information, refer to the documentation Siae NMS5UX Administrator manual.
132.
Also if it is possible to create a new map using the HP OpenView Window NNM commands, for
the creation of the maps of the NMS5UX system, IT IS NECESSARY to use the Create Map
command (see Edit menu) or the function provided during the user creation.
To change or to delete a OpenView map, use the HP OpenView Window NNM commands (refer
to the relevant documentation).
249
13.
1.
Into the User Management window, select the record relevant to the user to be
changed.
2.
3.
"
Into the User Management, select the record relevant to the user to be deleted.
Warning. Do not select the user with superuser profile, because it is not
possible to delete it.
2.
3.
13.4.2 Command use executed by the user with Entry, Normal, Advanced
or Privileged profiles
System access
User profile
The NMS5UX System Users command displays the characteristics of the user that has opened
the map and allows changing the password coupled with such a user (refer to paragraph
13.4.2.1).
At the command choice, the system displays the User Management window that is composed
by a table that lists the users (the description of the characteristics is the same one reported at
paragraph 13.4.1.1) and by a menu bar (described here below).
250
13.
Edit Menu
"
"
Users Menu
"
"
Into the User Management window, select the record relevant to the coupled users.
2.
3.
Into the Write text box (Password area), type the access code to be assigned to the
new user (alphanumeric string with minimum 6 maximum 21 characters).
4.
Type again the access code into the Rewrite text box.
For privacy reasons, the system displays, into both boxes, an asterisk (*) for each
typed character.
5.
"
251
13.
13.5
System access
User profile
134)
The lists (users and application programs) are not displayed at the same time into the Nms5ux:
Logged Users window (that is displayed at the option choice). The system displays such lists
as an alternative one each other according to the selected option pushbutton.
In fact, into the Nms5ux: Logged Users window, under the menu bar, there are the following
pushbuttons:
D
View Logged Users pushbutton. At the choice of this pushbutton, the system shows,
into the Nms5ux: Logged Users window, the list of the users. The description of the
information available for each user are pointed out at paragraph 13.5.1.
View Running Application pushbutton. At the choice of this pushbutton, the system
shows, into the Nms5ux: Logged Users window, the list of the application programs.
The description of the information available for each user are pointed out at paragraph,
13.5.2.
Through the options present into the window, when it has been activated the following:
D
View Logged Users pushbutton, the user can execute the following operations:
To forward a message to a user or to all the users present into the list (refer to
paragraph 13.5.3.2) in Running status.
View Running Application pushbutton, the user can execute the following operations:
133.
The users connected with the supervisory system are the ones that have an open map. In the case
of client/server systems, the system points out the users/application programs as of the local
machine as of the remote ones.
134.
The details concerning the application programs pointed out into the Nms5ux: Logged Users
window can be check activating the Application Name box into the Running Process
Filter window (View Set Filter) (refer to paragraph 13.5.3.3).
252
13.
Time. Date and time relevant to the user connection with the system (opening of the
SiaeWorld window).
"
"
"
Permission. Access type to the map: Read Only, Read/Write (refer to paragraph 3.4).
"
"
Server. IP address of the local or remote machine (workstation/server) on which it has been
installed the NMS5UX system.
"
Running, it points out that the user has been recorded as by the HP OpenView
system as by the NMS5UX one (normal functioning status of the user).
Out of NMS5UX, it points out that the user has been recorded by the HP OpenView
system but it has not been recorded by the NMS5UX one: HP OpenView open but
it has not been executed yet the login for the access to NMS5UX (transient status
of the user).
Not register, it points out that the user has been recorded as by the HP OpenView
system as by the NMS5UX one, but it has not been recorded yet to the domain
of NMS5UX: in such a case the system does not display the alarms of the
equipment (anomalous functioning status of the user).
Warning. For the users in Running status, the system dynamically refreshes the information
present into the table. For the users in Out of NMS5UX and Not Register statuses, it is necessary
to require for the refreshing operation selecting the Refresh Info pushbutton.
253
13.
"
Logical Addr.. Logic address and physical address relevant to the equipment or which the
system has opened the relevant Equipment window (information applicable only for the
Manager application program).
"
User Name. Name of the NMS5UX user who is using the application program.
"
Map Name. Name of the map that the user is currently using.
"
"
Server. IP address of the local or remote machine (workstation/server) on which it has been
installed the NMS5UX system used by the user.
Warning. The information present into the table correspond to the application programs on
progress at the option choice time or at the refresh execution time.
254
13.
2.
3.
4.
Into the confirmation window, the system displays the OK and Cancel pushbuttons.
If the B user, within 30 seconds from the window displaying, presses:
the Cancel pushbutton, he does not allow the execution of the request. On the
videoscreen of the A user, the system displays a message that informs that the
B user has not allowed the execution of his disconnection from the system.
If the B user, within 30 seconds from the window displaying, does not press any one
of the two pushbuttons, the system, according to the operating level of the user who
has forwarded the request (A user), executed the following procedure:
operating level of the A user, equal to or higher than the one of the B user.
The user is automatically disconnected.
operating level of the A user, lower than the one of the B user.
The user is not disconnected.
In both cases, on the videoscreen of the A user, the system displays a message that
points out the results of the operation.
"
2.
3.
"
Send Message. It forwards a message to an user (or to all users) present into the list in
Running status.
255
13.
2.
3.
4.
Selected Users pushbutton, to forward the message to the selected user only.
Broadcast pushbutton, to forward the message to all the users present into the
list.
5.
Write the message into the available text area (alphanumeric string composed by a
max. of 150 characters).
6.
"
Request Exit. It requires for the closing of an application program (browser, manager, etc.
134 ).
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected an application program.
With details, to require for the closing of an application program, it is necessary to execute
the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Into the confirmation window, the system displays the OK and Cancel pushbuttons.
If the B user, within 30 seconds from the window displaying, presses:
256
the Cancel pushbutton, he does not allow the closing of the application program.
On the videoscreen of the A user, the system displays a message that informs
that the B user has not allowed the closing of the application program.
13.
If the B user, within 30 seconds from the window displaying, does not press any one
of the two pushbuttons, the system, according to the operating level of the user who
has forwarded the request (A user), executed the following procedure:
operating level of the A user, equal to or higher than the one of the B user.
The application program is automatically closed.
operating level of the A user, lower than the one of the B user.
The application program is not automatically closed.
In both cases, on the videoscreen of the A user, the system displays a message that
points out the results of the operation.
"
Forced Exit. It forces the closing of an application program (browser, manager, etc. 134).
Warning. This option is available for the superuser user only if it has been selected
an application program open by a user in Running status.
With details, to require for the closing of an application program, it is necessary to execute
the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
"
Refresh Info. It executes a new reading of the database and refreshes the information
present into the window.
Set Filter. It opens the Running Process Filter that allows filtering the list.
The filtering operation consists on defining one or more criteria in such a way that the
system displays only the records that comply with all the specified criteria.
To filter a list, activate one or more boxes 135 present into the Running Process Filter
window, according to the criteria to be used. The activation of each box expands the window
displaying an additional area. The available criteria are the following ones:
D
Application Name box. Into this area, it is possible to set, as filter, a group of
application programs or a specific one executing the following procedure:
a.
135.
257
13.
b.
The groups that group the application programs are the ones pointed out here below:
Application, browser (for instance Alarm history, Current Alarm, etc.) and
several application programs (for instance Software Downlaod etc.).
Warning. The Application Name box is available only if into the Nms5ux: logged
Users window, it has been activated the View Running Application
pushbutton.
D
User Name box. Into this area, it is possible to set the NMS5UX user as filter.
Select the name of the desired user from the list of the existing users.
Map Name box. Into this area, it is possible to set, as filter, the map coupled with the
NMS5UX user.
Select the name of the map from the list of the existing maps.
After having set the criteria, choose the OK pushbutton (it executes the filtering and closes
the Running Process Filter) or the Apply one (it executes the command and does not close
the window).
The system will display, into the Nms5ux: logged Users only the records that comply with
all the activated options. Each time that the system filters the list, it considers all the records,
as the displayed ones as the hidden ones.
To delete the activation of all the filters and to display the complete list of the operations,
choose the Clear pushbutton.
Warning. When the operator closes the Nms5ux: logged Users, the system automatically
removes the possible activation of the filters.
258
13.
13.6
System access
User profile
The SNMP LCT Equipment Users command allows displaying and changing the LCT user
list of the selected Network Element.
Each NE managed with the SNMP protocol is provided with a user list to which it is possible
to be connected by means of the LCT program 136. The user list is stored into the main
controller of the Network Element.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected a single Network
Element managed with SNMP protocol in connected status, except for the Elfo and SDH
N+1 equipment..
At the command choice, the system displays the LCT User Manager window that is composed
by a table that lists the users and by a series of pushbuttons. These elements are described
into the following paragraphs.
By means of the pushbuttons present into the window, it is possible to execute the following
operations:
D
To change the characteristics of the users present into the list (refer to para. 13.6.2).
Warning. The LCT user list can be changed also by means of the command present into the
Equipment window. For more detailed information, refer to the specific equipment User Manual
(refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
136.
Local Craft Terminal. For more detailled information, refer to paragrap 6.5 or to the help on
line/manuals SCT/LMT and LCT <name of the NE>.
259
13.
"
"
Read only, it can check the parameters but it can not forward commands or
execute changes into the LCT program.
Read and Write and Station Operator, it can as check the parameters as forward
commands or execute changes into the LCT program.
No timeout points out that the option is disabled, this means that the user is not
automatically disconnected after a certain time.
<number> Sec. points out that the option is enabled, this means that the user, if
the program does not execute any operation, is automatically disconnected after
pointed out time.
Under the table, it is pointed out the type and the logic address of the selected Network Element.
2.
Into the User box, type the name of the user (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and
maximum 8 characters).
Warning. It is not possible to assign the same name to two different users present into
the same list. Then, when the system has assigned the name of the user, it can not
be changed later.
3.
Into the Password box, type the access code of the user (alphanumeric string with
minimum 1 and maximum 8 characters).
4.
Into the Confirm Password box, type again the access code of the user.
5.
Into the Timeout area, select one of the following option pushbuttons:
137.
The program manages a polling process to check the presence of the LCTequipment
connection.
If the equipment does not answer to the polling queries for the set time (timeout), the user is
disconnected and then, also the equipment is disconnected.
260
13.
Timeout, if when the user does not execute any operation, he has to be
disconnected after the time set into the Sec box.
To change the time, activate the Sec. box and type a value between 1 second and
43200 seconds (12h).
6.
Into the Profile area, select the option pushbutton relevant to the profile to be assigned
to the user: Read only, Read and Write or Station Operator.
7.
8.
"
Into the LCT User Manager window, select the record relevant to the user.
2.
3.
4.
"
Into the LCT User Manager window, select the record relevant to the user.
2.
3.
At the displaying of the message Would you really remove..., press the Ok
pushbutton.
"
Refresh. It executes a new reading of the database and refreshes the information present
into the window.
"
261
13.
13.7
System access
User profile
The SNMP LCT Logged Users option displays the list of the users (LCT 138 and NMS5UX)
connected with the selected NE at the choice of the option.
Warning. The option is available only if it has been selected a single Network Element
managed with SNMP protocol in connected status, except for the Elfo and SDH N+1
equipment..
At the choice of the option, the system displays the Logged Users window composed by a table
that lists the users and by a bar with the menus described into the following paragraphs.
By means of the options present into the window, it is possible to execute the following
operations:
D
To force the disconnection (logout) of a user present into the list (refer to paragraph
13.7.2.2).
Warning. The subject operation is not available for the user with Normal and Entry
profile.
Warning. The disconnection of a user (LCT or NMS5UX) from a NE can be executed also
through the options present into the Equipment window. For more detailed information, refer to
the specific equipment user Manual (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
"
138.
The LCT user is a user connected with the equipment through the Local Craft Terminal local
management program. For more detailed information, refer to paragraph 6.5 or to the SCT/LMT
and LCT <NE identification text> manuals.
262
13.
Read only, points out that the user can check the parameters but he can not
forward commands or execute changes for the parameters.
Read and Write or Station Operator it points out that the user can as check the
parameters as forward commands or execute changes for the parameters.
System it points out that the user can as check the parameters as forward
commands or execute changes for the parameters. Then, this profile is equipped
with the administrator options (for instance creation/deleting/changing of LCT
users).
Warning. For the NMS5UX user, the system does not point out the relevant profile used into
the NMS5UX graphical interface (Level parameter refer to paragraph 13.4.1.1), but it
points out the profile through which the equipment controller and the LCT management
application program acknowledge the NMS5UX user: System profile.
"
Ip Address. IP address of the machine 139 where the LCT program or the NMS5UX
graphical interface, used by the user, are on progress.
Under the table, the system points out the logic address and the type of the selected Network
Element.
Warning. The information present into the table correspond to the characteristics of the users
connected to the equipment at the selection time of the command or at the execution time of
the refresh procedure.
Refresh Info. It executes a new reading of the database and refreshes the information
present into the window.
"
Force Logout. It forwards the disconnection command (logout) from the equipment for the
selected user.
139.
Personal Computer for the LCT users or workstation/server for the NMS5UX users.
263
13.
Warning. This command is not available for the user with Normal and Entry profile.
With details, to disconnect a user, it is necessary to execute the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
Warning. If it has been forced the logout of a NMS5UX user, the supervisory system
automatically executes the restore of the user connection.
264
13.
13.8
System access
User profile
The NE Remote Element Table command displays the remote equipment list stored in the
controller of the selected equipment.
Each equipment is provided with a remote equipment list 140 stored in its controller.
Warning. The option is available only if it has been selected a single Network Element
managed with SNMP protocol in connected status, except for the Elfo and SDH N+1
equipment.
The selection of the command opens the window shown in Fig. 13.2.
By means of the commands present in the window:
D
add, rename and delete a station from the remote equipment list
add, modify, delete and move an equipment within the remote equipment list
add more equipment at the same type to the remote equipment list
save the remote equipment list to a file and then restore the remote equipment list
from a file
140.
When the user requires the connection to an equipment, the SCT/LMT program reads, its remote
equipment list and automatically sends the connection command to all the equipment present in
the list.
265
13.
Menu
bar (1)
Station
(2)
Equipment
belonging
to the
station (3)
Element Manager, indicates the Element Manager of the equipment (for example the
Siae supervision system).
Not Managed, indicates an element not managed by SCT/LMT. The option can be
used to insert information in the remote equipment list.
Fig. 13.2
266
13.
2.
Select the Options SIAE Options SNMPNE Remote Element Table command.
The Remote Element Table window opens.
3.
4.
Type, in the text box, the name you wish to assign to the station (alphanumeric string
of minimum 1 and maximum 11 characters).
Warning. It is not possible to assign the same name to two different stations.
5.
Press Ok.
The new station is added at the bottom of the list of already existing station.
6.
2.
Select the Options SIAE Options SNMPNE Remote Element Table command.
The Remote Element Table window opens.
3.
4.
5.
Type, in the text box, the new name (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum
11 characters).
Warning. It is not possible to assign the same name to two different stations.
6.
Press Ok.
The name of the station is modified.
7.
267
13.
2.
Select the Options SIAE Options SNMPNE Remote Element Table command.
The Remote Element Table window opens.
3.
4.
5.
Press OK.
The station is deleted.
6.
2.
Select the Options SIAE Options SNMPNE Remote Element Table command.
The Remote Element Table window opens.
3.
Select the station which you wish to associate the equipment to.
Warning. An equipment can be associated only to a single station.
4.
5.
6.
In the Element Type area, select the pushbutton relevant to the type of element you
wish to insert. The option:
268
Managed by SCT, points out the Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT
program.
13.
7.
Remote link, points out the Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT
program that constitutes the equipment located at the other side of the radio
link with respect to the local equipment.
Element Manager, points out the Element Manager of the equipment (for
example Siae supervision system).
Not Managed, points out an element not managed by SCT/LMT. The option
can be used to insert information into the remote equipment list.
Only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network, set the Gosip address executing
the following procedure:
a.
b.
To change the part of System ID of the Gosip Address, press the Settings
pushbutton.
The program display the Settings window.
c.
Type into the boxes the value of the 6 bytes that compose System ID
d.
Press OK
e.
To change the default part of the Gosip Address, press the Setup Default
pushbutton.
The program display the Gosip Default Option window.
f.
To change the AFI, IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved parameters, type, into the relevant
boxes, the value of the corresponding byte/s.
g.
To change the Domain parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box
and select the desired value from the list.
To add a value to the list:
Into the Label box, type a name for the domain under examination.
Into the Hex value boxes, type the values of the bytes that represent the
domain.
Press OK.
h.
To change the Area parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and
select the desired value from the list.
To add or to remove a value from the list, execute the same procedures already
pointed out for the Domain parameter.
i.
8.
Press OK.
Press OK.
Under the selected station, a record named Equipment < progressive number> is
displayed, with the characteristics of the new equipment.
269
13.
9.
2.
Select the Options SIAE Options SNMPNE Remote Element Table command.
The Remote Element Table window opens.
3.
Select the station which you wish to associate the equipment to.
Warning. An equipment can be associated only to a single station.
4.
b.
Select one or more boxes, according to the criteria you wish to use.
The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section containing
the following options:
Match connection status box. Status of the connection between the NE and
NMS5UX.
To set the criterion, select the pushbutton relevant to the wished status.
c.
270
Press the OK (executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (executes
the command and does not close the window) pushbutton.
13.
The table displays only the records that satisfy the activated criteria.
In the window there are also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and
displays the complete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not
executes the operation) pushbuttons.
5.
Select the equipment you wish to add to the remote equipment list.
6.
In the Element Type area, select the pushbutton relevant to the type of elements you
wish to insert. The option:
7.
Managed by SCT, points out the Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT
program.
Remote link, points out the Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program
that constitutes the equipment located at the other side of the radio link with
respect to the local equipment.
Element Manager, points out the Element Manager of the equipment (for example
Siae supervision system).
Not Managed, points out an element not managed by SCT/LMT. The option can
be used to insert information into the remote equipment list.
Press the OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes
the command and does not close the window) pushbutton.
Under the selected station, a record named Equipment <progressive number> is
displayed, for each new equipment.
8.
2.
Select the Options SIAE Options SNMPNE Remote Element Table command.
The Remote Element Table window opens.
3.
4.
5.
To modify the IP address, type the new value in the IP address box.
Warning. It is not possible to assign to the equipment an IP Address already present
in the list.
271
13.
6.
7.
To modify the type of element, select the wished pushbutton in the Element Type area.
The option:
Managed by SCT, points out the Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT
program.
Remote link, points out the Siae equipment managed by the SCT/LMT program
that constitutes the equipment located at the other side of the radio link with
respect to the local equipment.
Element Manager, points out the Element Manager of the equipment (for example
Siae supervision system).
Not Managed, points out an element not managed by SCT/LMT. The option can
be used to insert information into the remote equipment list.
b.
To change the part of System ID of the Gosip Address, press the Settings
pushbutton.
The program display the Settings window.
c.
Type into the boxes the value of the 6 bytes that compose System ID
d.
Press OK
e.
To change the default part of the Gosip Address, press the Setup Default
pushbutton.
The program display the Gosip Default Option window.
f.
To change the AFI, IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved parameters, type, into the relevant
boxes, the value of the corresponding byte/s.
g.
To change the Domain parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box
and select the desired value from the list.
To add a value to the list:
Into the Label box, type a name for the domain under examination.
Into the Hex value boxes, type the values of the bytes that represent the
domain.
Press OK.
h.
To change the Area parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and
select the desired value from the list.
To add or to remove a value from the list, execute the same procedures already
pointed out for the Domain parameter.
i.
272
Press OK.
13.
8.
Press OK.
The characteristics of the equipment are modified according to the new setting.
9.
2.
Select the Options SIAE Options SNMPNE Remote Element Table command.
The Remote Element Table window opens.
3.
4.
5.
Press Ok.
The equipment is deleted.
6.
2.
Select the Options SIAE Options SNMPNE Remote Element Table command.
The Remote Element Table window opens.
3.
4.
b.
c.
Press Ok.
The equipment is moved to the selected station.
273
13.
5.
6.
Edit Exchange Before command, to move the equipment over the previous
equipment.
Edit Exchange After command, to move the equipment under the next
equipment.
2.
Select the Options SIAE Options SNMPNE Remote Element Table command.
The Remote Element Table window opens.
3.
4.
5.
Type the name of the file in the proper box (with extension .rel) and set the path where
you wish to save the file.
6.
2.
Select the Options SIAE Options SNMPNE Remote Element Table command.
The Remote Element Table window opens.
3.
4.
Select the file (with extension .rel) where the wished remote equipment list is stored.
5.
274
13.
13.9
System access
User profile
Warning. The SNMP NE Sw/Fw Download command is available only if it has been
selected one or more Network Elements managed with SNMP protocol of the same type,
except for the Elfo and SDH N+1 equipment.
The SNMP NE Sw/Fw Download command allows executing the updating operation of the
equipment software/firmware (sw/fw) relevant to the selected NE or to the selected NEs.
The equipment sw/fw is the assembly of all the sw/fw necessary for the management of the
entire NE (sw/fw of the main controller and sw/fw of the peripheral units).
The equipment sw/fw is present into the main controller that is provided with two memory
benches: one for service and the other one for waiting . Each bench can contain a version (also
a different one) of the equipment sw/fw (refer to paragraph 13.11). It is possible to update the
equipment sw/fw of a bench at a time.
Warning. The system automatically updates the sw/fw relevant to the memory bench not on
progress or not present (refer to Fig. 13.4).
The updating of the equipment sw/fw can be immediately executed (only if it has been selected
a single NE) or it can be programmed for a defined date/time (advised option).
In the first case, the operation is executed in real time. In the second case, it is scheduled and
it will be the system to execute the updating at the date/time programmed by the user (refer to
paragraph 13.10).
In both cases, the execution of the download, for each selected NE, depends on the following
conditions:
D
the LOM/LCT program has not to be connected to the NE, in Configuration mode.
If the updating of the equipment sw/fw is immediately executed and the NE is not in one of the
above listed conditions, the operation is not executed.
Also if the updating is scheduled and if at the time (date/time) when it has been programmed,
the NE is not into the above listed conditions, the operation is not executed, but in this case at
regular times, the system will check the NE condition, until when:
D
the NE is removed by the list of the NE scheduled for the download (refer to paragraph
13.10.2.1).
The procedure to update the equipment sw/fw is reported at the paragraph 13.9.1.
275
13.
Into the map window, select the NE or the NEs of the same type for which it is
necessary to update the equipment sw/fw.
2.
3.
Into the Selection file DWL box, set the file to be used for the updating operation.
It is possible to type the path (home/ftp) and the file name or to choose the Select
pushbutton (the system opens the Select file for download window) and to select the
file among the available ones 141.
Warning. If the file to be used for the operation is not into the home/ftp folder, it is
necessary to copy it into such a folder because the supervisory system, to execute
correctly the download operation, needs for finding the updating file into the home/ftp
folder.
If the user chooses the Read pushbutton, it is possible to display a brief description
that shows the contents of the selected file.
4.
Forced, if the refresh procedure of the sw/fw relevant to the main controller of the
equipment is on progress.
Only different or not present, if the refresh procedure of the sw/fw relevant to
peripheral units (FPGA file and/or application code) is on progress.
5.
Activate the Bench switch? box, if the user wants that, at the end of the download, the
system automatically executes a switching of the memory bench in such a way that
it is used the bench with the updated sw/fw.
6.
Set the execution mode of the download. If the user wants that the updating operation
is:
D
7.
141.
scheduled to be executed later, he has to set the date/time into the Scheduling
data time for Download area.
activated the Immediate Download box, the system displays a window that points
out the physical address, the logic one and the NE type for which it is on progress
The files are identified by the .dwl extension and by a name composed by 8 characters. With
details the:
S1 character identifies the technology (S=SDH, P=PDH, M=PMP).
S2 character identifies the equipment type (R=Radio, M=Multiplex)
S3 ... 6 characters identify the product number.
S7, 8 characters identify the most significant digits of the version.
276
13.
the sw/fw updating operation, and the status of the operation (Waiting,
Downloading, Complete, etc.). The execution of this operation needs for several
minutes.
Warning. Before startingup the updating operation, the NE controller executes
a compatibility check between the sw/fw to be forwarded and the one present into
the controller itself.
The check consists on the checking the technology and the NE type (pointed out
by the first 2 characters 141 of the file name) 142.
If the parameters results compatible one each other, the system starts the
download procedure. On the contrary, it will not been executed the sw/fw updating
operation.
If the operation is successfully executed, when the user opens the RelSw window
(refer to paragraph 13.11), into the Release box relevant to the updated memory
bench, the system points out the new sw/fw version.
If the operation is not successfully executed, the system keeps pointed out, into
the Status box relevant to the updated memory bench, the old version or displays
the wording not loaded.(refer to Fig. 13.4).
D
set an execution date/time for the updating operation of the sw/fw, the system
closes the Software Download window.
Into the list of the equipment scheduled for the download (refer to paragraph
13.10), the system adds a record for each NE present into the Equipment list for
download area (refer to Fig. 13.3.).
142.
Warning. For some types of NE, the system executes also checks on the third character of the file
name. More detailled information are reported into the equipment User Manual relevant to the
specific NE type (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
277
13.
Choose this
pushbutton to check
the NE list that have
been scheduled for
the updating operation
of the equipment sw/fw
(3)
(1) If the user selects a NE and clicks quickly twice, the system opens the RelSw window (refer to
paragraph 13.11) that points out the version of the equipment sw/fw present into the memory
benches of the NE.
(2) The NE status is the indication of the connection status, of the LCT presence, of the marking
status of the alarms, etc. With details, the wording:
S Con points out that the NE is in connected status.
S Dis points out that the NE is in disconnected status.
S Nev_Con points out that the NE is in disconnected status (it has never been
connected).
S Unrea points out that the NE is in unreachable status.
S Mant points out that the NE is in maintenance status (operation on progress).
S Lom_Mon points out that the LCT program is connected to the NE in Monitoring mode.
S Lom_Conf points out that the LCT program is connected to the NE in Configuring mode.
S SwDl points out that the download of the equipment sw/fw is on progress.
(3) The choice of the pushbutton opens the Scheduling download window described at paragraph
13.10.
Fig. 13.3
278
13.
The SNMP Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command allows displaying the list of the NEs,
managed with SNMP protocol, that have been scheduled for the updating operation of the
equipment software/firmware (sw/fw).
At the command choice, the system displays the Scheduling download window composed by
a table that lists the NEs, by a menu bar and by a lower status bar. These elements are described
into the following paragraphs.
By means of the commands present into the window, it is possible to execute the following
operations:
D
To stop the updating operation of the equipment sw/fw (refer to paragraph 13.10.2.1).
"
Type. NE type.
"
Time Scheduling. Date (day/month/year) and time (hour/minute/second) for which it has
been programmed the updating operation of the equipment sw/fw.
"
Time start Date (day/month/year) and time (hour/minute/second) when it has been started
the updating operation of the equipment sw/fw.
"
"
F. The presence of the x points out that during the download, the system updates the entire
equipment sw/fw (refer to paragraph 13.9.1).
"
O. The presence of the x points out that during the download, the system updates only
the parts (code and FPGA file) that have a version different from the one present into the
NE or that are missing ones (refer to paragraph 13.9.1).
279
13.
"
B. The presence of the x points out that during the download, the system automatically
executes a switching of the memory bench in such a way that the system uses the bench
with the updated sw/fw (refer to paragraph 13.9.1).
"
"
Downloading points out that the updating operation of the equipment sw/fw is on
progress.
Waiting points out that the updating operation of the sw/fw has not been yet executed
143.
Complete points out that the updating operation of the sw/fw has been successfully
executed.
Incomplete points out that the updating operation of the sw/fw has been executed in
an incomplete way or that the operation is failed.
In this case, it is advisable to execute or to program again the updating operation of
the equipment sw/fw.
"
File. File name (with .dwl extension) used for the download.
The presence of the symbol points out that the information is not available because it is a
not significant one for the current status of the operation (refer to the Status column).
Deleted All. It deletes all the NEs present into the list with the exception of the ones for
which the updating operation of the sw/fw is on progress (wording Downloading into the
Status field refer to paragraph 13.10.1).
143.
Warning. It is possible that the system points out, into the Time Scheduling field, a programmation
date/time older than the current one.
This means that the NE, at the programmation time of the operation, was not in the correct
condition for the execution of the download. In this case, the system tries again to execute, at
regular times, the updating operation of the sw/fw.
More detailled information concerning the execution modes of the download are reported at the
paragraph 13.9.
280
13.
"
Deleted Select. It deletes all the selected NEs with the exception of the ones for which the
updating operation of the sw/fw is on progress (wording Downloading into the Status field
refer to paragraph 13.10.1).
"
Deleted Completed. It deletes the present NEs for which it has already been executed the
download procedure (wording Complete into the Status field refer to paragraph 13.10.1).
"
"
Progress. During a downloading operation, the selection of this command opens the Win
Progress window that points out the operation progress status.
The selection of the command opens the Win Progress window that contains the following
elements:
D
<list of the updated sw/fw components>. The colour of the component points out its
updating status. With details, if the colour of the wording is:
green, it points out that the component has already been updated.
white, it points out that the component has not been updated yet.
Warning. The user can open only one Win Progress window at a time.
"
281
13.
The SNMP NE Sw/Fw Release command allows checking the version of the equipment
software/firmware relevant to the selected NE.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected a Network Element
managed with the SNMP protocol in connected status, except for the Elfo and SDH N+1
equipment.
At the command choice, the system displays the RelSw window shown in Fig. 13.4.
By means of the commands present into the window, it is possible to execute the following
operations:
D
282
to switch the functioning of the memory benches of the main controller (refer to
paragraph 13.11.1.2).
13.
(2)
List of the
codes and of
the FPGA
files that
compose the
equipment
sw/fw (3)
FW_boot points out the boot code. This part of the code can not be updated in fact it
does not have at disposal a version into the memory benches.
conf_... or fpga... points out the configuration file of the programmable devices.
S Actual release, the version of the code or of the FPGA file present into the controller (main
controller or peripheral unit one)
S Release bench 1 and Release bench 2, the sw/fw version present respectively into the
memory bench 1 and 2 of the main controller.
Fig. 13.4
NMS5UX Release 6.4 MN.00144.E 001
283
13.
13.11.1.1
Download
The Download pushbutton allows updating the sw/fw of the selected NE.
The choice of this pushbutton opens the Software Download window. The description and the
use of this window are reported at paragraph 13.9.1.
Warning. The system automatically updates the sw/fw of the memory bench not currently on
progress or not present (wording loaded or not loaded refer to Fig. 13.4).
It is not possible to execute the operation when the updating operation of the sw/fw is already
on progress (wording downloading).
13.11.1.2
Switch bench
The Switch bench pushbutton allows switching the functioning of the memory benches
relevant to the selected NE.
At the command choice, the system displays a window that points out (by means of messages)
the operations that the system executes during the switching of the benches.
At the end of the operation, the bench in running status is forces on loaded status and vice versa
144.
Warning. It is not possible to switch the memory bench when the updating operation of the sw/fw
is on progress (wording downloading refer to Fig. 13.4) and when, into a bench, it is not present
the equipment sw/fw (wording not loaded).
144.
Warning. The operation causes an automatic disconnection and new connection of the NE. If the
new connection is not successfully executed, the NE gets the unreachable status and, at regular
times, the supervisory system will automatically forward the reconnection command.
284
13.
Warning. The Legacy NE Sw/Fw Download option is available only if it has been
selected one or more Network Elements managed with Legacy protocol of the same
type.
Then the subject option is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
The Legacy NE Sw/Fw Download option allows executing the refresh of the equipment
software/firmware (sw/fw) of the selected NE or NEs.
The refresh of the equipment sw/fw can be immediately executed (only if it has been selected
a single NE) or it can be programmed for a defined date/hour (suggested option).
In the first case, the operation is executed in real time. In the second case, it is scheduled and
the system will execute the refresh at the date/time programmed by the user (refer to paragraph
13.13).
In both cases, the execution of the download for each selected NE is submitted to the following
conditions:
D
If the equipment sw/fw refresh is immediately executed and the NE has not one of the above
listed conditions, the system does not execute the operation.
Also if the refresh is scheduled and at the programmation time (date/time) the NE is not in the
above listed conditions, the system does not execute the operation, but in this case, at regular
time ranges, the system will check the NE condition until when:
D
the NE is in the correct condition and then the system executes the download.
285
13.
Into the map window, select the NE or the NEs of the same type with the equipment
sw/fw to be refreshed.
2.
3.
Into the File Selection box, set the file to be used for the refresh operation.
It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or to choose the Select
pushbutton (the system opens the shSel window) and to select the file among the
available ones.
4.
Set the download execution mode. If the user wants that the refresh is:
D
5.
scheduled to be executed later, activate the Scheduled Download box and set the
date/time into the successive boxes (day, month, year, hour, minutes).
6.
286
13.
Choose this
pushbutton to check
the NE list that have
been scheduled for the
updating operation of
the equipment sw/fw (1)
Fig. 13.5
287
13.
The Legacy Scheduled Sw Dwl Status option allows displaying the list of the NEs managed
through the Legacy protocol, that have been scheduled for the refresh of the equipment
software/firmware (sw/fw).
Warning. The subject option is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
At the command choice, the system displays the Scheduled Download Viewer window. Such
a window is composed by a table that lists the NEs and by a menu bar that is described into
the following paragraphs.
By means of the options present into the window, it is possible to execute the following
operations:
D
To stop the refresh procedure of the equipment sw/fw (refer to paragraph 13.13.2.3).
"
"
Type. NE type.
"
"
"
"
288
13.
Waiting points out that the sw/fw refresh has not been yet executed 145.
Check Eq. Status points out that the status control of the equipment is on progress
(operation executed before the download).
Downloading points out that the refresh of the equipment sw/fw is on progress.
Completed points out that the refresh of the equipment sw/fw has been successfully
executed.
Failed points out that the refresh of the equipment sw/fw has not been completely
executed or the operation is failed.
In this case, it is advisable to execute or to program newly the refresh of the equipment
sw/fw.
Aborted points out that the refresh of the equipment sw/fw has been interrupted.
The system can point out into the Status column the status of the operation and also a
selfexplaining message.
The presence of the symbol points out that the information is not available because it is not
a significant one for the current status of the operation.
145.
Warning. Into the Scheduled Time field, the system can points out a programmation date/time
preceeding the current one. This means that the NE, at the programmation time of the operation,
was not in the correct condition for the execution of the download. In this case, the system retries
to execute the sw/fw refresh at regular time ranges.
More detailed information concerning the execution modes of the download are reported at the
paragraph 13.12.
289
13.
13.13.2.2
Options Menu
"
Remove. It deletes the selected NE with the exception of the one for which the sw/fw
refresh is on progress (Downloading wording into the Status field).
"
View Download Info. It displays the details of the information relevant to the refresh of the
selected sw/fw.
The choice of the command opens the Swdl Information window that points out the following
information:
"
Selected File, path and file name used for the refresh.
Download Status, status of the download operation. The description of the several
steps is reported at paragraph 13.13.1.
Refresh Info. It executes a new reading of the database and refreshes the information
present into the window.
At the choice of the option, the system will refresh the date/time (present into the status bar
of the window) and it will point out the time of the refresh execution.
13.13.2.3
"
Actions Menu
290
13.
13.14 HW INVENTORY
System access
User profile
Filter settings
291
13.
By means of the commands present in the table, it is possible to execute the following
operations:
D
to display/filter the hardware inventory data of the NEs present in the network (see
paragraph 13.14.1)
2.
Select the interested equipment types (Equipment Type)146. The multiple selection is
allowed.
3.
to insert the value of Customer ID, type the string in the text field and select
the Add pushbutton. It is possible to use the asterisk symbol (*) as jolly
character only at the end of the alphanumeric string
to delete a value of Customer ID, select it in the list and select the Del
pushbutton
4.
Fill the IP Address field: only the hardware inventory data of the equipment with the
specified physical address will be displayed. It is possible to use the asterisk symbol
(*) as jolly character for the fields of the IP address, but only for the last fields (that is
the asterisk cannot be before a field with numbers)147
5.
Select the types of units (Unit Type field) 148. It is possible to specify, for each
equipment type, which units must not be displayed (at most three types of units). The
procedure is the following:
select the Not managed unit type pushbutton: the FilterUnitType window
opens
in the upper box, select the equipment type (only the single selection is
possible)
in the lower box, select the units which you wish not to display in the Unit Type
field for that equipment type (the multiple selection is allowed). Select the
Select All pushbutton to select all the units or the Unselect All pushbutton
to deselect all the units.
select the Write pushbutton to confirm the settings and close the window.
146.
This filter option is mandatory, while all the other ones are optional.
147.
For example, 172.18.54.* or 172.18.*.* are accepted as filters on the IP address, while
172.18.*.215 is refused (the system answer with an error message).
148.
This filter setting is meaningful only for the Expansion display modality.
292
13.
6.
If the format or the number of the characters of the typed string is not exact, the system
displays an error message.
7.
Select the Read pushbutton: the lower part of the window displays a table containing
the hardware data relevant to the NEs of the selected type. The maximum type of rows
displayed per page is pointed out by the Max Row field 149.
The displayed hardware parameters are:
8.
Select the Expansion radio button to display in the table the rows relevant to the
hardware data of the units that compose a given equipment.
Select the Compact radio button to display in the table only the hardware data of an
unit for each equipment 150.
9.
Select the Read pushbutton: the table with the hardware inventory data is displayed.
10. To delete all the set filter options, select the Reset Filter pushbutton.
Select the Export pushbutton: a window opens displaying a link with the name of the
149.
150.
In case of Compact displaying, in order to switch to the Expansion modality it is sufficient to select
the Exp. pushbutton next to each row of the table. The table shows the hardware data relevant
only to the selected equipment (the address of the selected equipment is forced in the IP address
field).
293
13.
The exported file will contain all the hardware inventory data achieved by the search and not only
those relevant to the displayed records. The type of the exported file can be defined by the
superuser user and can be one of the following: .cvs, .xml, .cvs zipped, .xml zipped.
Select the Export timer pushbutton: a window opens displaying the filter conditions
set in the HW Inventory window (Filter description for insert box).
2.
Type in the Name field a name for the filter you are setting.
3.
Insert in the Step day field the day periodicity when the scheduled export of the data
is executed and, in the Export hour field, the time of the day when the export is
executed.
4.
5.
To delete an unwished schedulated export, select the corresponding row in the Filter
description for deleted box and select the Deleted pushbutton.
6.
Select the Chiudi pushbutton to close the window and go back to the HW Inventory
window.
The exported file will be saved in the /OPT/NMS5UX/EXP HW INV directory, in both the .cvs
and .xml format, and will be named HwInvfiltername[date__time] where filtername is the
name given by the operator during the creation of the filter for the exporting.
151.
Il nome ed il tipo del file sono determinati automaticamente e possono essere modificati dal
superuser.
294
14
14.
Proxy Equipment List, it displays the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy
Agent, their Proxy address and the address of the machines to which the Proxy has
to forward the equipment traps.
Warning. The Proxy Agent function is an optional one. The function and the subject
option are available if requested by the Customer only.
Equipment Find, it executes the search of an equipment using, as criteria, the logic
and/or physical address of the equipment.
295
14.
14.1
EQUIPMENT LIST/LOCATE
System access
User profile
The Equipment List/Locate command displays the list of all the equipment known by the
NMS5UX system.
Warning. If the profile of the user who has selected the command is:
D
Superuser, the information refer to the equipment present into all the maps managed
by the supervisory system.
Entry, Normal, Advanced or Privileged, the information refer only to the equipment
present into the actually open map.
At the choice of the Equipment List/Locate command, the system displays the Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] window that is composed by a table that lists the equipment, by a menu
bar and by a lower status bar. These elements are described into the following paragraphs.
Warning. At the window opening, the system can display a Warning window that points out that,
into the database, there is a number of equipment higher than N.
For this reason, the system asks if the user wants to make available information concerning the
PM measurements (the execution of this operation can need for an extremely long time). If the
user chooses the:
D
Yes pushbutton, the system will open the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window
and it will be possible, for every NE into the list, to check the active status of the PM
measurements (Perf. column).
No pushbutton, the system will open the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window but
the information relevant to the active PM measurements will not be available (Perf.
column).
By means of the commands present into the window, it is possible to execute the following
operations:
296
To add (or removes) a prefix to the logic address of the selected equipment (refer to
paragraph 14.1.2.2).
To reset and to write newly the table that contains the information relevant to the
equipment present into the maps (refer to paragraph 14.1.2.2). This operation is
available only for the user with superuser profile
14.
To check the activated Performance Monitoring (PM) measurements for the selected
equipment (refer to paragraph 14.1.2.4).
To check the marking status of the alarms, of the Lct Present and Upload Incorrect
signal for the selected equipment (refer to paragraph 14.1.2.4).
To check in which maps there is the symbol of the selected equipment (refer to para.
14.1.2.4).
To check the users connected with the selected equipment (refer to para. 14.1.2.4).
"
"
Status. Status of the connection between the equipment and the supervisory system:
Connected, Disconnected, Unreachable.
For the description of the statuses, refer to paragraph 6.4.
"
"
Alr Disabled. Enabling status of the alarms and of the equipment trap forwarding to the
supervisory system. The symbol:
x points out that at least an alarm or the forwarding of a trap of the equipment
is disabled.
To check the alarms and the trap forwarding disabled, open the Equipment
Severity Code window and select the command with the same name (refer to
paragraph 14.1.2.2).
297
14.
points out that the equipment has not alarms or trap forwarding disabled.
This information is available and significant only for the NEs managed with the SNMP
protocol.
"
Lct Presence. Status of the connection between the Local Craft Terminal (LCT) program
and the equipment. The value:
D
Absent points out that the LCT user is not actually connected to the equipment.
Configuring points out that the LCT user is connected to the equipment in Configuration
mode.
Monitoring points out that the LCT user is connected to the equipment in Monitoring
mode.
Lct Config. Status of the LCT program enabling to be connected to the equipment. The
value:
D
Enabled points out that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment
as in Monitoring mode as in Configuration one.
Disabled points out that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment
in Monitoring mode only.
This parameter is available and significant only for the NEs managed with the SNMP
protocol.
For more detailed information, refer to paragraph 6.5.
"
"
Perf. Activation status of the Performance Monitoring (PM) measurements. The symbol:
... points out that the information is not available because it has been selected,
into the Warning window, the No pushbutton (refer to para. 14.1) displayed at the
window opening.
The symbol:
The user can check the acknowledge status of each single signal choosing the
Acknowledge Status command refer to paragraph 14.1.2.4.
"
298
14.
"
Board Addr IP. Address of the CSB/WS that is physically connected with the NE. This
information is available and significant only for the NEs managed with the Legacy protocol.
"
Port Nb. Number of the CSB/WS port that is physically connected with the NE. This
information is available and significant only for the NEs managed with the Legacy protocol.
Warning. The information present into the table correspond to the characteristics and
to the functional status of the equipment at the selection of the command or at the
execution of the refreshing operation.
The presence of the symbol points out that the information is not available because it is not
significant for the status and/or for the equipment type to which it is referred.
Print/Save. It prints or saves on a file the list of the operations. The command choice opens
a submenu that contains the following options:
All items, it prints or saves the list of the records stored into the database.
Filtered Items, it prints/saves the list of the displayed records. If it has not been
activated any filter, the displayed records correspond to the ones memorised into
the database.
Selected Items, it prints/saves the range of the records selected with the mouse.
This command is available only if it has been selected at least one record.
The choice of every command opens the Output Device Selection window. The using
modes of the window are pointed out at paragraph 11.1.2.
"
Open Equipment. It opens the Equipment window (refer to paragraph 2.1.2) relevant to
the type of the selected equipment
299
14.
At the command selection, the system can display a message. The description of the
Equipment window and of the messages that can be displayed at its opening are reported
into the specific equipment Manual (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
The Equipment window can be opened also clicking quickly twice on the equipment record.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a Workstation or a
Communication Server Board managed with the Legacy protocol (CommServerF).
"
Equipment Info. It opens the Equipment Info/Find window that displays the characteristics
and the functional status of the selected equipment.
If the user selects two or more records, he can open the relevant Equipment Info/Find
windows at the same time.
The description of the Equipment Info/Find window is reported at paragraph 11.1.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a Workstation and/or a
Communication Server Board.
"
Refresh Info. It executes a new reading of the database and refreshes the information
present into the window.
At the command choice, the system refreshes the date/time (refer to paragraph 14.1.3) and
will point out the refreshing time.
"
"
Export Performance Monitoring. It opens the Export window that allows saving on file
the results of the PM measurements relevant to all the selected NEs.
The description of the Export window is reported at paragraph 10.4.
Warning. The option is available only if it has been selected one or more real NEs of the
same type.
"
View/Modify PM Status. It opens the View/Modify PM Status window that displays the
status of the PM measurements relevant to the selected NE.
Then, it allows activating/deactivating at the same time one or more measurements 152 for
the selected equipment.
If the user selects two or more records concerning NE object of the same type, it is possible
to activate/deactivate at the same time the PM measurements of all the selected NEs.
The description of the View/Modify PM Status window is reported at the paragraph 10.5.
Warning. The option is not available if it has been selected a Workstation or a
Communication Server Board.
152.
300
14.
"
SNMP NE Sw/Fw Download. It opens the Software Download window that allows
executing the refreshing of the equipment sw/fw.
If the user has selected more NEs of the same type, at the command selection, the system
opens only one Software Download window that allows executing the operation for all the
NEs at the same time.
The description of the Software Download window is reported at paragraph 13.9.
Warning. The command is available only if one or more of the Network Elements managed
by SNMP protocol of the same type is selected, except for equipment of Elfo and SDH N+1
type.
"
SNMP Equipment Severity Code. It opens the Equipment Severity Code window that
allows enabling/disabling the trap/alarm forwarding from the equipment to the NMS5UX
system and/or changing the seriousness level coupled with the alarm signals.
The description of the Equipment Severity Code window is reported at paragraph 13.3.
Warning. The command is available only if a single NE managed by SNMP protocol and
in connected status is selected, except for equipment of Elfo and SDH N+1 type.
"
SNMP LCT Equipment User. It opens the LCT User Manager window that allows
checking and/or changing the list of the LCT users of the selected NE.
The description of the LCT User Manager window is reported at paragraph 13.6.
Warning. The command is available only if a single NE managed by SNMP protocol and
in connected status is selected, except for equipment of Elfo and SDH N+1 type.
"
Location. It adds (or removes) a prefix to the logic address of the selected equipment.
To add a prefix:
a.
Select one or more equipment to which the user wants to add the same prefix.
b.
c.
Into the New Location Name box, type the prefix to be added to the logic address
of the equipment (alphanumeric string composed by a minimum of 1 and a
maximum of 10 characters).
d.
To remove a prefix:
a.
Select one or more equipment for which the user wants to remove the prefix.
b.
301
14.
"
Map Structure Rebuild. It resets and writes newly the table that contains the information
relevant to the equipment present into the maps (equipment table) 153.
Warning. The option is available only for the user with superuser profile. Then, such
a command has to be used only in the case when it is probable a misalignment
between the information present into the equipment table and the equipment
displayed into the maps.
"
Radio Certificate. It opens the EqpInfoPage window that allows recording (saving and/or
printing) the data relevant to the selected equipment.
The description of the EqpInfoPage window is reported at the paragraph 11.2.
Warning. This command is available only for Radio SDH, Radio PDH, Radio PDHAL, G
series Radio, ELFO, SDH N+1, ALS.
Line Test. It opens the LINE TEST command window that allows checking the effective
reachability of the selected equipment by the supervisory system.
The description of the LINE TEST command window is reported at paragraph 16.1.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a Workstation or a
Communication Server Board.
"
Connect. It opens the CONNECT command window that allows activating the connection
between the NMS5UX system and the selected equipment.
The description of the CONNECT command window is reported at paragraph 16.2.
Warning. The connection request can be applied only for the selected NEs in disconnected
or unreachable status.
"
Disconnect. It opens the DISCONNECT command window that allows deactivating the
connection between the supervisory system and the selected equipment.
The description of the DISCONNECT command window is reported at paragraph 16.3.
Warning. The connection request can be applied only for the selected NEs in connected
or unreachable status.
"
153.
The NMS5UX system allows creating a copy of an equipment into more maps. The number of
copies and the map that contains such copies is pointed out into the equipment table.
If the user uses the Siae options to add and to delete the equipment, the supervisory system
automatically refreshes the equipment table.
While, if the user uses the OpenView options to add and to delete the copies of an equipment
(unsuggested operation), the NMS5UX system does not refresh the equipment table creating
in such a way a misalignment between the equipment graphically present into the maps and the
information present into the equipment table.
302
14.
Configuration Upload. It opens the UPLOAD command window that allows getting the
current configuration of the selected equipment.
The description of the UPLOAD command window is reported at paragraph 16.7.
Warning. The request for the configuration acquiring can be applied only to the selected
NEs in connected status.
"
"
Legacy Reset & Connect. It opens the RESET & CONNECT command window that
allows resetting the information, stored into the database of the NMS5UX system, relevant
to the configuration of the NE and then activating the connection between the system and
the NEs themselves.
The description of the RESET & CONNECT command window is reported at paragraph
16.5.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected one or more
equipment managed with Legacy protocol. For the equipment managed with SNMP
protocol, the forwarding of the command under examination is not available because it
would be equal to the forwarding of the Connect command.
"
Communication Server Board. The command allows activating and deactivating the
connection between the supervisory system and the CommServerForce and
CommServerS equipment (Communication Server Board CSB objects).
The command choice opens a menu that contains the options: Connect, Disconnect. The
description of the options is reported at paragraph 16.9.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a NE different from a CSB
one.
"
Legacy Workstation. The command allows activating and deactivating the connection
between the supervisory system and the workstation/server (Workstation WS object).
The command choice opens a menu that contains the options: Connect, Disconnect. The
description of the options is reported at paragraph 16.10.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a NE different from a WS
one.
"
303
14.
With details, to startup the Command Executor application program, execute the
following procedure:
a.
b.
c.
Select, into the Select Command area, the file that contains the desired sequence
of SNMP commands.
d.
Set Filter. It opens the View Filter window that allows filtering and ordering the list.
The filtering operation consists on defining one or more criteria in such a way that the
system displays only the records that comply with all the specified criteria. The ordering
operation consists of defining the order to be used to display the records.
To filter and/or to order the data of a list, click on one or more boxes present into the window,
according to the criteria to be used.
The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section that contains the
following options:
D
Match logical address box. In this area, it is possible to set as filter one or more logic
address of NE executing the following procedure.
To type the NE address into the text box positioned under the Match Logical Address
box.
It is possible to use the wildcard character asterisk (*). For instance typing into the box
the character/s:
p, into the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, the system will use the
NE with p logic address.
p*, the system will use the NEs with logic addresses that start with p.
p*o, the system will display the NEs with logic addresses that start with p and
end with o.
154.
The files with sequences of SNMP commands can be requested at Siae Microelettronica. Siae
Microelettronica, at customers request, will provide specific files with sequences of SNMP
commands.
304
14.
Match IP/Physical Address box. In this section, the user can set as filter the
equipment type (real/virtual) and its physical address. With details, if the user activates
the option pushbutton:
SNMP Equipment, the system activates as criterion the IP address of real SNMP
equipment.
To set the criterion, type into the 4 text boxes (displayed at the selection of the
option pushbutton under examination) the parts that constitute the desired IP
address. It is possible to use the asterisk wild character (*).
Legacy Equipment, the system activates as criterion the Physical Address of real
Legacy equipment.
To set the criterion, type into the text box (displayed at the selection of the option
pushbutton under examination) the desired Physical Address. It is possible to
use the asterisk wild character (*).
Match connection status box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the status
of the connection between the Network Element and the supervisory system:
Connected, Disconnected, Undetermined, Unreachable.
To activate the options, select the boxes placed on the side (the box is activated when
inside it there is the symbol n
).
Match equipment type box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the
equipment types that have to be displayed: Radio PDH, Radio SDH, etc.
To activate the options, select the boxes placed on the side (the box is activated when
inside it there is the symbol n
).
Match performance box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the activation
status of the Performance Monitoring (PM) measurements. If the user activates the:
Enabled option pushbutton, the system will display the NEs that have at least one
activated PM measurement.
Disabled option pushbutton, the system will display the NEs that do not have any
activated PM measurement.
Warning. This box is not available if, into the Warning window displayed at the opening
of the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, the user has selected the No
pushbutton (refer to paragraph 14.1).
D
Match Alarm box. In this section, it is possible to set as filter the severity of the active
alarms. If the user activates the:
Critical (red) box, the NEs where at least an alarm of Critical severity is active will
be displayed.
Major (orange) box, the NEs where at least an alarm of Major severity is active
will be displayed.
Minor (yellow) box, the NEs where at least an alarm of Minor severity is active will
be displayed.
Warning (light blue) box, the NEs where at least an alarm of Warning severity is
active will be displayed.
Normal (green) box, the NEs where at least an event signaling is active will be
displayed.
305
14.
Match Alarm Disabled box. In this area, it is possible to set as filter the enabling status
of the alarms and of the forwarding of the equipment traps to the supervisory system.
If the user activates:
the Enabled pushbutton, the system will display the NEs that do not have alarms
or the forwarding of the disabled traps.
the Disabled pushbutton, the system will display the NEs that have at least one
alarm or the forwarding of a disabled trap.
Match Gosip Address box. In this area, it is possible to set as filter some parameters
that compose the GOSIP (Government OSI Profile) address of the equipment.
With details, activate the:
Domain box and type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding 2
bytes, to define as filter the Domain parameter (default part of the GOSIP
Address).
Area box and type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding 2 bytes,
to define as filter the Area parameter (default part of the GOSIP Address).
System ID box and type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding
6 bytes, to define as filter the System ID parameter.
Match location box. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the physical position
of the equipment. With details, if the user activates the:
Port option, it is set as criterion a specific serial port of the CSB or WS set into the
Board box, this means that (if it has not been activated any other filter) the system
will display only the NEs physically connected to the set port.
To activate the options, select the boxes placed on the side (the box is activated when
inside it there is the symbol n
) and then set, if it has been activated the Board box,
the IP Address of the machine, and if it has been activated the Port box, the number
of the serial port.
Warning. This criterion is significant only for NEs managed with the Legacy protocol.
D
Sort by box. In this section it is possible to order the records. If the user activates the:
Type option pushbutton, the system will execute the ordering according to the
equipment type.
After having set the criteria, choose the OK pushbutton (it executes the filtering and/or
ordering command and closes the window) or the Apply pushbutton (it executes the
command and does not close the window).
The system will display, into the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, only the records
that comply with all the activated options.
Each time that the system filters the list, it considers all the records, as the displayed ones
as the hidden ones.
306
14.
Into the window there are also the Clear pushbutton (it deletes the activation of all the
filters and displays the complete list of all the records), the Cancel pushbutton (it closes
the window and does not executes the command) and the Help pushbutton (it opens the
online manual).
Warning. When the user closes the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, the system
automatically removes the eventual activation of the filters.
"
Perf TP active. It opens the Active performance TP window that points out the activated
PM measurements.
With details, into the Type and Logical Address boxes, the system respectively points out
the type and the logic address of the NE to which refer the displayed information.
Into the PM Class Name column, the system lists the denominations of the measurements
(it points out the type of the executed measurement), while into the TP Class Name column,
the denominations of the relevant measuring points (it points out the point where it has been
executed the PM measurement). Each measurement and measuring point represent a line
of the table.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected a NE with activated PM
measurements (symbol x into the Perf field refer to paragraph 14.1.1).
"
Acknowledge Status. It opens the Acknowledge Status window that points out the
acknowledge status of the following signals:
D
activated box (n
) points out that, for the NE under examination, there is at least
an alarm (current alarm and/or into the alarm history) not acknowledged.
To acknowledge an alarm, refer to paragraph 12.1.2.2 e 12.2.2.2.
deactivated box points out that all the possible alarms are acknowledged.
Presence of the LCT in Configuration mode Not Acknowledged Lct Config field. The:
activated box (n
) points out that from the last time that it has been opened the
Equipment window for the NE under examination, the LCT program has been
connected to the NE at least one time in Configuration mode.
To acknowledge the signal, open the Equipment window relevant to the NE.
deactivated box points out that form the last time that it has been opened the
Equipment window, the LCT has not been connected in Configuration mode.
Configuration Upload Operation not correctly executed Incorrect Upload field. The
box:
active (n
) points out that the last Configuration Upload operation has failed.
The system automatically marks the signal at the first Configuration Upload
operation correctly executed.
deactivated box points out that the last Configuration Upload operation has been
successfully executed.
Into the Type, Ip/Ph Address and Logical Address boxes, the system points out respectively
the type, the physical address and the logical address of the selected equipment.
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected a Network Element with
acknowledged signals (symbol x into the Ack field refer to paragraph 14.1.1).
307
14.
"
Equipment Location (Map). It opens the Equipment Location window that points out the
maps where there is the symbol of the selected equipment.
With details, into the Type, Ip/Ph Address and Logical Address boxes, the system points
out respectively the type, the physical address and the logic address of the equipment.
Into the Map name table, the system lists the map that contain the equipment.
"
SNMP LCT Logged Users. It opens the Logged Users window that points out the users
(LCT and NMS5UX) connected to the selected NE at the choice of the option; then, through
the options present into the window, it is possible to force the disconnection (logout) of
one or more users.
The descriptions of the Logged Users windows is reported at paragraph 13.7.
Warning. The command is available only if the Network Elements managed by SNMP
protocol is selected, except for equipment of Elfo and SDH N+1 type.
308
the number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of yy). If it has
not been activated any filter, the number of the displayed records corresponds to the
total number of records.
the date and the time when the window has been opened or refreshed (by means of
the choice of the Refresh Info command refer to paragraph 14.1.2.1).
14.
14.2
System access
User profile
The Equipment Managed by Proxy window is composed by a table where there is the list of the
equipment, by the menu bar and by a lower status bar. All these elements are described into
the following paragraphs.
Using the command present into the window, it is possible to execute the following operations:
D
"
Type. Equipment type: SDH radio, PDH radio, PDHAL Radio, PMP, G series Radio.
"
Eq. Proxy Addr.. Address of the equipment that is acknowledged by the Proxy Agent:
Proxy address of the equipment 155.
"
Primary Trap Dest.. Address of the machine to which the Proxy Agent forwards the traps
coming from the equipment 155.
"
Secondary Trap Dest.. Address of an additional machine to which the Proxy Agent
forwards the traps coming from the equipment 155.
Warning. The information present into the table correspond to the characteristics of the
equipment at the selection of the command.
155.
This parameter has to be defined by the user duringthe creation phases of the equipment (refer
to paragraph 9.1.2.1 and 9.1.2.3).
309
14.
Refresh. It executes a new reading of the database and refreshes the information present
into the window.
310
the activation of one or more filters. With details, if it has been activated:
the Managed by Proxy Agent box, the system displays into the window the
equipment managed by Proxy Agent.
the Not Managed by Proxy Agent box, he system displays into the window the
equipment that are not managed by the Proxy Agent.
the number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of yy). If it has
not been activated any filter, the number of the displayed records corresponds to the
total number of records.
14.
14.3
EQUIPMENT FIND
System access
User profile
The Equipment Find command allows displaying the characteristics and the functional status
of an equipment when the user knows only its logic and/or physical address.
The procedure to execute the search is the following one:
1.
2.
Into the Physical Address text box, type the physical address and/or into the Address
box, the logic address of the equipment.
3.
Press the Search pushbutton placed on the side of the text boxes.
If the searching procedure has given a:
positive result, the system displays, into the window, the characteristics and the
functional status of the equipment.
The map window that contains the Network Element is brought at front and the
symbol of the NE is pointed out.
The description of the parameters and of the pushbuttons, present into the
Equipment Info/Find window, is reported at paragraphs 11.1.1 and 11.1.2.
negative result, the system displays a message that points out that the NE is not
present into the database of the actually open map.
Warning. It is possible to execute more consecutive searching procedures changing the value
inserted into the Physical Address and/or Address box and pressing the Search pushbutton.
If the user chooses the Clear pushbutton, the system automatically deletes the value present
into the text boxes.
311
14.
312
15
15.
Alarm History Backup. it saves on disk and/or on tape the history of the
alarm/status/event signals stored into the Alarm History table.
Alarm History Restore, it restores the history of the alarm/status/event signals saved
before on disk and/or on tape and copies it into the Old History table.
Alarm History Delete Backup, it deletes the history of the alarm/status/event signals
saved on disk.
Pm Backup, it saves on disk and/or on tape the results of the Performance Monitoring
(PM) measurements stored into the Performance Monitoring table.
PDHSDH Radio Link Browser, it displays the list of the Radio Link created by the
user (refer to paragraph 9.1.3).
Warning. This command is an optional one.
Map Manager Status it displays the connection status with the NMS5UX domain, with
the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment and with the Siae Ring
Manager system.
Database Backup, it saves on disk and/or on tape the information present into the
database of the NMS5UX supervisory system.
Database Restore, it restores the information present into the database of the system
saved before on disk and/or on tape.
313
15.
314
15.
15.1
System access
User profile
The Alarm History Backup command allows saving the history of the of the alarm/status/event
signals stored into the Alarm History table 156 relevant to the NEs present into all the existing
maps.
The contents of the table are saved on a file that can be stored on disk and/or on magnetic
support (DAT tape Digital Audio Type).
Then, to use the contents of the file, it will be necessary to restore it (refer to paragraph 15.2)
and to open the Old History Browser window (refer to paragraph 12.3).
At the choice of the Alarm History Backup command, the system displays the Alarm
History Backup window.
2.
Activate the:
Backup To Tape box, if the user wants to save the contents of the Alarm History
table on tape (DAT tape).
Backup To Disk box, if the user wants to save the table on the machine disk
(workstation or server).
If the user activates both the boxes, the system saves the data as on disk as on tape.
3.
Backup To Tape box, insert the tape into the DAT drive of the machine.
Warning. The wording [/dev/rmt/Om], placed on the side if the box, points out that
the contents of the table will be overwritten on the possible data already present
on the DAT. This setting can not be changed.
Backup To Disk box, type, into the text box, the name of the file where the user
wants to save the contents of the table.
If the user choose the Browser pushbutton, it is possible to select the name of
an already existing file (in this case the contents of the file will be overwritten with
the new data).
Warning. Into the File name field, the system points out the predefined path
where the system saves the file. This setting can not be changed.
4.
156.
To display the contents of the Alarm History table, open the Alarm History Browser window (refer
to paragraph 12.1).
315
15.
15.2
System access
User profile
The Alarm History Restore command restores the history of the alarm/status/event signals
saved before on disk and/or on tape (refer to paragraph 15.1).
If the user wants to restore a saved file on:
D
At the choice of the Alarm History Restore command, the system displays the Alarm
History Restore window.
2.
Into the Files list, select the name of the file to be restored.
Into the list, the system points out the files present into the predefined directory
(pointed out into the Selection box). Such a directory is the same one where the system
automatically saves the files during the backup procedure (refer to paragraph 15.1.1).
3.
316
1.
2.
15.
15.3
System access
User profile
The Alarm History Delete Backup command allow deleting the history of the
alarm/status/event signals saved by means of the Alarm History Backup command (refer to
paragraph 15.1) on the machine disk (workstation or server).
At the choice of the Alarm History Delete Backup command, the system displays the
Alarm History Delete window.
2.
Into the Files list, select the name of the file to be deleted.
Into the list, the system points out the files present into the predefined directory
(pointed out into the Directories box) Such a directory is the same one where the
system automatically saves the files during the backup procedure (refer to paragraph
15.1.1).
Warning. Also if the user can set a different directory, the system allows deleting files
only into the predefined directory.
3.
317
15.
15.4
PM BACKUP
System access
User profile
The Pm Backup command allows saving (subdivided by month) the results of the PM
measurements stored into the PM table 157 relevant to the NEs present into all the existing maps.
The contents of the table is saved on a file that can be stored on disk and/or on magnetic support
(DAT tape Digital Audio Type).
Then, to display the contents of the file, it will be necessary to restore it (refer to paragraph 15.5)
and to open the Graphical Performance Monitoring window (refer to paragraph 10.3).
At the choice of the Pm Backup command, the system displays the Pm Backup
window.
2.
Into the Selected Month option menu, select the month to be saved.
3.
Activate the:
Backup To Tape box, if the user wants to save the contents of the Performance
Monitoring table on tape (DAT tape).
Backup To Disk box, if the user wants to save the table on the disk of the
workstation or server.
If the user activates both the boxes, the system saves the data as on disk as on tape.
4.
Activate the Delete Table box, if the user wants that the contents of the Performance
Monitoring table is automatically deleted after the saving on file.
Warning. This operation is available only for the user with superuser profile.
5.
Backup To Tape box, insert the tape into the DAT drive of the machine
Warning. The wording [/dev/rmt/Om], placed on the side if the box, points out that
the contents of the table will be overwritten on the possible data already present
on the DAT. This setting can not be changed.
Backup To Disk box, type, into the text box, the name of the file where the user
wants to save the contents of the table.
If the user choose the Browser pushbutton, it is possible to select the name of
an already existing file (in this case the contents of the file will be overwritten with
the new data).
157.
To display the contents of the Performance Monitoring table, open the Graphical Performance
Monitoring window (refer to paragraph 10.2).
318
15.
Warning. Into the File name field, the system points out the predefined path
where the system saves the file. This setting can not be changed.
6.
319
15.
15.5
PM RESTORE
System access
User profile
The Pm Restore command restores the results of the Performance Monitoring (PM)
measurements saved before on disk or on tape (refer to paragraph 15.4).
If the user wants to restore a saved file on:
D
At the choice of the Pm Restore command, the system displays the Pm Restore
window.
2.
Into the Files list, select the name of the file to be restored.
Into the list, the system points out the files present into the predefined directory
(pointed out into the Selection box) Such a directory is the same one where the system
automatically saves the files during the backup procedure (refer to paragraph 15.4.1).
3.
320
15.
2.
321
15.
15.6
PM DELETE
System access
User profile
The Pm Delete command allows deleting the backup files, relevant to the Performance
Monitoring (PM) measurements, saved by means of the Pm Backup command (refer to
paragraph 15.4) on the machine disk (workstation or server).
At the choice of the Pm Delete command the system displays the Pm Delete window.
2.
Into the Files list, select the name of the file to be deleted.
Into the list, the system points out the files present into the predefined directory
(pointed out into the Selection box) Such a directory is the same one where the system
automatically saves the files during the backup procedure (refer to paragraph 15.4.1).
Warning. Also if the user can set a different directory, the system allows deleting files
only into the predefined directory.
3.
322
15.
15.7
323
15.
15.8
System access
User profile
"
"
Link Type. Equipment type where it has been defined the Radio Link: Radio PDH, Radio
SDH, etc..
"
Source Name. Logic address of the equipment placed at one end of the connection (Radio
Link).
"
Source Address. Physical address of the equipment placed at one end of the connection.
"
Destination Name. Logic address of the equipment placed at the other end of the
connection.
"
Destination Address. Physical address of the equipment placed at the other end of the
connection.
.Warning. The information present into the table corresponds to the connections present into
the map(s) at the time of the option choice or of the refresh procedure
324
15.
Refresh. It executes a new reading of the database and refreshes the information present
into the window.
At the option choice, the system will refresh the date/time (refer to paragraph 15.8.3) and
it will point out the time of the refresh execution.
Filter. It opens the Radio Link Filter window that allows filtering the list.
The filtering operation consists on defining one or more criteria in such a way that the
system will display only the records that comply with all the specified criteria.
To filter the data, click on one or more boxes present into the window, according to he criteria
to be used.
The activation of each box expands the window displaying an area that contains the
following options:
D
Match Link Name box. In this box, it is possible to set as filter one or more logic
addresses of the Radio Links.
It is possible to set the logic addresses typing the logic address of the Radio Link into
the text box and choosing the Add pushbutton.
The system inserts the values so set into the area placed under the above mentioned
Match Link Name box.
It is possible to delete a single option from the list, after having highlighted it, choosing
the Remove pushbutton or to delete at the same time all the options choosing the
Remove All pushbutton.
Match Map box. In this box, it is possible to set as filter one or more maps.
It is possible to set the maps typing the map name into the text box and choosing the
Add pushbutton.
The system inserts the values so set into the area placed under the Match Map box.
325
15.
It is possible to delete a single option from the list, after having highlighted it, choosing
the Remove pushbutton or to delete at the same time all the options choosing the
Remove All pushbutton.
D
Match Equipment box. In this box, it it is possible to set as filter one or more equipment
involved by the connection.
It is possible to set the logic address of one of the two equipment involved by the
connection typing it into the text box and choosing the Add pushbutton.
The system inserts the values so set into the area placed under the Match Equipment
box.
It is possible to delete a single option from the list, after having highlighted it, choosing
the Remove pushbutton or to delete at the same time all the options choosing the
Remove All pushbutton.
After having set the criteria, choose the OK pushbutton (it executes the filter command
and closes the window) or the Apply one (it executes the filter command and does not close
the window).
The system will display, into the Radio Link Browser window, only the records that comply
with all the activated options.
Every time that the system filters the list, it considers all the records as the displayed records
as the hidden ones.
The window contains also the Clear pushbutton (it removes the activation of all the filters
and displays the complete list of the records) and the Cancel one (it closes the window and
does not execute the command).
Warning. When the system closes the Radio Link Browser, window, the possible activation
of the filters is automatically removed.
326
the number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of yy). It the
user has not activated some filters, the number of the displayed records corresponds
to the total number of records.
date and time relevant to the opening or to the refreshing (executed through the choice
of the Refresh option refer to paragraph 15.8.2.1) of the window.
15.
15.9
System access
User profile
At the starting up of the supervisory system or at the selection of the Map Manager Status option,
the system displays the SIAE Map Manager Status window that contains the following fields:
D
Status Change Notifications. It points out the connection status with the domain of the
NMS5UX system. The NMS5UX domain has the task to manage the alarms received
by the siae equipment.
With details the square can have the following colors:
green, it points out that the connection with the domain has been activated:
the system dynamically points out the alarms on the map (the status of the
equipment color of the symbols is meaningful).
red, it points out that the connection with the domain has been deactivated:
the system does not dynamically point out the alarms on the map (the status
of the equipment color of the symbols is meaningful).
Warning. In this condition, it is possible to execute all the operations available
with the NMS5UX system, except for the map operations (creation, deletion,
modification, search, moving of an object).
On the side of the square, the system displays the Enable pushbutton.
Select such a pushbutton to activate again the connection with the domain.
If the operation has been successfully performed, the system replaces the red
square with the green one. If the operation execution fails, contact your own
system administrator.
Legacy Actions. It points out the connection status with the modules of the NMS5UX
system that manage the Siae equipment with Legacy protocol.
With details the square can have the following colors:
green, it points out that the connection with the modules under examination
has been activated: the system manages the Legacy equipment.
red, it points out that the connection with the modules under examination has
been deactivated: the system does not manage the Legacy equipment.
On the side of the square, the system displays the Enable pushbutton.
Select such a pushbutton to activate again the connection with the modules.
If the operation has been successfully performed, the system replaces the red
square with the green one. If the operation execution fails, contact your own
system administrator.
white coupled with the wording Not Managed, it points out that during the
configuration of the NMS5UX system, the modules for the management of
the Siae equipment with Legacy protocol have not been installed.
Ring Manager Link. It points out the connection status with the Siae Ring Manager
327
15.
green, it points out that the connection with the Ring Manager system has
been activated.
red, it points out that the connection with the Ring Manager system has been
deactivated.
On the side of the square, the system displays the Enable pushbutton.
Select such a pushbutton to activate again the connection with the system.
If the operation has been successfully performed, the system replaces the red
square with the green one. If the operation execution fails, contact your own
system administrator.
white coupled with the wording Not Managed, it points out that during the
configuration of the NMS5UX system, the Ring Manager system has not been
installed.
158.
Supervisory system for the control and the management of the connections and circuits (path) in
SDH networks of Siae equipment.
328
15.
The SNMP Command Executor starts up the Command Executor application program,
through which the user can execute the series of SNMP command memorised on file.
With details, to startup the Command Executor application program, execute the following
procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set the possible parameters, displayed into the Command File Description area, at the
selection of the file.
The list of the parameters changes according to the selected file. Some files do not
need for the setting of the parameters.
5.
6.
159.
The files with sequences of SNMP commands can be requested at Siae Microelettronica. Siae
Microelettronica, at customers request, will provide specific files with sequences of SNMP
commands.
329
15.
If at the preceding step, it has been activated the Scheduled box, the system displays
a message that points out that the file has been scheduled and that it will be
automatically run at the set date/time.
If the operator selects the View Scheduled pushbutton, the system displays the View
Scheduled Command window that lists the scheduled files
With details, for each file, the system points out, into the following fields, the following
data:
Par 1...Par 5, the possible values set for the requested parameters relevant
to the file execution.
Stop Time, the possible values set for the parameters requested for the file
execution.
Through the pushbuttons present into the View Scheduled Command window:
160.
Warning. Into the Sched Time field, it is possible to have the indication of a preceding programming
date/time with respect to the current one. This situation means that the NE, at the time when it was
programmed the operation, was not in the right condition for the file execution (for instance the NE
was disconnected or unreachable). In such a case, the system retries the execution of the file at
regular time.
330
15.
The Database Backup command allows saving the information present into the database of
the supervisory system 161 on disk and/or on magnetic support (DAT tape Digital Audio Type).
Then, it will be possible to restore the saved information executing the restore procedure of the
database (refer to paragraph 15.12).
At the choice of the Database Backup command, the system displays the Database
Backup window.
2.
Activate the:
Backup To Disk box, if the user wants to save the database on the machine disk
(workstation or server).
On the side of the box, it is pointed out the predefined path where the system
saves the file. This setting can not be changed.
Backup To Tape box, if the user wants to save the contents of the database on the
DAT tape.
Warning. The wording [/dev/rmt/Om], placed on the side if the box, points out that
the contents of the database will be overwritten on the possible data already
present on the DAT. This setting can not be changed.
If the user activates both the boxes, the system saves the data as on disk as on tape.
3.
If the user has activated the Backup To Tape box, insert the tape into the DAT drive
of the machine.
4.
161.
Into the system database, there are stored the data relevant to all the existing maps and NEs.
331
15.
The Database Restore command restores the system database saved before on disk or tape
(refer to paragraph 15.11).
332
16
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
The Siae Commands menu contains the commands able to execute the following operations:
"
To manage the connection between the supervisory system and the Network Elements
(PDH Radio, SDH Radio, PMP Radio, etc.).
With details the:
D
Connect command activates the dialogue 162 between the NMS5UX system and the
NE.
Disconnect command deactivates the dialogue 163 between the NMS5UX system and
the NE.
Legacy Reset & Connect command resets the information relevant to the
configuration of the NE, stored into the database of the supervisory system and
activates the dialogue between the NE and the NMS5UX system itself.
Warning. This command is available only for the equipment managed with Legacy
protocol.
Then, the subject option is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
Alarm Realignment command allows to the supervisory system to acquire the status
of the alarm actually present into the NE.
SNMP Equipment Controller Reset command executes the software reset of the
selected NE.
162.
163.
333
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
Warning. This command is available only for the equipment managed with SNMP
protocol, except for the Elfo and SDH N+1 equipment.
D
PMP Clear Alarm Table command transfers, to the selected equipment, the default
table of the alarms memorised into its own server/workstation.
Warning. This command is available only for the PMP equipment type.
"
To activate and to deactivate the connection of the Workstation and Communication Server
Board objects and to open and to close the relevant serial ports.
Warning. The commands pointed out here below have to be used only and exclusively if
into the involved network there are Network Elements managed with the Legacy protocol.
In fact, only for these NEs, the connection phase is proceeded by the configuration of the
serial ports physically connected with the NEs themselves (refer to paragraph 6.1).
For the NEs managed with SNMP protocol, it is assumed that the TCP/IP network ensures
their connection to the supervisory system.
With details, the:
D
Legacy Workstation Port command manages the functional status of the serial
ports of the workstation/server that are physically connected with the NEs managed
with the Legacy protocol.
Warning. The subject option is present into the menu only if the software modules for
the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
334
16.
16.1
SIAE COMMANDS
LINE TEST
System access
User profile
The Line Test command allows checking the effective reachability of the Network Elements
(NE) by the supervisory system.
The check consists of the request to a NE, executed by the NMS5UX system, concerning the
value of the chosen parameters: if the NE answers the test is correctly executed, on the contrary
it fails.
Warning. All the NEs, independently from their type or connection status, have been
programmed to answer to the test message. Then, the forwarding of the command does not
affect the connection or alarm status of the Network Element.
The choice of the Line Test command opens a menu that contains the following options:
D
Network Element, it executes the test for the selected Network Element or for the
selected NE group as pointed out at paragraph 16.1.1.
Container, it executes the test for all the NEs present into the selected Container
symbol or symbols as pointed out at paragraph 16.1.2.
Select the NE symbol or symbols for which the user wants to execute the test.
It is possible to select different kinds of NE, present into the same map window or into
different ones.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a Container,
Workstation or Communication Server Board symbol.
2.
3.
If the user want to delete, from the Command Scope area, one or more NEs, it is
necessary to select the relevant records and to choose the Remove From List
pushbutton.
4.
It is possible to filter the NEs listed into the Command Scope area, according to the
type, activating (or deactivating) the boxes present into the Filter On Type area.
335
SIAE COMMANDS
16.
5.
FAILED! .... points out that the test is failed; the system points out, between
brackets, a message that specifies the cause of the failure.
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Operation in progress) is
available the Stop pushbutton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure 164.
The user can print the displayed information choosing the Print pushbutton.
Select the Container symbol or symbols that contain the NEs for which the user wants
to execute the test.
It is possible to select different kinds of Container symbols, present into the same map
window or into different ones.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a Network Element,
Workstation or Communication Server Board symbol.
2.
164.
If, for instance, it has been requested the execution of the operation for ten NEs, the system
forwards the command to the first NE, at the ned it will pass to the next one. If during the execution
of the command for the second NE, the user chooses the Stop pushbutton, the system will end
the operation on progress and then will stop the procedure. Then, the system will points out into
the list only the first two NEs.
336
16.
16.2
SIAE COMMANDS
CONNECT
System access
User profile
The Connect command activates the connection between the supervisory system and the NEs
165.
At the end of the procedure, if it has been successfully executed, the system will be able to
communicate with the NEs, will have get all the information relevant to the current status of
the alarms and to the configuration of the NEs themselves and will have forwarded to the
equipment the network time.
The connection request can be applied only for the selected NEs in disconnected or unreachable
status.
The choice of the Connect command opens a menu that contains the following options:
D
Container, it executes the connection of the NEs present into the selected Container
symbol or symbols as pointed out at paragraph 16.2.2.
2.
3.
165.
If the user wants to delete one or more NEs from the Command Scope area, he has
to select the relevant records and to choose the Remove From List pushbutton.
For the equipment managed with Legacy protocol, the system starts the polling cycle for the
acquiring of the alarms. For the equipment managed with SNMP protocol, the system starts the
reception of the traps (messages forwarded by the equipment to the supervisory system).
337
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
4.
It is possible to filter the NEs listed into the Command Scope area, according to the
type, activating (or deactivating) the boxes present into the Filter On Type area.
5.
OK, points out that the connection has been successfully executed; The NE
symbol changes its colour: from brown it can become green, light blue, yellow,
orange or red according to the seriousness level of the alarms present into
the NE.
FAILED!, points out that the connection is failed; the system points out,
between brackets, a message that specifies the cause of the failure.
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Operation in progress) is
available the Stop pushbutton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure 164.
The duration of the operation changes according to the number of the involved NEs.
The user can print the displayed information choosing the Print pushbutton.
Select the Container symbol or symbols that contain the NEs to be connected.
It is possible to select different kinds of Container symbols, present into the same map
window or into different ones.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a Network Element,
Workstation or Communication Server Board symbol.
2.
338
16.
16.3
SIAE COMMANDS
DISCONNECT
System access
User profile
The Disconnect command allows deactivating the connection between the supervisory system
and one or more the Network Elements (NE) 166.
After this operation the system does not manage longer (at least at the same time) the NEs
under examination.
The disconnection of a NE does not cause the deleting of the relevant information from the
database; such information remains stored and the operator, also if the Network Element is in
disconnected status, can open the relevant Equipment window (refer to paragraph 2.1.2).
The disconnection request can be applied only for the selected NEs in connected or unreachable
status.
The choice of the Disconnect command opens a menu that contains the following options:
D
Container, it executes the disconnection of the NEs present into the selected
Container symbol or symbols as pointed out at paragraph 16.3.2.
2.
166.
For the equipment managed with Legacy protocol, the system stops the polling cycle for the
acquiring of the alarms. For the equipment managed with SNMP protocol, the system stops the
reception of the traps (messages spontaneously forwarded by the equipment to the supervisory
system).
339
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
3.
If the user wants to delete one or more NEs from the Command Scope area, he has
to select the relevant records and to choose the Remove From List pushbutton.
4.
It is possible to filter the NEs listed into the Command Scope according to the type,
activating (or deactivating) the boxes present into the Filter On Type area.
5.
OK, points out that the disconnection has been successfully executed; The
NE symbol switches its current colour to brown.
FAILED!, points out that the disconnection is failed; the system points out,
between brackets, a message that specifies the cause of the failure.
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Operation in progress) is
available the Stop pushbutton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure 164.
The user can print the displayed information choosing the Print pushbutton.
Select the Container symbol or symbols that contain the NEs to be disconnected.
It is possible to select different kinds of Container symbols, present into the same map
window or into different ones.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a Network Element,
Workstation or Communication Server Board symbol.
2.
340
16.
16.4
SIAE COMMANDS
System access
User profile
Warning. This option is available only for the equipment managed with SNMP protocol.
The SNMP Forced NE Disconnect option forces the software disconnection of the selected
equipment.
The software disconnection is realized when the NMS5UX system graphically positions the
equipment in disconnected status (icon with brown color), but it does not communicate such an
operation to the equipment itself.
The use of this command is necessary if the equipment remains graphically locked in
maintenance status (icon with pink color).
The procedure to force the software disconnection of an equipment is the following one:
1.
2.
3.
OK, points out that the disconnection has been successfully executed; The
NE symbol switches its current colour to brown.
FAILED!, points out that the disconnection is failed; the system points out,
between brackets, a message that specifies the cause of the failure.
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Operation in progress) is
available the Stop pushbutton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure 164.
The user can print the displayed information choosing the Print pushbutton.
341
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
16.5
System access
User profile
Warning. This command is available only if it has been selected one or more equipment
managed with Legacy protocol. For the equipment managed with SNMP protocol, the
forwarding of the command under examination is not available because it would be
equal to the forwarding of the Connect command.
Then, the subject option is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
The Legacy Reset & Connect command allows resetting the information, stored into the
database of the NMS5UX system, relevant to the configuration of the Network Elements (NE)
and then activating the connection between the system and the NEs themselves.
At the end of the procedure, if it has been successfully executed, the system will be able to
communicate with the NEs as after a normal connection procedure; it will have get all the
information relevant to the configuration and to the functional status of the NEs then the NEs
themselves will be automatically inserted into the polling cycle.
Warning. This command has to be selected only in extreme cases, when the user supposes
that it is present a misalignment situation between the alarm information known by the
supervisory system and the real situation present into the NEs. The duration of the reset and
connection operation is usually longer than the one of a normal connection because the entire
configuration of the NE is transferred from the peripheral part to the supervisory centre.
The command forwarding can be applied only for the selected NEs in disconnected or
unreachable status.
The choice of the Legacy Reset & Connect command opens a menu that contains the
following options:
D
Network Element, it executes the reset and the connection of the selected NE or of
the selected NE group as pointed out at paragraph 16.5.1.
Container, it executes the reset and the connection of the NEs present into the
selected Container symbol or symbols as pointed out at paragraph 16.5.2.
342
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
3.
If the user wants to delete one or more NEs from the Command Scope area, he has
to select the relevant records and to choose the Remove From List pushbutton.
4.
It is possible to filter the NEs listed into the Command Scope according to the type,
activating (or deactivating) the boxes present into the Filter On Type area.
5.
OK, points out that the operation has been successfully executed.
FAILED!, points out that the operation is failed; the system points out,
between brackets, a message that specifies the cause of the failure.
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Operation in progress) is
available the Stop pushbutton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure 164.
The user can print the displayed information choosing the Print pushbutton.
Select the Container symbol or symbols that contain the NEs to be reset and
connected.
It is possible to select different kinds of Container symbols, present into the same map
window or into different ones.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a Network Element,
Workstation or Communication Server Board symbol.
2.
343
SIAE COMMANDS
16.
16.6
ALARM REALIGNMENT
System access
User profile
The Alarm Realignment command forces a Network Element or a group of NEs, to forward
to the supervisory system its own current alarms.
Warning. This command has to be selected only when the user supposes that it is present a
misalignment situation between the alarm information known by the NMS5UX system and the
real alarm situation present into the NE. In fact, the command under examination does not
represent the normal procedure to get the functional status of a NE.
The realignment procedure forces the system to delete the information, present into the
current alarms table, relevant to the NEs involved in the operation. Then, the system requires
to the NEs the status of their alarms and stores them into the current alarms table 167.
The realignment request of the alarms can be applied only to the selected NEs in connected
status. This operation does not affect the connection status of the NE or its configuration.
The choice of the Alarm Realignment command opens a menu that contains the following
options:
D
Network Element, it executes the realignment of the alarms for the selected NE or
for the selected NE group as pointed out at paragraph 16.6.1.
Container, it executes the realignment of the alarms for the NEs present into the
selected Container symbol or symbols as pointed out at paragraph 16.6.2.
2.
167.
The contents of the current alarms table can be displayed opening the Current Alarms Browser
window (refer to paragraph 12.2).
344
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
Into the Command Scope area, the system points out all the selected NEs for which
it will be executed the operation . One record is devoted to each NE. Such a record
orderly points out the following information: logic address and type.
3.
If the user wants to delete one or more NEs from the Command Scope area, he has
to select the relevant records and to choose the Remove From List pushbutton.
4.
It is possible to filter the NEs listed into the Command Scope according to the type,
activating (or deactivating) the boxes present into the Filter On Type area.
5.
OK, points out that the operation has been successfully executed.
FAILED!, points out that the operation is failed; the system points out,
between brackets, a message that specifies the cause of the failure.
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Operation in progress) is
available the Stop pushbutton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure 164.
The user can print the displayed information choosing the Print pushbutton.
Select the Container symbol or symbols that contain the NEs for which the user wants
to execute the alarm realignment.
It is possible to select different kinds of Container symbols, present into the same map
window or into different ones.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a Network Element,
Workstation or Communication Server Board symbol.
2.
345
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
16.7
CONFIGURATION UPLOAD
System access
User profile
The Configuration Upload command forces a Network Element or a group of NEs, to forward
to the supervisory system its own configuration and its own current alarms.
Warning. This command has to be selected only when the user supposes that it is present a
misalignment situation between the alarm information known by the NMS5UX system and the
real configuration and functional status of the NE. In fact, the command under examination does
not represent the normal procedure to get the information relevant to a NE.
The execution mode of the subject procedure is the same one described for the alarm
realignment procedure (refer to paragraph 16.6), the only difference is that the system, in this
case, requires to the NE the status of the alarms and also the configuration parameters.
The request for the configuration acquiring can be applied only to the selected NEs in connected
status. This operation does not affect the connection status of the NE.
Warning. If the Configuration Upload command fails, the equipment switches to the unreachable
status and the system points out the operation failure into the Equipment window of the NE under
examination and into the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window (refer to paragraph 14.1.1).
The choice of the Configuration Upload command opens a menu that contains the following
options:
D
Container, it acquires the configuration of the NEs present into the selected Container
symbol or symbols as pointed out at paragraph 16.7.2.
2.
346
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
If the user wants to delete one or more NEs from the Command Scope area, he has
to select the relevant records and to choose the Remove From List pushbutton.
4.
It is possible to filter the NEs listed into the Command Scope according to the type,
activating (or deactivating) the boxes present into the Filter On Type area.
5.
OK, points out that the operation has been successfully executed.
FAILED!, points out that the operation is failed; the system points out,
between brackets, a message that specifies the cause of the failure.
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Operation in progress) is
available the Stop pushbutton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure 164.
The user can print the displayed information choosing the Print pushbutton.
Select the Container symbol or symbols that contain the NEs for which the user wants
to acquire the configuration.
It is possible to select different kinds of Container symbols, present into the same map
window or into different ones.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected a Network Element,
Workstation or Communication Server Board symbol.
2.
347
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
16.8
System access
User profile
348
To transfer the configuration of a Network Element (virtual or real) to one or more real
NEs (refer to Download Configuration command at paragraph 16.8.1.2).
To transfer the configuration of a Network Element (virtual or real) to one or more virtual
NEs (refer to Copy Configuration command at paragraph 16.8.1.2).
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
(1) For the description of the menus and of the relevant commands refer to paragraph
16.8.1.
(2) The configuration parameters changes according to the change of the selected NE
type. Their description is reported into the equipment User Manual relevant to the
NE type under examination (refer to paragraph 1.3.3).
(3) Into the list, it is possible to display, at the same time, the real and virtual NEs. For
the first ones, it is necessary to activate the Real Equipment box, for the second
ones the Virtual Equipment box.
(4) Into the list, it is possible to display only the real NEs or only the virtual NEs . To
display the real ones, it is necessary to select the Real Equipment (download)
pushbutton, to display the virtual ones, the Virtual Equipment (copy) pushbutton.
(5) Into the list, it will not be present the NE (real or virtual) selected into the Source area
because the NE from which it is taken up the configuration to be transferred is
automatically excluded from the list of the NEs to which such a configuration can
be transferred.
Fig. 16.1
349
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
Into the map window, select the Network Element having the type and the
configuration parameters that correspond to the characteristics NE desired for the
configuration transfer.
b.
c.
Into the Source area, select the NE (real or virtual) with the configuration to be
transferred.
d.
Into the Destination area, activate the Real Equipment (download) option
pushbutton.
e.
f.
350
Deactivate the control boxes relevant to the groups/parameters that have not to
be transferred.
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
Warning. The deactivation of a group is a priority action with respect to the setting
of its own parameters. For instance, if the user deactivates the A group, at the
transfer of the configuration, the system will not transfer the values of the
parameters coupled with the A group, also if the box relevant to the single
parameters is activated.
To activate all the boxes at the same time, select the Select all option. To
deactivate all the boxes at the same time, select the Deselect all option.
g.
Select, from the list, the NE or the NE group to which the user wants to transfer
the configuration.
h.
i.
"
Copy Configuration. It transfers the configuration of the NE (real or virtual) selected into
the Source area to the virtual NE or to the virtual NE group selected into the Destination
area.
The procedure to execute the operation is the following one:
a.
Into the map window, select the Network Element having the type and the
configuration parameters that correspond to the characteristics NE desired for the
configuration transfer.
b.
c.
Into the Source area, select the NE (real or virtual) with the configuration to be
transferred.
d.
Into the Destination area, activate the Virtual Equipment (copy) option
pushbutton.
e.
Select, from the list, the NE or the NE group to which the user wants to transfer
the configuration.
f.
From the menu bar, select the Command Copy Configuration command.
The system displays a confirmation window.
g.
Refresh. It executes a new reading of the database and refreshes the information present
into the window.
351
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
16.9
System access
User profile
The Communication Server Board command allows activating and deactivating the
connection between the supervisory system and the CommServerForce and CommServerS
equipment (Communication Server Board CSB objects).
The command choice opens a menu that contains the following options:
D
Connect, it activates the connection of the selected CSB or of the selected CSB group
as pointed out at paragraph 16.9.1.
Disconnect, it deactivates the connection of the selected CSB or of the selected CSB
group as pointed out at paragraph 16.9.2.
2.
3.
If the user wants to delete one or more CSBs from the Command Scope area, he has
to select the relevant records and to choose the Remove From List pushbutton.
4.
352
OK, points out that the operation has been successfully executed, the CSB
symbol changes its colour from brown to green.
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
FAILED! ...., points out that the operation is failed; the system points out,
between brackets, a message that specifies the cause of the failure.
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Working) is available the
Stop pushbutton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure.
The user can print the displayed information choosing the Print pushbutton.
2.
3.
If the user wants to delete one or more CSBs from the Command Scope area, he has
to select the relevant records and to choose the Remove From List command.
4.
OK, points out that the operation has been successfully executed, the CSB
symbol changes its colour from green to brown.
FAILED! ...., points out that the operation is failed; the system points out,
between brackets, a message that specifies the cause of the failure.
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Working) is available the
Stop pushbutton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure.
The user can print the displayed information choosing the Print pushbutton.
353
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
The Legacy Workstation command allows activating and deactivating the connection
between the supervisory system and the workstation/server (Workstation WS object).
Warning. The subject option is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
The command choice opens a menu that contains the following options:
D
2.
3.
If the user wants to delete from the Command Scope area, one or more WSs, he has
to select the relevant records and to choose the Remove From List pushbutton.
4.
354
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
OK, points out that the operation has been successfully executed, the WS
symbol changes its colour from brown to green.
FAILED! ...., points out that the operation is failed; the system points out,
between brackets, a message that specifies the cause of the failure.
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Working) is available the
Stop pushbutton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure.
The user can print the displayed information choosing the Print pushbutton.
2.
3.
If the user wants to delete from the Command Scope area, one or more WSs, he has
to select the relevant records and to choose the Remove From List pushbutton.
4.
355
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
OK, points out that the operation has been successfully executed, the WS
symbol changes its colour from green to brown.
FAILED! ...., points out that the operation is failed; the system points out,
between brackets, a message that specifies the cause of the failure.
During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Working) is available the
Stop pushbutton that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure.
The user can print the displayed information choosing the Print pushbutton.
356
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
The Legacy Communication Server Port command allows managing the functional status
of the serial ports (CSB Port objects) of the CommServerF (Communication Server Board
CSB object) that are physically connected to the Network Elements managed with the Legacy
protocol.
Warning. The subject option is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
Warning. The commands for the management of the serial ports (CSB Port objects) of the
CommServerS (CSB object), are present into the Equipment window relevant to the
CommServerS 168.
The choice of the Legacy Communication Server Port command opens a menu that
contains the following options:
D
Open, it activates the management processes of the serial port as pointed out at
paragraph 16.11.1. This operation is usually called to open the port.
View, it displays the values of the configuration parameters relevant to the port in open
status, selected as pointed out at paragraph 16.11.2.
Close, it deactivates the management processes of the serial port as pointed out at
paragraph 16.11.3. This operation is usually called to close the port.
Open the CSB map window that contains the CSB Port symbol in close status to be
opened and select such a symbol.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected an object different from
a CSB Port in close status (symbol with blue colour) or two or more CSB Port objects.
2.
168.
For more detailled information refer to the equipment Manual: CommServerS Manager.
357
SIAE COMMANDS
16.
Retry Timeout (sec.). The time range that the system has to wait before retrying
the new forwarding of a message that has not had an answer.
The default value is 10 169. The user can change it moving the cursor in the scroll
bar; the new value is pointed out over the bar.
Retry Number. The number of times that the supervisory system has to repeat the
message before to detect as an error the absence of the dialogue with the
peripheral unit.
The default value is 2 169. The user can change it moving the cursor in the scroll
bar; the new value is pointed out over the bar.
Polling Delay (sec.). The time range that passes between the query of an
equipment and the query of the next one.
The default value is 0 169. The user can change it moving the cursor in the scroll
bar; the new value is pointed out over the bar.
Warning. The parameter is managed by the edition 2.0 of the CommServerF
(refer to paragraph 9.2.5). For the preceding versions, this parameter has the
value 0 (disabled parameter).
3.
Open the CSB map window that contains the CSB Port symbol in open status for which
the user wants to displays the relevant parameters and select such a symbol.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected an object different from
a CSB Port in open status (symbol with green colour) or two or more CSB Port objects.
2.
169.
358
The default value can be modified by superuser (see manual NMS5UX System Administrator).
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
Port Number, Line Speed, Retry Timeout (sec.), Retry Number, Polling Delay (sec.).
The description of such parameters is reported at paragraph 16.11.1.
It is not possible to change the values of the above mentioned parameters. If it is
necessary to change them, the user has to close and then to open again the port under
examination, assigning to the parameters the desired values.
Open the CSB map window that contains the CSB Port symbol in open status to be
closed and select such a symbol.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected an object different from
a CSB Port in open status (symbol with green colour) or two or more CSB Port objects.
2.
3.
359
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
The Legacy Workstation Port command allows managing the functional status of the serial
ports (WS Port objects) of the workstation/server (Workstation WS object) that are physically
connected with the Network Elements managed with Legacy protocol.
Warning. The subject option is present into the menu only if the software modules for the
management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.
Warning. To let a serial port of a workstation to be used by the supervisory system, such a port
has to be described before into the description of the serial ports file. For more detailed
information refer to the manual NM5UX Administrator manual.
The choice of the Legacy Workstation Port command opens a menu that contains the
following options:
D
Open, it activates the management processes of the serial port as pointed out at
paragraph 16.12.1. This operation is usually called to open the port.
The number of the WS Ports that can be opened depends on the number of the serial
interfaces, equipped with the workstation, set at the creation of the WS object (refer
to paragraph 9.1.4).
View, it displays the values of the configuration parameters relevant to the port in open
status, selected as pointed out at paragraph 16.12.2.
Close, it deactivates the management processes of the serial port as pointed out at
paragraph 16.12.3. This operation is usually called to close the port.
Open the WS map window that contains the WS Port symbol in close status to be
opened and select such a symbol.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected an object different from
a WS Port in close status (symbol with blue colour) or two or more WS Port objects.
2.
360
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
Retry Timeout (sec.). The time range that the system has to wait before retrying
the new forwarding of a message that has not had an answer.
The default value is 10 169. The user can change it moving the cursor in the scroll
bar; the new value is pointed out over the bar.
Retry Number. The number of times that the supervisory system has to repeat the
message before to detect as an error the absence of the dialogue with the
peripheral unit.
The default value is 2 169. The user can change it moving the cursor in the scroll
bar; the new value is pointed out over the bar.
3.
Open the WS map window that contains the WS Port symbol in open status for which
the user wants to displays the relevant parameters and select such a symbol.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected an object different from
a WS Port in open status (symbol with green colour) or two or more WS Port objects.
2.
361
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
Open the WS map window that contains the WS Port symbol in open status to be
closed and select such a symbol.
Warning. This command is not available if it has been selected an object different from
a WS Port in open status (symbol with green colour) or two or more WS Port objects.
2.
3.
362
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
Warning. This command is available only for the equipment managed with SNMP
protocol, except for the Elfo and SDH N+1 equipment.
The SNMP Equipment Controller Reset option executes the software restarting of the
selected equipment.
This operation consists of the new initialization of all the communication channels
equipment.
170
of the
Warning. Its execution causes a temporary disconnection of the equipment from the supervisory
system.
The system points out the end of the operation through a message concerning the result of the
operation itself.
170.
363
16.
SIAE COMMANDS
Warning. This option is available only if it has been selected a PMP type NE.
The PMP Clear Alarm Table option allows transferring, to the selected PMP equipment, the
default table of the alarms memorised into the server/workstation over which it has been
installed its own NMS5UX system 171.
The system points out the end of the operation through a message concerning the result of the
operation itself.
171.
The files that contain the default alarm tables (relevant to each type of NE managed by the system)
are copied on the server/workstation during the installation of the supervisory system.
364
17
17.
NMS6UX
The NMS6UX menu is an optional menu. It is present, in the map window (also in the Root
window), ONLY if installed the NMS6UX software module 172.
Warning. The description of the commands present in the menu is reported in the NMS6UX user
manual.
172.
Software module realized by Siae Microelettronica for the contemporay management of more
NMS5UX systems.
The module integrates into a NMS5UX system (menu NMS6UX) from which the other NMS5UX
systems are managed.
365
17.
366
NMS6UX
18
18.
HELP
NMS5UX, contains the options to open the online manuals of the supervisory system.
About NMS5UX, displays the list of the software programs that constitutes the
NMS5UX software package.
367
18.
HELP
18.1
NMS5UX
System access
User profile
The NMS5UX menu contains the options to open the online manuals of the supervisory
system.
Warning. The list of the available manuals changes according to the type of equipment that ban
be managed by its own NMS5UX system.
The System Administrator manual is available for the superuser user only.
To display a manual, select the option relevant to the title of the desired manual.
By means of the Acrobat Reader browser, the system automatically opens the desired manual.
To surf inside the manual, display the bookmarks (Show Bookmarks option 173) in Acrobat
Reader and select the desired option into the list of the contents.
173.
368
18.
18.2
HELP
ABOUT NMS5UX
System access
User profile
The About NMS5UX command displays the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5UX
software package.
At the selection of the command, the system displays the NMS5UX Version window composed
by a table that lists the programs and by a bar relevant to the menus described into the following
paragraphs.
By means of the commands present into the window, the user can execute the following
operations:
D
To print the data present into the window (refer to paragraph 18.2.2.1).
To display the details of the word queues relevant to its own supervisory system (refer
to paragraph 18.2.2.2).
"
"
"
"
369
18.
HELP
18.2.2.1
File Menu
"
"
18.2.2.2
"
Option Menu
Code Word. It displays the detail of the word queues relevant to its own supervisory
system.
The selection of the command opens the CodeWord window that points out the following
information:
User number, maximum number of NMS5UX users that can open the NMS5UX
graphical interface (using the same map or different maps).
Check number, number of version of the word queues present on its own NMS5UX
system.
Expired date, it points out the possible expiring date of the word queues.
The wording Definitively points out that the word queues do not have an expiring
date
Type equipment, types of the Siae equipment managed by its own NMS5UX
system.
18.2.2.3
"
370
Command Menu
Check Legacy Processes. It allows ending possible commands, relevant only to the
equipment managed with Legacy protocol, that have remained appended.
Section
Appendix
371
372
19
19.
Tab. 19.1 points out the commands available into the Siae World map window and into all the
map windows of the NMS5UX system, relevant only to the features provided by the supervisory
system of Siae microelettronica.
Such commands are pointed out by the wording SIAE written before the command name.
All the menus and the commands that are not specific ones of the NMS5UX system but on the
contrary are general ones of the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform, are not
pointed out into the table and are not described into the subject manual.
For the description of such commands, refer to the specific documentation.
Warning. Some commands, present into Tab. 19.1, are optional ones. Then, such commands
can be absent into the specific menu of its own NMS5UX system.
373
19.
Menus
Map SIAE Map
Commands
Import/Export
Change Map
Edit
SIAE Objects
Add
Container
Network Element
SNMP Managed
SNMP Managed (Virtual)
Legacy Protocol Managed
(1)
Legacy Protocol Managed
(Virtual) (1)
Container
Network Element
Radio Link for Scoreboards (2)
Legacy Workstation (1)
Communication Server Board
Delete
Container
Network Element
Radio Link for Scoreboards (2)
Legacy Workstation (1)
Communication Server Board
Arrange Symbol
Horizontal Alignment
Vertical Alignment
Map Realignment
Generate Info for WEB (2)
Performance
SIAE Performance
Configuration
SIAE Objects
374
Equipment Info
19.
Menus
Configuration
SIAE Objects
Commands
Radio Certificate
Legacy Hw/Sw Edition Inventory (1)
Legacy Physical Unit Inventory (1)
SNMP Software Inventory
Legacy Alarm Average (1)
Fault
SIAE Logs
Options
SIAE Options
Locate
SIAE Elements
Equipment List/Locate
Proxy Equipment List (2)
Equipment Find
Misc
SIAE Tools
375
19.
Menus
Commands
Alarm History Delete Backup
Pm Backup
Misc
SIAE Tools
Pm Restore
Pm Delete
PDHSDH Radio
Scoreboards (2)
Line Test
Network Element
Container
Connect
Network Element
Container
Disconnect
Network Element
Container
Network Element
Container
Configuration Upload
Network Element
Container
Connect
Connect (1)
Disconnect
Disconnect (1)
Legacy Communication Open (1)
Server Port (1)
Legacy Communication View (1)
Server Port (1)
Close (1)
Legacy Workstation Port Open (1)
(1)
376
19.
Menus
Commands
(1)
View (1)
Close (1)
SIAE Commands
NMS6UX (2)
Warning. The description of the commands present in the subject menu is reported
in the NMS6UX user manual.
Help
NMS5UX
About NMS5UX
(1) Menu/option present only if the software modules for the management of the Legacy
equipment have been installed.
(2) OPTIONAL menu/command.
377
19.
378
20
20.
The SIAE menu and commands, present into the Siae World map window and into all the map
windows of the NMS5UX system, are not always available for the user.
Their availability depends on the profile of the NMS5UX user (Superuser, Privileged, etc.) who
has opened the map and on the access type to the map (Read Only or Read Write).
In Tab. 20.1, the system points out the SIAE commands. For each command, it is pointed out
the operating level and the access type to the map necessary to be able to use it.
With details, into the column:
D
RO/RW, points out that the command is available as into the map with Read Only
access as into the map with Read Write one.
RW, points out that the command is available only into the map with Read Write
access.
S, points out that the command is available for the user with Superuser level.
P, points out that the command is available for the user with Privileged level.
A, points out that the command is available for the user with Advanced level.
N, points out that the command is available for the user with Normal level.
E, points out that the command is available for the user with Entry level.
Warning. Some commands, present into Tab. 20.1, are optional ones. Then, it is possible that
such commands are not present into the specific menu of its own NMS5UX system.
379
20.
Map
User
RO/RW
SPA
Change Map
RO/RW
SP
RW
SPA
RO (3)
RW (4)
N E (3)
S P A (4)
RW
SPA
RW
SPANE
Map Realignment
RW
SP
RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
Performance Monitoring
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPAN
Equipment Info
RO/RW
S P A N E (5)
Radio Certificate
RO/RW
S P A N E (6)
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
380
20.
Menu/command
Map
User
RO/RW
S P A N E (7)
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
S P A N E (8)
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
NE Alarm History
RO/RW
S P A N E (8)
NE Current Alarms
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
S P A N E (9)
Alarm Summary
RO/RW
SPANE
Nms5ux Statistics
RO/RW
SPANE
Transaction Log
RO/RW
S P A N E (10)
(11)
RO/RW
RO/RW
RO/RW
RO/RW
SPAN
RO/RW
S P A N E (12)
RO/RW
S P A N E (13)
RO/RW
SP
RO/RW
S P A N E (14)
RO/RW
S P A N E (15)
RO/RW
SPAN
RO/RW
SPAN
RO/RW
SPAN
RO/RW
SPAN
RO/RW
SPAN
HW Inventory
RO/RW
SPAN
Equipment List/Locate
RO/RW
S P A N E (16)
RO/RW
SPANE
Equipment Find
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPA
RO/RW
SP
RO/RW
SP
Pm Backup
RO/RW
S P A (17)
Pm Restore
RO/RW
SP
Pm Delete
RO/RW
SP
381
20.
Menu/command
Map
User
RO/RW
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPA
Database Backup
RO/RW
Database Restore
RO/RW
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
Connect Container
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
Disconnect Container
RO/RW
SPANE
SNMPForced NE Disconnect
RO/RW
SPAN
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
SNMPConfiguration Download
RO/RW
SPAN
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPANE
RO/RW
SPAN
RO/RW
RO/RW
SPANE
NMS5UX
RO/RW
SPANE
About NMS5UX
RO/RW
SIAE Commands
NMS6UX
NMS6UX (2)
Help
382
20.
Notes
(1) Menu/option present only if the software modules for the management of the Legacy
equipment have been installed.
(2)
OPTIONAL menu/command.
(3)
For the subject user profile/map access, it is possible only to check the data (View
command).
(4)
For the subject user profile/map access, it is possible as to check as to change the data
(View and Modify command).
(5)
Only the user with Privileged and Superuser profile can save the information on file.
(6)
For the Normal and Entry user profiles, it is not available the Save command.
(7)
For the Entry user profile, it is not available the ActionBench Switch command.
(8)
For the Normal and Entry user profiles, it is not possible to delete and to mark the records
(ActionDelete and ActionAcknowledge commands).
(9)
(10) For the Normal and Entry user profiles, it is not available the ActionDelete Records
command.
(11) For the profile:
Superuser, the operations listed into the window refer to all the users of all the
maps managed by the NMS5UX system
Privileged and Advanced, the operations refer only to the users of its own map
(12) For the Privileged, Advanced, Normal and Entry user profiles, it is possible only to change
their own passwords.
(13) The ActionForce Logout and ActionForced Exit commands are available only for the
user with Superuser profile.
(14) For the Normal and Entry user profiles, it is not available the ActionForce Logout
command.
(15) For the Entry user profile, it is not possible to set/modify the parameters.
(16) The ActionMap Structure Rebuild command is available only for the user with
Superuser profile.
The CommandsSNMP Command Executor command is available only for the users
with Superuser, Privileged and Advanced profiles.
Then, for the profile:
Superuser, the information, present into the window, refers to all the NEs of all the
maps managed by the NMS5UX system
Privileged, Advanced, Normal, Entry, the operations refer only to the NEs of their
own map.
(17) The activation of the Delete Table box is available only for the user with Superuser profile.
383
20.
384
21
21.
The following tables point out the available options present into the Siae World map window and
into all the map windows of the NMS5UX system.
The options relevant to the features provided by the supervisory system of Siae microelettronica
(identified by the wording SIAE before the name of the command) are pointed out through bold
characters.
The menus and the options that are not specifically relevant to the NMS5UX system, but that
are created by the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform are not pointed out through
bold characters.
The menus and the options present into the map winow are not always available for the user.
The availability of such elements depends on the profile of the NMS5UX user (Superuser,
Privileged, etc.) who has opened the map. Tables specifie for each menu/option the necessary
user profile in such a way that the option is present into the map window. With details, into the
User column, the system can display the following wordings:
S, it points out that the option is available for the user with Superuser level.
P, it points out that the option is available for the user with Privileged level.
A, it points out that the option is available for the user with Advanced level.
N, it points out that the option is available for the user with Normal level.
E, it points out that the option is available for the user with Entry level.
Warning. The menus/options pointed out into Tab. 21.1 refer to the NMS5UX system
release 6.4 and to the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform release 6.2.
The menus/options pointed out into Tab. 21.2 refer to the NMS5UX system release 6.4
and to the HP OpenView Windows NNM graphical platform release 7.5.
The menus/options pointed out into Tab. 21.1 and Tab. 21.2 are the DEFAULT options present
at the installation of the NMS5UX 6.4 system. Such elements can be different from the ones
present into your own map windows because the NMS5UX system is provided with some
optional options and the options/menus of the HP OpenView graphical platform can be
reconfigured 174.
174.
For the reconfiguration of the HP OpenView menus/options, refer to the specific documentation.
385
21.
Tab. 21.1
Menus and commands NMS5UX 6.4 and HP OpenView 6.2
Map
User
New
Open
Refresh
SPANE
Save As
SIAE Map
Import/Export
SPA
Change Map
SP
Import
Export
Delete
Properties
Print Window
SPANE
Submap
New
Open
Delete
Delete This Submap
Set This Submap As Home
Make This Submap Persistent
Properties
Close
Snapshot
New
Open
Delete
Properties
Close
Edit
Exit
SPANE
Add Object
SPANE
Add Connection
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
SPANE
SPANE
Find
SPANE
Submap
Object By Selection Name
386
21.
Find
User
SPANE
Object By Attribute
Object By Comment
Object By Status
Object By Symbol Type
Object By Label
SIAE Objects
Add
Container
SPA
Container
Network Element
N E (3)
S P A (4)
Container
SPA
Network Element
Radio Link for Scoreboards (2)
LegacyWorkstation (1)
Communication Server Board
Arrange
Symbol
Add To Quick
Navigator
Horizontal Alignment
SPANE
Vertical alignment
Map Realignment
SP
SPANE
SPANE
Manage Objects
Unmanage Objects
Object Properties
View
Highlights
Select Highlighted
SPANE
Clear Highlighted
Hidden Objects
SPANE
387
21.
Hidden Objects
User
SPANE
SPANE
SPANE
On For This Submap
SPANE
SPANE
SPANE
SPANE
Window Geometry
SPANE
Redo Layout
Performance
SIAE
Performance
SPANE
Performance Monitoring Read
SPANE
Performance Monitoring
Old Performance Monitoring
Export Performance Monitoring
View/Modify P.M. Status
Configuration
388
SPAN
SIAE Objects
Equipment Info
S P A N E (5)
Radio Certificate
S P A N E (6)
SPANE
SPANE
21.
SIAE Objects
Faults
Alarms
Network
Connectivity
S P A N E (7)
SPANE
SPANE
Poll Node
Ping
SPANE
Trace Route
Test IP/TCP/SNMP
SIAE Logs
Tools
User
SPANE
Network Alarm History
S P A N E (8)
SPANE
SPANE
NE Alarm History
S P A N E (8)
NE Current Alarms
SPANE
S P A N E (9)
Alarm Summary
SPANE
Nms5ux Statistics
SPANE
Transaction Log
S P A N E (10)
(11)
Report Presenter
Terminal
Telnet (hpterm)
Connection
Telnet (xterm)
Unused IP Addresses
HP OpenView Launcher
Data Warehouse
Export Topology
Export Events
Export Trend Data
Node View
CDP View
Neighbor View
Views
OSPF Backbone
All VLANs
Options
Report Configuration
SNMP Configuration
Event Configuration
Data Collection & Thresholds: SNMP
MIB Application Builder: SNMP
389
21.
User
SIAE Options
SPAN
S P A N E (12)
S P A N E (13)
SP
S P A N E (14)
S P A N E (15)
SPAN
SPAN
HW Inventory
Window
License Password
SPANE
Root
SPANE
Home
Parent
Quick Navigator
Locate
Misc
SIAE Elements
SIAE Tools
Equipment List/Locate
S P A N E (16)
SPANE
Equipment Find
SPANE
SPA
SP
SP
Pm Backup
S P A (17)
Pm Restore
SP
Pm Delete
PDHSDH
Radio
Scoreboards (2)
390
SP
Scoreboards Creator (2)
SPANE
SPANE
SPANE
SPA
Database Backup
Database Restore
21.
Network Element
Network Element
Disconnect
User
SPANE
Container
SPANE
Container
Network Element
SPANE
Container
SNMP Forced NE Disconnect
SPAN
Legacy
Reset & Connect
(1)
SPANE
Alarm
Realignment
Network Element
Configuration
Upload
Network Element
Container (1)
SPANE
Container
SPANE
Container
SPAN
Communication
Server Board
Connect
SPANE
Legacy
Workstation (1)
Connect (1)
Legacy
Communication
Server Port ((1))
Open (1)
Disconnect
SPANE
Disconnect (1)
SPANE
View (1)
Close (1)
Legacy
Workstation Port
((1))
Open (1)
SPANE
View (1)
Close (1)
SPAN
NMS6UX (2)
Help
SPANE
Display Legend
Online Manuals
SPANE
Welcome to NNM
SPANE
391
21.
User
SPANE
On Window
SPANE
NMS5UX
Using Help
NNM
SPANE
Overview
SPANE
Tasks
Home Page
Patches and Updates
Release Notes
Whats New with NNM
Extended Topology Release Notes
About NNM
Misc
Tasks
SPANE
Functions
HP OpenView
On the Web
392
OpenView Home
SPANE
Online Support
SPANE
About HP OpenView
SPANE
About NMS5UX
21.
Tab. 21.2
Menus and commands NMS5UX 6.4 and HP OpenView 7.5
Map
User
New
Open
Refresh
SPANE
Save As
SIAE Map
Import/Export
SPA
Change Map
SP
Import
Export
Delete
Properties
Print Window
SPANE
Submap
New
Open
Delete
Delete This Submap
Set This Submap As Home
Make This Submap Persistent
Properties
Close
Snapshot
New
Open
Delete
Properties
Close
Edit
Exit
SPANE
Add Object
SPANE
Add Connection
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
SPANE
SPANE
Submap
SPANE
393
21.
Find
User
SPANE
Object By Attribute
Object By Comment
Object By Status
Object By Symbol Type
Object By Label
SIAE Objects
Add
SPA
Container
Network Element SNMP Managed
Network Element SNMP Managed (Virtual)
Network Element Legacy Protocol
Managed (1)
Network Element Legacy Protocol
Managed (Virtual) (1)
Radio Link for Scoreboards (2)
LegacyWorkstation (1)
Communication Server Board
Modify/View
N E (3)
S P A (4)
Container
Network Element
Radio Link for Scoreboards (2)
LegacyWorkstation (1)
Communication Server Board
Delete
SPA
Container
Network Element
Radio Link for Scoreboards (2)
LegacyWorkstation (1)
Communication Server Board
Arrange
Symbol
Add To Quick
Navigator
View
Horizontal Alignment
SPANE
Vertical alignment
Map Realignment
SP
SPANE
SPANE
SPANE
Manage Objects
Unmanage Objects
Object Properties
Highlights
Select Highlighted
SPANE
Clear Highlighted
Hidden Objects
394
SPANE
21.
Hidden Objects
User
SPANE
SPANE
SPANE
On For This Submap
SPANE
SPANE
SPANE
Connection
SPANE
Window Geometry
SPANE
SIAE Performance
SPANE
Performance Monitoring Read
SPANE
Performance Monitoring
Old Performance Monitoring
Export Performance Monitoring
View/Modify P.M. Status
Configuration
SPAN
SIAE Objects
Equipment Info
S P A N E (5)
Radio Certificate
S P A N E (6)
SPANE
SPANE
395
21.
SIAE Objects
Faults
Network Connectivity
S P A N E (7)
SPANE
Poll Node
Ping
SPANE
Trace Route
Alarms
SPANE
Test IP/TCP/SNMP
SPANE
SIAE Logs
Tools
User
S P A N E (8)
SPANE
SPANE
NE Alarm History
S P A N E (8)
NE Current Alarms
SPANE
S P A N E (9)
Alarm Summary
SPANE
Transaction Log
S P A N E (10)
(11)
Report Presenter
Unused IP Addresses
HP OpenView Launcher
Data Warehouse
Export Topology
Export Events
Export Trend Data
Options
Report Configuration
SNMP Configuration
Event Configuration
Data Collection & Thresholds: SNMP
MIB Application Builder: SNMP
Load/Unload MIBs: SNMP
Network Polling Configuration: IP
SIAE Options
396
SPAN
21.
Window
SIAE Options
User
S P A N E (12)
S P A N E (13)
SP
S P A N E (14)
S P A N E (15)
SPAN
SPAN
SPAN
SPAN
SPAN
HW Inventory
SPAN
License Password
SPANE
Root
SPANE
Home
Parent
Quick Navigator
Locate
Misc
SIAE Elements
SIAE Tools
Equipment List/Locate
S P A N E (16)
SPANE
Equipment Find
SPANE
SPA
SP
SP
Pm Backup
S P A (17)
Pm Restore
SP
Pm Delete
SP
PDHSDH
Radio
Scoreboards (2)
SIAE
Commands
Line Test
SPANE
SPANE
SPANE
SPA
Database Backup
Database Restore
Network Element
SPANE
Container
Connect
Network Element
SPANE
Container
Disconnect
Network Element
SPANE
397
21.
User
Container
SIAE
Commands
SPAN
Legacy
Reset & Connect (1)
SPANE
Alarm Realignment
Network Element
Container (1)
SPANE
Container
Configuration
Upload
Network Element
SPANE
Container
SPAN
Communication
Server Board
Connect
SPANE
Legacy
Workstation (1)
Connect (1)
Legacy
Communication
Server Port ((1))
Open (1)
Disconnect
SPANE
Disconnect (1)
SPANE
View (1)
Close (1)
Legacy
Workstation Port (1)
Open (1)
SPANE
View (1)
Close (1)
SPAN
NMS6UX (2)
Help
SPANE
Display Legend
Online Manuals
SPANE
Welcome to NNM
SPANE
SPANE
On Window
SPANE
NMS5UX
Using Help
398
21.
Help
User
NNM
Overview
SPANE
NNM
Tasks
SPANE
Home Page
SPANE
Patches
Updates
and
SPANE
NNM Patches
Event Correlation Services (ECS) Patches
SNMP Emanate SNMP Agent Patches
Misc
SPANE
About NNM
SPANE
Tasks
SPANE
Functions
HP OpenView
On the Web
OpenView Home
SPANE
Online Support
About HP OpenView
SPANE
About NMS5UX
399
21.
Notes
(1) Menu/option present only if the software modules for the management of the Legacy
equipment have been installed.
(2)
OPTIONAL menu/command.
(3)
For the subject user profile/map access, it is possible only to check the data (View
command).
(4)
For the subject user profile/map access, it is possible as to check as to change the data
(View and Modify command).
(5)
Only the user with Privileged and Superuser profile can save the information on file.
(6)
For the Normal and Entry user profiles, it is not available the Save command.
(7)
For the Entry user profile, it is not available the ActionBench Switch command.
(8)
For the Normal and Entry user profiles, it is not possible to delete and to mark the records
(ActionDelete and ActionAcknowledge commands).
(9)
(10) For the Normal and Entry user profiles, it is not available the ActionDelete Records
command.
(11) For the profile:
Superuser, the operations listed into the window refer to all the users of all the
maps managed by the NMS5UX system
Privileged and Advanced, the operations refer only to the users of its own map
(12) For the Privileged, Advanced, Normal and Entry user profiles, it is possible only to change
their own passwords.
(13) The ActionForce Logout and ActionForced Exit commands are available only for the
user with Superuser profile.
(14) For the Normal and Entry user profiles, it is not available the ActionForce Logout
command.
(15) For the Entry user profile, it is not possible to set/modify the parameters.
(16) The ActionMap Structure Rebuild command is available only for the user with
Superuser profile.
The CommandsSNMP Command Executor command is available only for the users
with Superuser, Privileged and Advanced profiles.
Then, for the profile:
Superuser, the information, present into the window, refers to all the NEs of all the
maps managed by the NMS5UX system
Privileged, Advanced, Normal, Entry, the operations refer only to the NEs of their
own map.
(17) The activation of the Delete Table box is available only for the user with Superuser profile.
400
22
22.
22.1
Each report must refer to one single trouble; multiple troubles must be described in different
report.
Required information are the following.
401
22.
Critical, if trouble prevents the correct use of a main software product functionality;
Minor, if trouble rarely prevents the correct use of a secondary software product
subfunctionality;
Annexes It indicates if, and how many, information are annexed to trouble report.
NOTE: this is not the Fault Report Form, to be sent with each repair item.
402
22.
403
22.
404